Trilogy 100, Trilogy 200,

Trilogy 02 & Trilogy 202

Service & Technical Information
 Patents pending. Trilogy is a trademark of Respironics, Inc.
AVAPS is a trademark of Respironics, Inc.
Note: C-FlexTM is used under license.
© 2010 Respironics, Inc. and its affiliates. All rights reserved.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 1 - COPYRIGHT & WARRANTY

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 LIMITED WARRANTY
Respironics, Inc. warrants that the Trilogy 100, Trilogy 200, Trilogy O2, & Trilogy 202 systems shall be free from
defects of workmanship and materials and will perform in accordance with the product specifications for a
period of two (2) years from the date of sale by Respironics, Inc. to the dealer. If the product fails to perform in
accordance with the product specifications, Respironics, Inc. will repair or replace – at its option – the defective
material or part. Respironics, Inc. will pay customary freight charges from Respironics, Inc. to the dealer
location only. This warranty does not cover damage caused by accident, misuse, abuse, alteration, and other
defects not related to material or workmanship.
Respironics, Inc. disclaims all liability for economic loss, loss of profits, overhead, or consequential damages
which may be claimed to arise from any sale or use of this product. Some states do not allow the exclusion or
limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
Accessories and replacement parts, including, but not limited to, circuits, tubing, leak devices, exhaust valves,
filters, and fuses, are not covered under this warranty. However, Respironics warrants that the Product’s
internal and detachable battery (where supplied) will be free from defects in material and workmanship, under
normal and proper use and when correctly maintained in accordance with applicable instructions, for a period
of 90 days from the date of shipment by Respironics to the original purchaser. This warranty does not apply to
batteries that are dropped, misused, altered, or otherwise damaged after they are shipped.
This warranty is given in lieu of all other express warranties. In addition, any implied warranties – including any
warranty of merchantability or fitness for the particular purpose – are limited to two years. Some states do not
allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitation may not apply to you. This
warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state.
To exercise your rights under this warranty, contact your local authorized Respironics, Inc. dealer or contact
Respironics, Inc. at:

PAGE 2 - COPYRIGHT & WARANTY 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

REVISION HISTORY
CHAPTER TITLE DATE DESCRIPTION OF CHANGES
Copyright/Warranty 6/11/2010 Manual updated to include Trilogy O2 & Trilogy
202 devices.

Revision History 6/11/2010 Manual updated to include Trilogy O2 & Trilogy

202 devices.

Table of Contents 6/11/2010 Manual updated to include Trilogy O2 & Trilogy

202 devices.

Introduction 6/11/2010 Manual updated to include Trilogy O2 & Trilogy

202 devices.

Warnings & Cautions 6/11/2010 Manual updated to include Trilogy O2 & Trilogy
202 devices.

Specifications 6/11/2010 Manual updated to include Trilogy O2 & Trilogy

202 devices.

Theory of Operation 6/11/2010 Manual updated to include Trilogy O2 & Trilogy

202 devices.

System Setup 6/11/2010 Manual updated to include Trilogy O2 & Trilogy

202 devices.

Troubleshooting 6/11/2010 Manual updated to include Trilogy O2 & Trilogy

202 devices.

Maintenance 6/11/2010 Manual updated to include Trilogy O2 & Trilogy

202 devices.

Section updated to document new maintenance

requirements.

Repair & Replacement 6/11/2010 Manual updated to include Trilogy O2 & Trilogy
202 devices.

Repair Kits 6/11/2010 Manual updated to include Trilogy O2 & Trilogy

202 devices.

Testing 6/11/2010 Manual updated to include Trilogy O2 & Trilogy

202 devices.

Tools and Equipment 6/11/2010 Manual updated to include Trilogy O2 & Trilogy
202 devices.

Schematics 6/11/2010 Manual updated to include Trilogy O2 & Trilogy

202 devices.

1002735, VER. 04 REVISION HISTORY - PAGE 1

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 This page intentionally blank.

PAGE 2 - REVISION HISTORY 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
1.0 CHAPTER OVERVIEW ................................................................................ 1-1
1.1 TRILOGY 100 & TRILOGY 200 VENTILATORS INTENDED USE ..................... 1-1
1.2 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 INTENDED USE ............................................ 1-1
1.3 TRILOGY 100 & TRILOGY 200 SYSTEM OVERVIEW .................................... 1-1
1.4 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 SYSTEM OVERVIEW ..................................... 1-2
1.4 SERVICE TRAINING ................................................................................... 1-2
1.5 SERVICE/TECHNICAL SUPPORT STATEMENT .............................................. 1-2

CHAPTER 2: WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, & NOTES

2.0 CHAPTER OVERVIEW ................................................................................ 2-1
2.1 WARNINGS ............................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 CAUTIONS ................................................................................................ 2-2
2.3 NOTES ..................................................................................................... 2-2

CHAPTER 3: SPECIFICATIONS, CLASSIFICATIONS, & SYSTEM FEATURES

3.0 CHAPTER OVERVIEW ................................................................................ 3-1
3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................ 3-1
3.2 TRILOGY 100 & TRILOGY 200 PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS ......................... 3-1
3.3 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS .......................... 3-1
3.4 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................... 3-2
3.5 PRESSURE SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................... 3-2
3.6 SD CARD & SD CARD READER ................................................................ 3-3
3.7 STANDARDS COMPLIANCE ........................................................................ 3-3
3.8 CONTROL ACCURACY ............................................................................... 3-4
3.9 MEASURED PATIENT PARAMETERS ........................................................... 3-5
3.10 TRILOGY 100 SPONTANEOUS BREATHING DURING POWER FAILURE CONDI-
TIONS .............................................................................................................. 3-5
3.11 TRILOGY 200, TRILOGY O2, & TRILOGY 202 SPONTANEOUS BREATHING DUR-
ING POWER FAILURE CONDITIONS .................................................................... 3-5
3.12 RESISTANCE VALUES ............................................................................. 3-5
3.13 WEEE/ROHS RECYCLING DIRECTIVES ................................................... 3-6
3.14 EMC INFORMATION ................................................................................ 3-7
3.15 FRONT PANEL FEATURES ..................................................................... 3-11
3.16 TRILOGY 100 & TRILOGY 200 SIDE PANEL FEATURES .......................... 3-13
3.17 TRILOGY 100 & TRILOGY 200 REAR PANEL FEATURES ......................... 3-14
12. TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 SIDE PANEL FEATURES ............................. 3-15
1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 1 - TABLE OF CONTENTS

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

3.19 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 REAR PANEL FEATURES ..........................3-16
3.21 POWER SOURCES .................................................................................3-17

CHAPTER 4: THEORY OF OPERATION

4.0 CHAPTER OVERVIEW ................................................................................4-1
4.1 AC/DC POWER SUPPLY ...........................................................................4-1
4.2 POWER MANAGEMENT BOARD ..................................................................4-2
4.3 SYSTEM BOARD........................................................................................4-4
4.4 CPU DAUGHTER CARD .............................................................................4-7
4.5 SENSOR BOARD ......................................................................................4-9
4.6 FRONT PANEL BOARD ............................................................................4-11
4.7 INTERFACE BOARD .................................................................................4-12

CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM SETUP

5.0 CHAPTER OVERVIEW ................................................................................5-1
5.1 KEYPAD LOCK FEATURE ...........................................................................5-1
5.2 ACCESSING THE STARTUP AND MONITOR SCREENS ...................................5-2
5.3 MONITOR SCREEN INDICATORS .................................................................5-4
5.4 CHANGING AND VIEWING SETTINGS IN FULL MENU ACCESS MODE ..........5-11
5.5 CHANGING THE DEVICE SETTINGS AND ALARMS ......................................5-12
5.6 ADDITIONAL SETTING SPECIFIC TO THERAPY MODES ...............................5-16
5.7 VIEWING AND CHANGING OPTIONS MENU ITEMS ......................................5-25
5.8 VIEWING THE ALARM LOG .......................................................................5-29
5.9 VIEWING THE EVENT LOG .......................................................................5-30
5.10 VIEWING DEVICE INFORMATION .............................................................5-31

CHAPTER 6: TROUBLESHOOTING & ALARMS

6.0 CHAPTER OVERVIEW ................................................................................6-1
6.1 TRILOGY VENTILATOR ALARMS .................................................................6-1
6.2 AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARM INDICATORS ................................................6-1
6.3 AUDIO PAUSE AND ALARM RESET FEATURES............................................6-4
6.4 ALARM SUMMARY TABLE ..........................................................................6-6
6.5 TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE .....................................................................6-21
6.6 DOWNLOADING TRILOGY ALARM ERROR CODE INFORMATION ..................6-25
6.7 TRILOGY ERROR CODES AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS ...............................6-29

CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE
PAGE 2 - TABLE OF CONTENTS 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

7.0 CHAPTER OVERVIEW ................................................................................ 7-1
7.1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE ........................................................................... 7-1
7.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ...................................................................... 7-1
7.3 TRILOGY VENTILATOR MAINTENANCE RECORD .......................................... 7-9
7.4 CHECKING THE INTERNAL BATTERY AND DETACHABLE BATTERY CYCLE
COUNTS ........................................................................................................ 7-10
7.5 INTERNAL BATTERY CONDITIONING PROCEDURE ..................................... 7-11
7.6 CLEANING AND DISINFECTION PROCEDURES ........................................... 7-12

CHAPTER 8: REPAIR & REPLACEMENT

8.0 CHAPTER OVERVIEW ................................................................................ 8-1
8.1 EXTERNAL COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ..................................... 8-2
8.2 FRONT/REAR/BOTTOM ENCLOSURE REMOVAL .......................................... 8-7
8.3 BOTTOM ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . 8-10
8.4 FRONT ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION .... 8-25
8.5 REAR ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION...... 8-37
8.6 FRONT/REAR/BOTTOM ENCLOSURE INSTALLATION .................................. 8-69
8.7 OXYGEN BLENDING MODULE COMPONENT REPAIR & REPLACEMENT PROCE-
DURES ........................................................................................................... 8-70
8.8 PACKAGING ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE ...................................................... 8-81

CHAPTER 9: REPAIR KITS

9.0 CHAPTER OVERVIEW ................................................................................ 9-1
9.1 REPAIR KIT REFERENCE TABLE ............................................................... 9-2
9.2 POLLEN FILTER KITS ................................................................................ 9-5
9.3 REMOVABLE AIR PATH FOAM KIT ............................................................. 9-5
9.4 HANDLE KIT ............................................................................................. 9-6
9.5 BLOWER BELLOWS KIT ............................................................................ 9-6
9.6 INLET AIR PATH ASSEMBLY KIT ................................................................ 9-7
9.7 CAPACITOR/BATTERY RETAINER ASSEMBLY KIT ....................................... 9-7
9.8 INTERNAL BATTERY PACK KITS ................................................................ 9-8
9.9 SPEAKER HOLD-DOWN KIT ....................................................................... 9-8
9.10 SYSTEM BOARD TO ETHERNET CABLE KIT .............................................. 9-9
9.11 SYSTEM BOARD TO INTERFACE PCA CABLE KIT .................................... 9-9
9.12 CAPACITOR KIT .................................................................................... 9-10
9.13 BATTERY FAN KIT ................................................................................ 9-10
9.14 DC POWER CONNECTOR CABLE KIT .................................................... 9-11
1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 3 - TABLE OF CONTENTS

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

9.15 OXYGEN CONNECTOR KIT .....................................................................9-11
9.16 AC POWER CONNECTOR CABLE KIT .....................................................9-12
9.17 PCB SUPPORT FOR SYSTEM PCA KIT ..................................................9-12
9.18 PCB SUPPORT FOR POWER MANAGEMENT PCA KIT ............................9-13
9.19 POWER CORD CLAMP KIT .....................................................................9-13
9.20 TUBING ELBOW KIT ..............................................................................9-14
9.21 SYSTEM BOARD TO LCD CABLE FERRITE KIT .......................................9-14
9.22 SYSTEM BOARD TO LCD CABLE KIT.....................................................9-15
9.23 SYSTEM BOARD TO SENSOR BOARD CABLE KIT ...................................9-15
9.24 KEYPAD KIT .........................................................................................9-16
9.25 PCB MODULE PLATE “A” KIT ..............................................................9-16
9.26 PCB MODULE PLATE “B” KIT ..............................................................9-17
9.27 BASE ENCLOSURE KITS ........................................................................9-18
9.28 INTERFACE BOARD RETAINER KIT .........................................................9-20
9.29 TRANSITION TUBE LOCATOR KIT ...........................................................9-21
9.30 DETACHABLE BATTERY RETAINER KIT ..................................................9-21
9.31 DETACHABLE BATTERY CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY KIT .............................9-22
9.32 STIRRING FAN KIT ................................................................................9-23
9.33 PORTING BLOCK ADAPTOR KIT .............................................................9-23
9.34 TRANSITION TUBE KIT ..........................................................................9-24
9.35 ACTIVE EXHALATION CONTROL MODULE KIT .........................................9-24
9.36 STIRRING FAN RETAINER KIT ................................................................9-25
9.37 BATTERY FAN SHIELD KIT ....................................................................9-25
9.38 OUTLET FLOW PATH THERMISTOR KIT ..................................................9-26
9.39 TEMPERATURE SENSOR O-RING KIT ......................................................9-26
9.40 FLOW STRAIGHTENER KIT .....................................................................9-27
9.41 EXHAUST FAN ASSEMBLY KIT ...............................................................9-27
9.42 FLOW SENSOR ASSEMBLY KITS ............................................................9-28
9.43 ENCLOSURE SEAL KIT .........................................................................9-29
9.44 TRILOGY FRONT ENCLOSURE KITS ........................................................9-30
9.45 REAR ENCLOSURE KITS ........................................................................9-31
9.46 PCA INVERTER KIT ..............................................................................9-32
9.47 SPEAKER KIT .......................................................................................9-32
9.48 BELLOWS CLIP KIT ...............................................................................9-33
9.49 MOTOR BLOWER ASSEMBLY KIT ...........................................................9-34
9.50 INTERFACE PCA KIT.............................................................................9-34
9.51 SENSOR BOARD ASSEMBLY KITS ..........................................................9-35
PAGE 4 - TABLE OF CONTENTS 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

9.52 FRONT PANEL/KEYPAD LED PCA KIT .................................................. 9-36
9.53 SYSTEM BOARD W/ DAUGHTER BOARD KIT........................................... 9-37
9.54 POWER MANAGEMENT PCA KIT ........................................................... 9-37
9.55 POWER SUPPLY PCA KIT..................................................................... 9-38
9.56 TRILOGY 100 TUBING KIT ..................................................................... 9-38
9.57 TRILOGY HARDWARE KIT ...................................................................... 9-38
9.58 LCD KIT .............................................................................................. 9-39
9.59 SD CARD KIT ....................................................................................... 9-39
9.60 SHIPPING CONTAINER KITS ................................................................... 9-40
9.61 STIRRING FAN FOAM KIT ...................................................................... 9-40
9.62 WARNING LABEL KITS .......................................................................... 9-41
9.63 TOP PLATE ENCLOSURE KIT ................................................................. 9-44
9.64 O2 INLET O-RING KIT ........................................................................... 9-45
9.65 DC INLET O-RING KIT ........................................................................... 9-45
9.66 HANDLE O-RING KIT ............................................................................. 9-46
9.67 RUBBER FEET KIT ................................................................................ 9-47
9.68 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE LABEL KIT ................................................. 9-47
9.69 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 OXYGEN BLENDER PCA .......................... 9-47
9.70 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 OXYGEN BLENDER WHISPER CAP ............ 9-48
9.71 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 OXYGEN BLENDER FLOW ELEMENT ......... 9-48
9.72 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 OXYGEN BLENDER MIXING ELEMENT ....... 9-49
9.73 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 OXYGEN BLENDER HOUSING.................... 9-50
9.74 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 OXYGEN BLENDER PCA SPACER ............ 9-51
9.75 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 OXYGEN BLENDER WIRE HARNESS .......... 9-52
9.76 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 OXYGEN BLENDER FILTER DUCT ............. 9-53
9.77 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 OXYGEN BLENDER PURGE FAN ............... 9-54
9.78 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 OXYGEN BLENDER LOWER MANIFOLD...... 9-54
9.79 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 OXYGEN BLENDER PRESSURE SENSOR PORT
CLIP.............................................................................................................. 9-55
9.80 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 OXYGEN BLENDER MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY 9-56
9.81 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 BLENDER PLASTIC THREADED CAP.......... 9-56
9.82 TRILOGY 200/TRILOGY O2/TRILOGY 202 TUBING KIT............................ 9-57
9.83 TRILOGY O2/TRILOGY 202 OXYGEN BLENDER TUBING KIT ................... 9-57
9.84 TRILOGY PORTING BLOCK ADAPTOR CAP KIT ....................................... 9-57
9.85 FAA LABEL KIT ................................................................................... 9-58
9.86 TRILOGY BASE SEAL KIT ...................................................................... 9-58

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 5 - TABLE OF CONTENTS

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

CHAPTER 10: TRILOGY TESTING & CALIBRATION
10.0 CHAPTER OVERVIEW ............................................................................10-1
10.1 TRILOGY 100 CHECKOUT PROCEDURE ..................................................10-1
10.2 TRILOGY 100 CHECKOUT PROCEDURE DATA SHEET ...........................10-11
10.3 TRILOGY 200 CHECKOUT PROCEDURE ................................................10-12
10.4 TRILOGY 200 CHECKOUT PROCEDURE DATA SHEET ...........................10-22
10.5 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 CHECKOUT PROCEDURE ........................10-23
10.6 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 CHECKOUT PROCEDURE DATA SHEET ....10-34
10.7 DOWNLOADING THE TRILOGY FIELD SERVICE APPLICATION, TRILOGY TOOL-
BOX SOFTWARE, AND NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS DAQMX SOFTWARE .............10-35
10.8 PERFORMING FIRMWARE UPGRADES ...................................................10-53
10.9 USING THE TRILOGY TOOLBOX ............................................................10-59
10.10 TRILOGY FIELD SERVICE APPLICATION ..............................................10-66
10.11 SAFETY TEST (OPTIONAL) ..............................................................10-104

CHAPTER 11: TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

11.0 CHAPTER OVERVIEW ............................................................................11-1
11.1 COMMON HAND TOOLS .........................................................................11-1
11.2 EQUIPMENT ..........................................................................................11-1
11.3 SUPPLIES .............................................................................................11-3
11.4 ACCEPTABLE TEST EQUIPMENT ............................................................11-4

CHAPTER 12: SCHEMATICS

12.0 SCHEMATICS STATEMENT .....................................................................12-1

PAGE 6 - TABLE OF CONTENTS 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
1.0 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter provides an introduction for the Trilogy Ventilator as well as contact and service training
information.

1.1 TRILOGY 100 & TRILOGY 200 VENTILATORS INTENDED USE

The Trilogy 100 & Trilogy 200 systems provide continuous or intermittent ventilatory support for the care of
individuals who require mechanical ventilation. The Trilogy 100 & Trilogy 200 are intended for pediatric
through adult patients weighing at least 5 kg (11 lbs).
The device is intended to be used in home, institution/hospital, and portable applications such as wheelchairs
and gurneys, and may be used for both invasive and non-invasive ventilation. It is not intended to be used as
a transport ventilator.
The system is recommended to be used only with various combinations of Respironics-approved patient circuit
accessories, such as patient interface devices, humidifiers, water traps, and circuit tubing.

1.2 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 INTENDED USE

The Respironics Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202 systems provides continuous or intermittent ventilatory support for
the care of individuals who require mechanical ventilation with or without FiO2 blending. Trilogy O2 & Trilogy
202 are intended for pediatric through adult patients weighing at least 5 kg (11 lbs.).
The device is intended to be used in hospitals and institutions, and for portable applications such as
wheelchairs and gurneys only when in an institutional setting. It may be used for both invasive and non-
invasive ventilation. It is not intended to be used as a transport ventilator.
The system is recommended to be used only with various combinations of Respironics-approved patient circuit
accessories, such as patient interface devices, humidifiers, water traps, and circuit tubing.

1.3 TRILOGY 100 & TRILOGY 200 SYSTEM OVERVIEW

This ventilator provides both pressure control and volume modes of therapy. The device can provide non-
invasive or invasive ventilation. It can be used to provide total therapy to patients as they progress from non-
invasive to invasive ventilation.
When prescribed, the device provides numerous special features to help make patient therapy more
comfortable. For example, the ramp function allows you to lower the pressure when trying to fall asleep. The
air pressure will gradually increase until the prescription pressure is reached. Additionally, the Flex comfort
feature provides increased pressure relief during the expiratory phase of breathing.
The ventilator can be operated using several different power sources, including an internal Lithium-Ion battery.
This battery is automatically used when the detachable Lithium-Ion battery pack, external Lead Acid battery, or
AC power are not available.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 1-1

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
1.4 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
This ventilator provides both pressure control and volume modes of therapy. The device can provide non-
invasive or invasive ventilation. It can be used to provide total therapy to patients as they progress from non-
invasive to invasive ventilation.
When prescribed, the device provides numerous special features to help make therapy more comfortable. For
example, the ramp function allows you to lower the pressure when trying to fall asleep. The air pressure will
gradually increase until the prescription pressure is reached. Additionally, the Flex comfort feature provides
increased pressure relief during expiratory phase of breathing.
The ventilator can be operated using several different power sources, including an internal Lithium-Ion battery.
This battery is automatically used when the detachable Lithium-Ion battery pack, external Lead Acid battery, or
AC power are not available.
This ventilator is equipped with an oxygen blending module which allows oxygen to be delivered to the patient
within a range of 21% to 100% concentration.

SERVICE TRAINING
Respironics offers service training for the Trilogy devices. Training includes complete disassembly of the
device, troubleshooting subassemblies and components, setup of test equipment, and necessary testing. For
more information, contact the Service Marketing department at:

E-mail: service.operations@respironics.com
Phone: (724) 755-8220
Fax: (724) 755-8230

1.5 SERVICE/TECHNICAL SUPPORT STATEMENT

For technical assistance, please contact Respironics Customer Satisfaction.

U.S.A. and Canada

Phone:1-800-345-6443
Fax: 1-800-886-0245

International
Phone: 1-724-387-4000
Fax: 1-724-387-5012

PAGE 1-2 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

CHAPTER 2: WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, & NOTES
2.0 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
Warnings, cautions, and notes are used throughout this manual to identify possible safety hazards, conditions
that may result in equipment or property damage, and important information that must be considered when
performing service and testing procedures. Please read this chapter carefully before servicing Trilogy
Ventilators.

WARNING
Warnings indicate the possibility of injury to people.

CAUTION
Cautions indicate the possibility of damage to the device.

NOTE
Notes are used to emphasize a characteristic or important consideration.

2.1 WARNINGS

WARNINGS

• Electronic components used in this device are subject to damage from static electric-
ity. Repairs made to this device must be performed only in an antistatic, Electro-static
Discharge (ESD)-protected environment.
• To assure the safety of the service technician and the specified performance of the
device, Respironics requires that only trained technicians perform any repairs or
adjustment to the Trilogy devices.
• High voltages are present inside this device. To avoid electrical shock, disconnect the
electrical supply before attempting any repairs on the device.
• DO NOT immerse this device into any fluids.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 2-1

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
2.2 CAUTIONS

CAUTIONS

• Federal law (US) restricts this device to sale by, or on the order of, a physician.
• Care should be taken to avoid exposure of Trilogy Ventilators to temperatures at or
near the extremes of those specified in the Specifications Chapter of this manual. If
exposure to such temperatures has occurred, the device should be allowed to return
to room temperature before being turned on.
• Never place liquids on or near Trilogy Ventilators.
• To avoid electrical shock, disconnect the electrical supply before cleaning Trilogy
Ventilators.
• The information in this manual is provided for service personnel reference.

2.3 NOTES

NOTES

• Additional Warnings, Cautions and Notes are located throughout this manual.
• Refer to the Trilogy Provider Manuals for additional Warnings, Cautions and Notes.

PAGE 2-2 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

CHAPTER 3: SPECIFICATIONS, CLASSIFICATIONS, & SYSTEM
FEATURES
3.0 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter identifies the specifications, classifications, & system features for the Trilogy Ventilators.

3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS

Operating Storage

Temperature 5° C to 40° C -20° C to 60° C

Relative Humidity 15 to 95% (non-condensing) 15 to 95% (non-condensing)

Atmospheric Pressure 110 kPa to 60 kPa N/A

The operating range for the charging of the internal and detachable batteries is 10° C to 30° C.
The internal and detachable batteries will power the ventilator for the full operating range of 5°
C to 40° C.

Accuracies stated in this manual are based on specific environmental conditions. For stated
accuracy, the environmental conditions are: Temperature: 20-30° C, Humidity: 50% relative,
Altitude: nominally 380 meters

3.2 TRILOGY 100 & TRILOGY 200 PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Dimensions 16.68 cm L x 28.45 cm W x 23.52 cm H

Weight Approximately 5 kg (with the detachable battery installed)

3.3 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Dimensions 21.13 cm L x 28.45 cm W x 23.52 cm H

Weight Approximately 6.1 kg (with the detachable battery installed)

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 3-1

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
3.4 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

AC Voltage Source 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 2.1 A

Detachable Battery: Voltage: 14.4 VDC

Trilogy 100 & Trilogy 200 Capacity: 4176 mAh
Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202 Capacity: 71 Wh
Chemistry type: Lithium-Ion

Internal Battery: Voltage: 14.4 VDC

Trilogy 100 & Trilogy 200 Capacity: 4176 mAh
Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202 Capacity: 71 Wh
Chemistry type: Lithium-Ion

Type of Protection Against Electric Shock: Class II/Internally Powered Equipment

Degree of Protection Against Electric Shock: Type BF Applied Part

Degree of Protection Against Ingress of Water: Device: Drip Proof, IPX1

Mode of Operation: Continuous

Fuses: There are no user-replaceable fuses.

Power Consumption: 2.1 A @ 100 VAC = 210 Watts of Power

Consumption

3.5 PRESSURE SPECIFICATIONS

Output: 4 to 50 pressure units (may be cmH2O, hPA, or

mBar depending on device setup)

PAGE 3-2 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

3.6 SD CARD & SD CARD READER
Use only SD cards and SD card readers available from Respironics or the following:
• SanDisk® Standard SD Card - 2.0 GB - Respironics Part Number: 1053952
• SD Card Reader/Writer - Respironics Part Number: 1047300

3.7 STANDARDS COMPLIANCE

This device is designed to conform to the following standards:
• IEC 60601-1: Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements for safety
• IEC 60601-1-2: General requirements for safety - Collateral standard: Electromagnetic compatibil-
ity - Requirements and tests
• ISO 10651-2-Lung ventilators for medical use -- Particular requirements for basic safety and
essential performance -- Part 2: Home care ventilators for ventilator-dependant patients
• RTCA-D0160F section 21, category M; Emission of Radio Frequency Energy (Trilogy 200 Only)

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 3-3

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
3.8 CONTROL ACCURACY

PARAMETER RANGE ACCURACY

IPAP 4 to 501 pressure units2 Greater of 2 pressure units or 8% of setting

EPAP 0 to 25 pressure units for Active Circuits Greater of 2 pressure units or 8% of setting
4 to 25 pressure units for Passive Circuits
CPAP 4 to 20 pressure units Greater of 2 pressure units or 8% of setting
PEEP 0 to 25 pressure units for Active Circuits Greater of 2 pressure units or 8% of setting4
4 to 25 pressure units for Passive Circuits
Pressure 4 to 50 pressure units Greater of 2 pressure units or 8% of setting
Pressure support 0 to 30 pressure units3 Greater of 2 pressure units or 8% of setting4
Tidal Volume 50 to 2000 ml5 Greater of 10 ml or 10% of setting (Active Circuits)
Greater of 15 ml or 15% of setting (Passive Circuits)
Breath Rate 0 to 60 BPM for AC mode Greater of + 1 BPM or +10% of the setting
1 to 60 BPM for all other modes
Timed Inspiration 0.3 to 5.0 seconds + .1 second
Rise Time 1 to 66 + 2 pressure units (the device will increase to a pressure
of .67* (IPAP - EPAP) + 2 pressure units @ the set rise
time multiplied by 100 ms for pressure supports less
than or equal to 25.)
Ramp Start Pressure 0 to 25 pressure units for Active Circuits 8% of setting + 2% Full Scale
4 to 25 pressure units for Passive Circuits
4 to 19 pressure units in CPAP mode
Ramp Length Off, 5 to 45 minutes + 2 minutes
Flex Off, 1 to 3 7 N/A

Flow Trigger Sensitivity 1 to 9 l/min N/A

Trilogy 100, Trilogy 200, & 10 to 90% N/A
Trilogy 202, Flow Cycle
Trilogy O2 Flow Cycle 10 to 40% N/A
Apnea Rate 4 to 60 BPM Greater of 1 BPM or 10% of setting
FiO2 Output 21% to 100% 21% to 50% is +3%
(Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202 50% to 95% is +5%
Only) 100% is -5%
O2 Input Pressure Rating 40 to 87 PSI
(Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202
Only)

Specifications listed above are based on using a standard circuit (1.8 meter tubing - REF 622038; Passive Exhalation Device - REF
1040417; Active Exhalation Device with PAP - REF 1053716)
1Limited to 25 pressure units when using the Bi-Flex feature in S mode.
2Pressure units may be cmH2O, hPa, or mBar depending on device setup.
3
The difference between the Inspiratory Pressure and the Expiratory Pressure must never be more than 30 pressure units.
4Pressure Support and PEEP not to exceed 50 pressure units.
5
Reflects compensation for BTPS.
6
The range of values correspond to the tenths of seconds (e.g., a setting of 4 indicates a Rise Time of 0.4 seconds).
7Flex is not available when AVAPS is active. Flex is not available with Active Circuits.

PAGE 3-4 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

3.9 MEASURED PATIENT PARAMETERS

PARAMETER RANGE ACCURACY

Vte/Vti 0 to 2000 ml Greater of 15ml or 15% of reading
Minute Ventilation 0 to 99 l/min Calculation based on measured Vte
or Vti and Respiratory Rate
Estimated Leak Rate 0 to 200 l/min N/A
Respiratory Rate 0 to 80 BPM Greater of 1 BPM or 10% of reading
Peak Inspiratory Flow 0 to 200 l/min 3 l/min plus 15% of reading
Peak Inspiratory Pressure 0 to 99 pressure unit Greater than 2 pressure units or
10% of reading
Mean Airway Pressure 0 to 99 pressure units Greater than 2 pressure units or
10% of reading
% Patient Triggered Breaths 0 to 100% N/A
I:E Ratio 9.9- 1: 1-9.9 Calculation based on Inspiratory
Time and Expiratory Time
All flows and volumes are measured at BTPS conditions.

3.10 TRILOGY 100 SPONTANEOUS BREATHING DURING POWER FAILURE CONDI-

TIONS

INSPIRATORY RESISTANCE EXPIRATORY RESISTANCE

FLOW SET POINT (LPM) (PRESSURE UNITS) (PRESSURE UNITS)
Active Circuit Passive Circuit Active Circuit Passive Circuit
30 < 2.0 < 1.0 < 1.5 < 1.2
60 < 10.0 < 4.0 < 4.0 < 3.7

3.11 TRILOGY 200, TRILOGY O2, & TRILOGY 202 SPONTANEOUS BREATHING DUR-
ING POWER FAILURE CONDITIONS

INSPIRATORY RESISTANCE (PRESSURE EXPIRATORY RESISTANCE (PRESSURE

UNITS) UNITS)
FLOW SET POINT
(LPM) Active Active Circuit Passive Active Active Circuit Passive
Circuit with Proximal Circuit Circuit with Proximal Circuit
Flow Sensor Flow Sensor
30 < 3.0 < 3.5 < 2.0 < 2.0 < 2.0 < 1.5
60 < 9.0 < 10.5 < 5.0 < 3.0 < 4.5 < 4.0

3.12 RESISTANCE VALUES

During a ventilator failure, both the inhalation resistance and the exhalation resistance, measured at the patient
connection port, will not exceed 10 pressure units at 60 l/min. or 0.8 pressure units at 5 l/min.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 3-5

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
3.13 WEEE/ROHS RECYCLING DIRECTIVES
If you are subject to the WEEE/RoHS recycling directives, refer to www.respironics.com for the passport for
recycling this product and the batteries.

PAGE 3-6 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

3.14 EMC INFORMATION
3.14.1 GUIDANCE AND MANUFACTURER ’S DECLARATION - ELECTROMAGNETIC EMISSIONS
This device is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The user of this device
should make sure it is used in such an environment.

ELECTROMAGNETIC
EMISSIONS TEST COMPLIANCE
ENVIRONMENT - GUIDANCE
RF emissions Group 1 The device uses RF energy only for its
CISPR 11 internal function. Therefore, its RF emissions
are very low and are not likely to cause any
interference in nearby electronic equipment.

RF emissions Class B The device is suitable for use in all

CISPR 11 establishments, including domestic
establishments and those directly connected
Harmonic emissions Class A to the public low-voltage power supply
IEC 61000-3-2 network that supplies building used for
Voltage fluctuations/Flicker Complies domestic purpose.
emissions
IEC 61000-3-3

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 3-7

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
3.14.2 GUIDANCE AND MANUFACTURER ’S DECLARATION - ELECTROMAGNETIC IMMUNITY
This device is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The user of this device
should make sure it is used in such an environment.

ELECTROMAGNETIC
IMMUNITY IEC 60601 TEST COMPLIANCE
ENVIRONMENT -
TEST LEVEL LEVEL
GUIDANCE
Electrostatic ±6 kV contact ±8 kV contact Floors should be wood,
Discharge (ESD) concrete or ceramic tile. If floors
±8 kV air ±15 kV air are covered with synthetic
IEC 61000-4-2 material, the relative humidity
should be at least 30%.

Electrical fast ±2 kV for power ±2 kV for supply mains Mains power quality should be
Transient/burst supply lines that of a typical home or
hospital environment.
IEC 61000-4-4 ±1 kV for input-output ±1 kV for input/output
lines lines

Surge ±1 kV differential ±1 kV differential Mains power quality should be

mode mode that of a typical home or
IEC 61000-4-5 hospital environment.
±2 kV common mode ±2 kV for common
mode

Voltage dips, <5% UT <5% UT Mains power quality should be

short interruptions (>95% dip in UT) for (>95% dip in UT) for that of a typical home or
and voltage 0.5 cycle 0.5 cycle hospital environment. If the user
variations on 40% UT 40% UT of the device requires continued
power supply operation during power mains
(60% dip in UT) for (60% dip in UT) for 5
input lines interruptions, it is
5 cycles cycles recommended that the device
IEC 61000-4-11 70% UT (30% dip in 70% UT (30% dip in be powered from an
UT) for 25 cycles UT) for 25 cycles uninterruptible power supply or
<5% UT (>95% dip in <5% UT (>95% dip in a battery.
UT) for 5 sec UT) for 5 sec

Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency magnetic

(50/60 Hz) fields should be at levels
magnetic field characteristic of a typical home
or hospital environment.
IEC 61000-4-8

NOTE: UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.

PAGE 3-8 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

3.14.3 GUIDANCE AND MANUFACTURER ’S DECLARATION - ELECTROMAGNETIC IMMUNITY
This device is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The user of this device
should make sure it is used in such an environment.

IMMUNITY IEC 60601 TEST COMPLIANCE ELECTROMAGNETIC ENVIRONMENT -

TEST LEVEL LEVEL (FDA) GUIDANCE

Portable and mobile RF communications

equipment should be used no closer to any part of
the device, including cables, than the
recommended separation distance calculated from
the equation applicable to the frequency of the
transmitter.
Recommended separation distance:
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3V d = 1.2 √P
IEC 61000-4-6 150 kHz to 80 MHz
outside ISM bandsa

10Vrms 10 V d = 1.2 √P
150 kHz to 80 MHz in
ISM bandsa

Radiated RF 10 V/m d = 1.2 √P 80 MHz to 800 MHz

10 V/m
IEC 61000-4-3 26 MHz to 2.5 Gz d = 2.3 √P 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
80 MHz to 2.5 GHz
where P is the maximum output power rating of the
transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter
manufacturer and d is the recommended separation
distance in meters (m).

Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as

determined by an electromagnetic site survey,
should be less than the compliance level in each
frequency range.b

Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment

marked with the following symbol:

NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection
from structures, objects, and people.

a Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land mobile radios,
amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess
the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the
measured field strength in the location in which the device is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above, the
device should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be
necessary, such as re-orienting or relocating the device.

b Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, the field strengths should be less than 3 V/m.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 3-9

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
3.14.4 RECOMMENDED SEPARATION DISTANCES BETWEEN PORTABLE AND MOBILE RF COMMU-
NICATIONS EQUIPMENT
The device is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances are
controlled. The customer or the user of this device can help prevent electromagnetic interference by
maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters)
and this device as recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the communications
equipment.

RATED MAXIMUM
POWER OUTPUT OF SEPARATION DISTANCE ACCORDING TO FREQUENCY OF TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER (METERS)
(WATTS)

150 kHz to 80 MHz 150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
outside ISM Bands outside ISM Bands d = 1.2 √P d = 2.3 √P
d = 1.2 √P d = 1.2 √P

0.01 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.23

0.1 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.73

1 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.3

10 3.8 3.8 3.8 7.3

100 12 12 12 23

For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distance d in meters
(m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output
power rating of the transmitter manufacturer.
Note 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
Note 2: The ISM (industrial, scientific and medical) bands between 150 kHz and 80 MHz are 6.765 MHz to 6.795
MHz;13.553 MHz to 13.567 MHz; 26.957 MHz to 27.283 MHz; and 40.66 MHz to 40.70 MHz.
Note 3: An additional factor of 10/3 is used in calculating the recommended separation distance for transmitters in the
ISM frequency bands between 150 kHz and 80 MHz and in the frequency range of 80 MHz and 2.5 GHz to decrease
the likelihood that mobile/portable communications equipment could interference if it is inadvertently brought into
patient areas.
Note 4: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and
reflection from structures, objects, and people.

PAGE 3-10 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

3.15 FRONT PANEL FEATURES
The front panel contains the control buttons, visual indicators, and display screen.

FIGURE 3-1: FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & DISPLAY SCREEN

NOTE
When you start therapy, the display backlight and the backlights on the buttons turn on,
the red and yellow alarm LEDs turn on momentarily, and an audible indicator sounds to
indicate that therapy has started. The Startup screen appears on the display.

WARNING
To make sure the device is operating properly at start-up, always verify that the audible
tone sounds and the Audio Pause LED lights red and then yellow momentarily.

3.15.1 BUTTONS
The following buttons are included on the front panel of the device.
1. Start/Stop Button - This button turns the airflow on or off, starting or stopping therapy.
2. Alarm Indicator and Audio Pause Button - This button serves two purposes: it temporarily
silences the audible portion of an alarm, and it also acts as an alarm indicator. When silencing an
alarm, if the cause of the alarm is not corrected, the alarm sounds again after one minute. Each
time the button is pressed, the alarm silence period resets to one minute.
3. Up/Down Button - This button allows you to navigate the display menu and edit device settings.
4. Left and Right Buttons - These buttons allow you to select display options or perform certain
actions specified on-screen.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 3-11

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
3.15.2 VISUAL INDICATORS
Several power and alarm indicators appear on the front panel.
1. AC Power LED - In the lower right hand corner of the front panel, a green LED indicates that the
AC power is applied to the device. This light remains on as long as adequate AC power is avail-
able.
2. Keypad Backlight LEDs - The Start/Stop, Up/Down, and Left/Right buttons all have a white LED
that lights up if the keypad backlight is turned on in the device Options menu.
3. Red Alarm LED - On the Audio Pause button, a red light flashes to indicate a high priority alarm.
4. Yellow Alarm LED - On the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button, a yellow light flashes to indicate
a medium priority alarm. A solid yellow light indicates a low priority alarm.

3.15.3 DISPLAY SCREEN

The display screen allows you to view settings, system status information, real-time patient data, alarms, and
logs. You can also modify certain settings on the display screen.

FIGURE 3-2: SAMPLE DISPLAY SCREEN

PAGE 3-12 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

3.16 TRILOGY 100 & TRILOGY 200 SIDE PANEL FEATURES
The ventilator’s side panels contain the following connectors and features.

FIGURE 3-3: RIGHT & LEFT SIDE PANEL

1. AC Power Inlet - You can plug the AC power cord into this connector, located on the right side of
the ventilator.
2. Breathing Circuit Connection - The breathing circuit connector is located on the right side of the
device. You can connect your circuit tubing system here.
3. Exhalation Porting Block - The porting block used here depends on whether you are using the
Whisper Swivel II or the active exhalation device. The Passive Exhalation Porting Block is shown
here.
4. Secure Digital (SD) Data Card Slot - On the left side of the device is a slot for the optional SD
Data Card. You can have the patient record usage and therapy information from the device on the
SD card.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 3-13

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
3.17 TRILOGY 100 & TRILOGY 200 REAR PANEL FEATURES
The ventilator’s rear panel has the connectors and features.

FIGURE 3-4: REAR PANEL

5. Serial Connector - You can use this connector to connect the device to a computer running PC
Direct or Alice Sleepware software or to other Respironics’ devices such as Ailce 5 or AOM. Use
the Trilogy RS232 Serial cable to connect the Trilogy to the external device or computer.
6. Remote Alarm/Nurse Call Connector - If you are using an optional remote alarm or nurse call
with the ventilator, you can connect the Respironics remote alarm adapter cable or nurse call
adaptor cable to this connector.
7. Ethernet Connector (when available)- You can connect a PC or router to this connector to
upload therapy information to a secure website so you can review therapy information remotely or
remotely troubleshoot and service the device.
8. External Battery Connector (DC Power Inlet) - You can connect an external, stand-alone lead
acid battery here, using the Respironics External Battery cable.
9. Oxygen (O2) Inlet Connector - If using low flow, supplemental oxygen, connect the oxygen
source to this connector using one of the O2 Inlet Quick Connects provided with the device.
10. Air Inlet and Filter - Insert the filter supplied with the device into the air inlet.
11. Detachable Battery Pack Slot - If you are using the Respironics Lithium-Ion detachable battery
pack to power the device, attach it here.
12. Cord Retainer - Wrap the power cord around this cord retainer to prevent someone from acciden-
tally disconnecting the power cord.

PAGE 3-14 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 SIDE PANEL FEATURES
The ventilator’s side panels contain the following connectors and features.

FIGURE R: RIGHT & LEFT SIDE PANEL

1. AC Power Inlet - You can plug the AC power cord into this connector, located on the right side of
the Trilogy Ventilator.
2. Breathing Circuit Connection - The breathing circuit connector is located on the right side of the
device. You can connect your circuit tubing system here.
3. Exhalation Porting Block - the porting block used here depends on whether you are using the
passive exhalation device or the active exhalation valve. The Passive Exhalation Porting Block is
shown here. If you are using the active exhalation device, attach the Active Exhalation Porting
block.
4. Air Inlet and Filter - Insert the filter supplied with the device into the air inlet.
5. Secure Digital (SD) Data Card Slot - On the left side of the device is a slot for the optional SD
Data Card. You can have the patient record usage and therapy information from the device on the
SD card.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 3-15

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
3.19 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 REAR PANEL FEATURES
The ventilator’s rear panel has the connectors and features.

FIGURE T: REAR PANEL

6. Serial Connector - You can use this connector to connect the device to a computer running PC
Direct or Alice Sleepware software or to other Respironics’ devices such as Ailce 5 or AOM.
7. Remote Alarm Connector - If you are using an optional remote alarm with the Trilogy, you can
connect the Respironics remote alarm adapter cable or nurse call cable to this connector.
8. Ethernet Connector - You can connect a PC or router to this connector to upload therapy infor-
mation to a secure website so you can review therapy information remotely or remotely trouble-
shoot and service the device.
9. External Battery Connector (DC Power Inlet) - You can connect an external, stand-alone lead
acid battery here, using the Respironics External Battery cable.
10. Oxygen (O2) Blending Module - If using high pressure supplemental oxygen, connect the oxy-
gen source to this DISS connector.
11. Detachable Battery Pack Slot - If you are using the Respironics Lithium-Ion detachable battery
pack to power the device, attach it here.
12. Cord Retainer - Wrap the power cord around this cord retainer to prevent someone from acci-
dentally disconnecting the power cord.

PAGE 3-16 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

3.21 POWER SOURCES
The ventilator accesses power from potential sources in the following order:
• AC Power
• External Battery
• Detachable Battery Pack
• Internal Battery

WARNING
Before connecting the battery, shutoff and disconnect any oxygen sources connected to the
ventilator, and move the battery at least 1.83 meters (6 feet) away from any oxygen sources.

3.21.1 AC POWER SOURCE

An AC power cord is provided with the device. You can connect the pronged end of the power cord to a wall
outlet that is not controlled by a wall switch and connect the socket end of the cord to the power inlet on the
back of the device.

3.21.2 EXTERNAL BATTERY

CAUTION

• Do not use the same external battery to operate both the ventilator and any other equipment.
• An external battery should only be connected to the ventilator using the Respironics Trilogy
External Battery Cable. This cable is fused, pre-wired and properly terminated to ensure
safe connection to a standard deep cycle lead acid battery. Use of any other adaptor or
cable may cause improper operation of the ventilator.

The ventilator can operate from a 12 VDC deep cycle marine-type (lead acid) battery using the Respironics
Trilogy External Battery Cable. This cable is pre-wired and properly terminated to ensure safe connection of an
external battery to the ventilator. Battery operating time depends on the characteristics of the battery and
usage of the device.
Due to a variety of factors, including battery chemistry, battery age, and use profile, the capacity of the external
battery as shown on the Trilogy display is only an estimate of the actual remaining capacity.
Refer to the instructions supplied with the Respironics External Battery Cable for detailed information on how
to operate the device using an external battery.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 3-17

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
3.21.3 DETACHABLE BATTERY

CAUTION

• The detachable and internal batteries wear out based on the amount of use (hours or full
charge-discharge cycles). The battery capacity and life are also reduced by operation at
higher temperatures.
• Only use the Respironics Trilogy Detachable Battery with the device.
• Prolonged operation or storage at elevated temperatures may reduce the service life of
the detachable or internal battery and other internal components of the ventilator.

Respironics offers a detachable Lithium-ion battery pack. To use the detachable battery pack, snap the battery
into place on the back of the ventilator. When the device is not connected to an AC power source or an external
battery, the detachable battery will power the device, if attached. The length of time the ventilator will operate
on battery power depends on many factors such as device settings, battery charge level, and condition or age
of the battery. When fully charged, a new battery can power the ventilator for approximately three hours under
typical patient conditions.
Whenever the ventilator is connected to AC power, it will automatically recharge the detachable battery pack. A
completely discharged detachable battery will reach 80% charge status within 8 hours, when charging at
approximately 23° C ambient temperatures.
One side of the detachable battery has a set of LEDs that indicate the amount of charge left on the battery. You
can press the button below the LEDs to view how much charge remains:

LED BATTERY CAPACITY

All 5 LEDs are lit 80-100% capacity

4 LEDs are lit 60-79% capacity

3 LEDs are lit 40-59% capacity

2 LEDs are lit 20-39% capacity

1 LED is lit 10 to 19% capacity

1 LED flashes 1 to 9% capacity

0 LEDs are lit 0% capacity

PAGE 3-18 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

3.21.4 INTERNAL BATTERY

CAUTION
The internal battery is NOT intended to serve as a primary power source. It should only
be used when other sources are not available, or briefly when necessary; for example
when changing power sources.

The device contains an internal battery that can be used as a backup power source. It is intended for use
during short periods while switching between external power sources, emergency situations, or short durations
when the user needs to be mobile. The length of time the ventilator will operate on internal power depends on
many factors such as device settings, battery charge level, and condition or age of the battery. When fully
charged, a new battery can power the ventilator for approximately three hours under typical patient conditions.
Whenever the ventilator is connected to AC power, it will automatically recharge the internal battery. A
completely discharged internal battery will reach 80% charge status within 8 hours, when charging at 23° C
ambient temperature.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 3-19

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 This page intentionally left blank.

PAGE 3-20 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

CHAPTER 4: THEORY OF OPERATION
4.0 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This document describes the theory of operation for the seven printed circuit boards employed by the Trilogy
ventilator support system.

4.1 AC/DC POWER SUPPLY

The AC/DC power supply is capable of accepting universal AC input supply of 100 - 240VAC @ 50/60Hz. It
generates a 30±2VDC nominal output with ripple voltage no greater than 250mVp-p over its entire operating
range. It is capable of delivering 3A (90 Watts) continuous and 5A (150Watts) peak (10% duty cycle) output
current.
The AC/DC power supply uses isolated fly-back topology. It incorporates the “TOPSwitch” (U1) from Power
Integrations with an internal high voltage power MOSFET. It operates at a switching frequency of 66±7 KHz.
The output of the power supply is regulated via a 3-terminal precision voltage regulator (U2).

Universal Power
Line Rectifier Switching Rectifier Voltage Output
AC Input Management
Filter & Filter Regulator & Filter Feedback Filter
Supply Board

Feedback
Control
Isolation

FIGURE 4-1 AC/DC POWER SUPPLY BLOCK DIAGRAM

The DC output of the AC/DC power supply is isolated from the AC input using the transformer (T1) and opto-
isolator (U3). The power supply can maintain 4000VAC isolation between primary and secondary, with less
than 1mA leakage current when held for 10 seconds. The physical spacing and galvanic isolation maintained
at 4mm. Slots are cut on the power supply board to satisfy adequate spacing where needed and to facilitate air
flow.
The power supply is able to survive a DC short indefinitely and recover to normal operation after the DC short
is removed. The operator should be careful and avoid touching any components on the power supply board
while the unit is plugged into an AC source or even several minutes after AC power is removed. There is a risk
of electrical shock that could cause serious injury or death. Assure C2 is thoroughly discharged before
attempting to service any components.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 4-1

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
4.2 POWER MANAGEMENT BOARD
The Trilogy ventilator is designed to accept four power sources each providing enough power to support the
complete functionality and performance of the ventilator. The power management board controls all these
power sources for the Trilogy ventilator. The power sources are used according to the predefined hierarchy
and rules set forth. The power management board is also capable of removing all power from the ventilator
except for those devices powered by a low current supply to conserve power when the ventilator is turned off
or running on battery. Lastly, the power management board provides a source of power diagnostic information
through analog sense voltages and the SMBus to the CPU.

AC/DC
Power
Power Path Boost
Supply
Controller Converter

External Reverse
Lead-Acid Poloarity
Battery Protection Power Mux

Detachable
Discharge
Lithium Ion
Switch System
Battery
Board

Internal Half Bridge

Charge
Lithium Ion Buck
Switch
Battery Converter

3.3 VDC
Sleep

Smart Battery System Manage

3.3 VDC
Li-ion

FIGURE 4-2 POWER MANAGEMENT BOARD BLOCK DIAGRAM

AC/DC power supply - It is the primary source of power for the Trilogy ventilator. It supplies 29±1VDC to the
power management board and the Trilogy ventilator may draw up to a maximum of 3A continuous and 5A peak
current from this power source. When this supply is available no current is drawn from any other remaining
power source.
External Pb-Acid Battery - The Trilogy ventilator can operate on an external Pb-acid battery with output
voltage between 11VDC to 28VDC when the AC/DC power supply is not available. The external Pb-acid
battery input is reverse polarity protected (Q1). The Trilogy ventilator can not charge the external Pb-acid
battery and can not use this source to charge the lithium ion batteries.
Detachable Lithium Ion Battery - This power source is used by the Trilogy ventilator when AC/DC power
supply and external Pb-acid battery power supply is not available. It provides 12VDC to 16.4VDC supply to the
ventilator and is rated for 4.16Ah @ 14.4V. The Trilogy ventilator may draw a maximum of 7.5A continuous or
14A peak current from the detachable lithium ion battery source. This battery is charged by the AC/DC power
supply only when its capacity is less than 100%, the environment is safe to charge the battery and when
charging would not overburden the AC/DC power supply.
Internal Lithium Ion Battery - This is the fourth and last available power source for the Trilogy ventilator. It is
permanently located inside the unit and is identical to the detachable lithium ion battery (i.e. 12VDC to
16.4VDC, 4.2 Ah capacity). If the internal lithium ion battery is totally discharged and no other power source is
available, the Trilogy ventilator will turn OFF, enable the power fail alarm and enter a low power state.

PAGE 4-2 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Boost Converter - The boost converter (U1) generates the regulated 29VDC supply used by the system
board. When the AC/DC power supply output voltage is greater than 28VDC the boost converter is OFF. If the
AC/DC power supply is not available one of the battery sources is selected. The boost converter will then boost
that battery voltage to 29VDC. When the input to the boost converter falls below 7VDC it is disabled.
Power Path Controller - The power path controller (U6) selects either the battery power supply or the AC/DC
power supply to run the ventilator. When AC/DC supply is available the power path controller turns ON the AC/
DC supply MOSFET (Q20) allowing the boost converter to receive its power from the AC/DC supply. When AC/
DC supply in not available the power path controller turns ON the two parallel battery MOSFETs (Q25 & Q26)
allowing the boost converter to receive its power from the battery supply. Initially, upon power up the circuitry
powers the system with these MOSFETs acting as forward biased diodes until the sense and status lines for
the power path controller have reached equilibrium.
Power Mux - The power path switch driver (U2) selects either the Pb-acid battery source or the lithium ion
battery source to power the system. It does so by controlling 4 N-channel MOSFETs (Q11, Q12, Q13, & Q14)
configured as two back to back ideal diode sources. This circuitry also disables all battery current when Trilogy
enters the low power state by turning the N-Channel MOSFETs OFF.
Smart Battery System Manager - The smart battery system manager (U3) controls both the internal and
detachable lithium ion batteries. Both batteries are equipped with smart technology and communicate with the
power management board using the standard SMBus protocol. The smart battery system manager allows the
CPU to communicate with either battery and contains memory for battery status and charger information while
simultaneously monitoring the status and alarms bits of both batteries to prevent hazardous operation of either
battery.
The software queries battery information about once per second. If the detachable lithium ion battery is
disconnected, the comparator (U3) will quickly switch power to the internal lithium ion battery. Thereby
continuing to power the system before the software realizes that a disconnect has happened. This comparator
also prevents the software from disabling the internal lithium ion battery when there is no detachable battery
present. The detachable battery is only disabled by the software if the software determines it to be a counterfeit
battery.
Each lithium ion battery will power the system until its capacity falls below 10% of its full charge capacity. When
both the lithium ion batteries are at less than 10% of the full charge capacity, they share the current drawn by
the ventilator. This is done such that the battery with the greater capacity provides more current and both
batteries reach 0% capacity simultaneously.
When both lithium ion batteries are at less than 100% charge capacity, both batteries share a maximum of 2A
charge current according to their relative charge state. This is done such that the battery with less capacity
receives greater charge current and both batteries reach 100% capacity simultaneously. The charge voltage
and current limit used for each lithium ion battery is set at 16.9V and 2A respectively using resistors (R39,
R35). In addition, the current sense resistor (R26) disables the battery charging operation when the total
current output from the power supply exceeds 4A to prevent overloading of the power supply.
The smart battery system manager also generates an internal 5VDC supply to control all internal functions
from the greatest available power source. A voltage divider network (R28 & R38) sets the AC present threshold
at 22VDC coming from the AC/DC power supply. The smart battery system manger (U3) uses an internal
comparator with a 1.19V reference to determine if AC is present.
Half Bridge Buck Converter - The buck converter (Q17, Q18, L4, & C33) generates the lithium ion battery
charge voltage for both the lithium ion batteries. The charge switch is controlled by the smart battery system
manager (U3).
Charge Switch - The charge switches (Q3, Q4, Q5, & Q6) facilitate charge current sharing between the two
lithium ion batteries when they simultaneously request a charge. It is controlled by the smart battery system
manager (U3) which provides charge current inversely proportional to the relative battery capacity using the
charge switch.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 4-3

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Discharge Switch - The discharge switches (Q7, Q8, Q9 & Q10) are used to control the discharge of the
lithium ion batteries. The smart battery system manager (U3) controls the discharging of the internal and
detachable lithium ion battery. The input MOSFETs (Q7, Q8) are turned OFF to prevent any accidental
charging of a battery if reverse current is measured in the battery discharge path.
3.3VDC Supply - There are two 3.3VDC supplies generated on the power management board. First, the linear
voltage regulator (U12) generates a 3.3VDC supply used when the ventilator is in the low power mode. And
second, the switching regulator (U9) generates a 3.3VDC supply used by the logic circuitry on the board. The
switching regulator (U9) is in shutdown mode when the Trilogy ventilator is in low power mode.

4.3 SYSTEM BOARD

A system board is the central printed circuit board in the Trilogy ventilator. It contains circuitry to interface with
all other printed circuit board assemblies in the Trilogy ventilator with the exception of the power supply board.
It generates and manages most of the internal power supply voltages for the Trilogy ventilator and contains the
complete motor control circuitry.

Active
CCFL Exhalation
Inverter Valve

3.3VDC
CCFL Valve
CPLD
Control Control

4.8VDC
Power Fail EEPROM
SD
Card
Over
Voltage Analog
5VDC
Protection Power Fail Multiplexer
Capacitor
Fans
RTC
3.3VDC
Analog
Power Over
12VDC CPU
Management Current LCD
Daughter
Board Protection 3.3VDC
Coin Cell Card
CPU
Battery

14VDC Interface
3.3VDC Board
Vcc
DSP
Supervisor

Off - Board
DC-DC FET
Bulk
Converter Driver
Capacitor

Front
Motor Motor
JTAG CPLD Panel
Current Voltage
Board
Sense Sense DSP

I/O
3-Phase Expander
FET
Motor
Driver
Motor Inverter
Level Sensor
Shifter Board

FIGURE 4-3 SYSTEM BOARD BLOCK DIAGRAM

PAGE 4-4 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

12VDC Supply - The dual switcher (U2) generates the 12VDC (2.5A max) supply using the 29VDC nominal
supply from the power management. This supply is used by the MOSFET driver IC’s, CCFL inverter, the front
panel LEDs and to generate the 7VDC power supply for the sensor board.
5VDC Supply - The dual switcher (U2) generates the 5VDC (2.5A max) supply using the 29VDC nominal
supply from the power management. This supply is used to generate the 3.3VDC supplies, power the motor
hall sensors, power the system protection circuits and power some components on the interface board.
14VDC Supply - The step down switching regulator (U18) generates the 14VDC supply. This is a dedicated
power supply to power the sensor board.
3.3VDC Supply - There are several 3.3VDC supplies generated on the system board.
• Buck regulator (U5) generates the 3.3VDC supply for the DSP. The 3.3VDC li-ion supply gener-
ated on the power management board acts as a back up to this supply
• Linear voltage regulator (U6) generates the 3.3VDC supply used by the analog signal conditioning
circuits
• Step-down DC/DC converter (U4) generated the 3.3VDC supply for the CPU
• Linear voltage regulator (U3) generates the 3.3VDC supply for the CPLD
Power Fail Supply - The 5VDC supply is also used to charge the 2.5F ultra capacitor (C113). In the event of a
power failure, the DC/DC converter (U24) uses the charge stored in the ultra capacitor to generate 4.8VDC
nominal supply for power failure alarm generation.
Digital Signal Processor (DSP) - The Trilogy system board uses the DSP (U7) to control the motor and acts
as a watchdog for the main CPU. It uses internal timers, interrupts, PWM, ADC and peripherals to run the
motor control algorithm. It has six 12-bit ADC inputs available used to monitor motor voltage, DC to DC output
voltage, motor current, system current, 1.2VDC reference voltage and motor temperature. It uses the SPI bus
to communicate with the sensor board and the 16-bit I/O expander (U17).
Complex Programmable Logic Devices (CPLD) - The CPLD is used for power fail operations, low power
mode, power up/wakeup and alarm functions of the Trilogy ventilator. It has a dedicated JTAG programming
connector (J9) and operated of a 3.3VDC supply.
DC-DC Converter - The DC to DC converter controls the voltage and current applied to the motor to produce
the desired speed. The converter consists of two N-channel FETs (Q3 & Q4) with an LC filter output stage. The
LC filter reduces both the ripple current and ripple voltage. The FETs are driven by the half bridge power
MOSFET driver (U10) controlled by the DSP. It also acts as a buffer between the motor control and the rest of
the system through a blocking diode (CR10).
3 Phase Motor Inverter - The current through the six phases of the motor are controlled using the inverter.
The inverter produces multi-phase current of variable frequency to provide the appropriate torque to control the
motor speed. The inverter stages consist of three half bridge power MOSTFET drivers (U13, U15 & U16)
controlling six N-channel MOSFETs (Q6 to Q11). The control signals for the driver are generated by the DSP.
Motor (external) - The motor used is a Brushless DC motor with low inductance, a WYE wound stator and 3
hall sensors located 120° apart (J5). A built in temperature sensor mounted on the motor board is used by the
DSP to monitor the motor temperature.
Off Board Storage Capacitor - An off board bulk capacitor (J6) stores the regenerative energy of the motor
during deceleration. It provides the ripple current necessary to accelerate and decelerate the motor and filter
the motor free wheeling voltage from damaging the MOSFETs.
Over Voltage Protection - The comparator (U31) determines if an over voltage condition occurs on the high
side of the DC-DC converter. If the measured voltage exceeds 35V, a precision current (U33 & Q28) sink is
enabled to shunt current through the bleeder resistors (R174 & R175).

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 4-5

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Over Current Protection - The system current is measured by the high side current monitor (U12) in
conjunction with the current sense resistor (R54). The buffer amplifiers (U36) drive the comparator (U29) with
a current limit set at 5.5A with 500mA of hysteresis. When the system current increase above the current set
point limit current to the motor is temporarily disabled and the motor spins freely until the current drops to a
safe level.
Motor Current Sense - A current sense resistor (R39) measures the bidirectional current through three motor
phases. The op-amp (U11: C) filters the current sense output before being used by the DSP to control the
motor.
Motor Voltage Sense - The terminal voltage across the motor is monitored using a resistor divider network
(R73 & R74) along with the op-amp circuit (U11:A). This signal is used by the DSP to control the motor.
Motor Temperature Sensing - Motor temperature monitored by the DSP using thermistor mounted on the
motor. If motor temperature rises above the set point the DSP limits the current going to the motor to keep it
cool.
Active Exhalation Valve Control - The active exhalation valve consists of a two valve system. One valve
dumps the pilot pressure while the other provides proportional control of the pilot pressure. Both the valves are
controlled by the CPU via connector on the system board (J10). To control the proportional valve the CPU
generates an analog control voltage uses a 16-bit DAC (U27). This signal drives a precision current sink (U28
and Q5) controlling the current flow through the proportional active exhalation valve.
Analog Multiplexer - The analog multiplexer (U26) is used by the CPU to monitor critical power supply
voltages and the oxygen concentration (signal generated by the interface board). The CPU selects one
channel at a time using the multiplexer channel select input.
Fans - There are three fan connections on the system board. These include the internal lithium ion battery
cooling fan, motor cooling fan and exhaust fan mounted behind the power supply. The battery cooling fan and
exhaust fan are controlled by the CPU while the motor cooling fan is controlled by the DSP.
Real Time Clock (RTC) - The RTC is set and read by the CPU using the I2C interface. Back-up power to the
RTC is provided by a 20mm coin cell battery (B1) on the system board.
Cold Cathode Fluorescent Lamp (CCFL) - The power supply and brightness control circuit for the CCFL
backlight inverter are on the system board (J20). The 12VDC supply is used to power the CCFL inverter and
the CPU generates the PWM signal used to control the brightness of the CCFL backlight inverter using op-
amplifier (U20).
EEPROM - The system board contains a 32Kbit SPI controlled EEPROM (U8) for the storage of calibration
and therapy data.
System LED - A blinking green led (CR14) is used to indicate normal system operation.
Vcc Supervisor - The microprocessor supervisory (U19) monitors the 3.3VDC DSP power supply. If the power
supply falls below 3.08VDC the microprocessor supervisory will reset the DSP.
LCD - The CPU generates all the signals to control the LCD but the physical interface for the LCD is on the
system board (J3).
JTAG - The DSP can be programmed via the JTAG interface (J2) on the system board or on the CPU board.

PAGE 4-6 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

4.4 CPU DAUGHTER CARD

System Board

Keypad
De-
LED
Mux
Driver
Flash

Debug

UART

LCD

SMBus

PWM

ADC

GPIO
and Wakeup
SRAM
Program

JTAG
EPROM
1.8VDC CPU
LDO

SD/MMC
Ethernet
Vcc
Controller
Supervisor

System Board System Board

FIGURE 4-4 CPU DAUGHTER CARD BLOCK DIAGRAM

3.3VDC Supply - The CPU daughter card (except the core) operates on a 3.3VDC supply. This power is
provided by the system board via the interface connector (J1).
1.8V Supply - The CPU has a core power requirement of 1.8VDC (250mA) generated by the fixed low-dropout
linear voltage regulator (U5).
VCC Supervisor - A dual voltage supervisor (U10) monitors both the 3.3VDC and 1.8 VDC supplies. The
thresholds for the supplies are set at 2.93V and 1.68V respectively. These thresholds preserve the system
within the recommended operating ranges of the CPU, SDRAM and FLASH.
Central Processing Unit (CPU) - The Trilogy ventilator uses a 32-bit System-on-chip RISC Core CPU (U1).
The processor is the brains behind all ventilator functions. Some of the key futures of the processor include the
LCD controller, Synchronous and Asynchronous memory controller, MMC/SD controller, SMBUS interface and
two UARTs.
There are two clock inputs used by the processor - a 14.7456 MHz crystal for system clock functions and a
32.768 kHz crystal for the RTC and power down modes. Even if the RTC is never used, the 32.768 kHz crystal
must be connected to provide proper state transition.
Three external pins can generate a system reset. If any of these three lines is pulled low, a system reset will
occur.
1. Power on Reset asserted by the dual VCC supervisor.
2. Power fail signal generated using pull-up resistor, and
3. User reset line connected to the system board through the slimstack connector.
The CPU provides the interface to the SD/MMC card. The physical interface for the SD/MMC card is a 6 wire
interface (one signal, one clock and four data) on the system board.
Two of the three available UART ports of the Processor are used, one for the RS-232 communication through
the system board connector while the other for debug operations through the debug connector.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 4-7

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Wakeup - The wakeup circuit is a result of a unique requirement for the CPU. Approximately 1 to 2 seconds
after the supply voltage reach a stable operating condition the CPU requires a rising edge on the wakeup
signal to boot. To generate this wakeup signal a 555 timer (U9) is used. When power is applied the timer
generates a 100Hz square wave output used as the wakeup signal for the CPU.
SDRAM - The CPU daughter card has a 64MB synchronous dynamic random access memory (SDRAM) (U2).
This memory is controlled by the processor using the built-in SDRAM controller. This memory is used by the
CPU as a “scratch pad”. The SDRAM has a 13-bit address line (2-bit bank select and 11-bit address input line)
and 32-bit data bus operates at 100MHz. The SDRAM is powered by the 3.3VDC supply.
Flash Memory The CPU daughter card has a 32MB nonvolatile, electrically block erasable (Flash)
programmable memory (U3) configured for 16 bit word size. It stores the application code for the CPU. The
flash memory is organized as thirty-two 128KB erase blocks and each block can be individually written and
erased. The flash memory has a 22-bit address and 16-bit data bus. It is powered by 3.3VDC supply.
Ethernet Controller - The CPU daughter card provides a MAC to PHY interface using the Ethernet (non-PCI)
controller (U6). This device is a mixed signal (Analog/Digital) device, that through the use of a 16 bit parallel
interface generates the 4 necessary outputs signals for the 10/100 Mbps IEEE 8023 Ethernet communication.
The PHY interface is a 4B5B/Manchester encoder/decoder. The Ethernet chip is powered by the 3.3VDC
supply and uses an external clock input of 25MHz.
EERPOM - A serial EEPROM (U13) is connected to a SPI peripheral of the Ethernet controller. It is used by the
controller to store default communication information and parameters.
Keypad LED Driver - The CPU uses a keypad led driver (U7) to provide eight additional I/O ports. The driver
also provides higher output current capacity and to act as a possible ESD buffer for front panel LEDs.

PAGE 4-8 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

4.5 SENSOR BOARD
The sensor board is the main source of pressure and flow feedback for the Trilogy ventilator. It supplies the
system board with real time digital pressure and flow data. This data is processed by the system board and
used to control the blower speed and supply the prescribed pressure and flow support to the patient.

Dual Element Pressure

Thermistor Port

Flow Element

Prox Flow

Atm

Prox Pressure

Auto Null
Valve

Manifold

Control Control Monitor dp Monitor Prox

Valve
Flow Pressure Pressure Flow Pressure
Control Barometric
Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor
Pressure
Sensor

Buffer & Buffer & Buffer & Buffer &

Gain & Low
Low Pass Low Pass Low Pass Low Pass
Pass Filter
Filter Filter Filter Filter Gain

Buffer &
ADC Low Pass
Filter

To All
Sensors
Low Pass 2.5V (except dp
Divide by 2
Filter Reference Monitor Flow)

1 5VDC
Regulator
2:1
mux
Thermistor

1 To dp
Monitor 10VDC 12VDC 7VDC
Flow Reference Regulator Regulator
Sensor

To System Board

FIGURE 4-5 SENSOR BOARD BLOCK DIAGRAM

The circuitry on the board contains seven sensors, sensor conditioning circuits, ADC (Analog to Digital
Converter), and linear and reference voltage sources. Six of the sensors are on board and one (the dual
element temperature sensor) is located in the air stream and connected to the board through cabling (J1).
Signals that are critical for patient therapy have separate sensors for control functions (machine blower control)
and monitoring functions (alarms and patient parameters). All sensors are powered by the 5VDC regulator
(U7) except dp monitor flow sensor (MT4) which is powered by the 10VDC precision reference (U10). All
sensor outputs are ratio-metric to the power supply.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 4-9

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Power Supply - The system board supplies the sensor board with bulk 14VDC (J4). The bulk 14VDC is
regulated to 7VDC and 12VDC by voltage regulators U8 and U9 respectively. Precision reference (U10)
generates the 10VDC using 12VDC to power the monitor flow sensor. Linear regulator (U7) generates the
5VDC using 7VDC to power the remaining sensor board with the exception of the solenoid valve.
The precision reference voltage regulator (U5) generates a 2.5VDC output signal used by the ADC (U10) and
the instrumentation amplifier (U6). The ADCs internal reference gain amplifier generates a ratio-metric
4.096VDC reference voltage using this 2.5VDC voltage. The divide-by-two circuit generates a 2.5VDC signal.
This signal is ratio-metric voltage of 5VDC supply. It is buffered and used as an input to the ADC (U2).
Pressure Sensors - The monitor pressure signal is measured using the monitor pressure sensor (MT1). It
generates 0.2 to 4.7 VDC output for pressures range of 0 to 102 cm H20 pressure. The output of the sensor is
buffered and filtered using an anti-aliasing real pole filter with a cutoff frequency set at 222 Hz. The proximal
and control pressure signals are measured using the proximal and control pressure sensor (MT2 and MT3
respectively). They generate 0.5 to 4 VDC output for pressure range of 0 to 105 cm H20. The output of both the
sensors is buffered and filtered using an anti-aliasing real pole filter with a cutoff frequency set at 222 Hz.
Flow Sensors - The monitor flow signal is measured using the monitor flow sensor (MT4). It generates a -
25mv to +25mV output for pressures in the range of -10.5 to +10.5 cm H20. At the output of the sensor is
amplified and filtered using the instrumentation amplifier (U6). The filter used is a 2 stage passive low pass
filter with a cutoff frequency of 222Hz. The control flow signal is measured using the control flow sensor (MT5).
It generates a 0.25 to 4VDC output for differential pressures in the range of -5 to +5 cm H20. The output of the
device is a square root relationship with regard to voltage and dP. The output of the sensor is buffered and
filtered using an anti-aliasing real pole filter with a cutoff frequency set at 222 Hz.
Barometric Pressure Sensor - The atmospheric pressure is measured using the barometric pressure sensor
(MT6). The output of the sensor is scaled by a factor of .797 using a resistive divider network (R18 & R19). The
output is then buffered and filtered using an anti-aliasing real pole filter with a cutoff frequency set at 222 Hz.
Temperature Sensor - A dual element temperature sensor measures the air stream temperature. This sensor
is a negative temperature coefficient with nominal resistance of 10K @25°C. One output of the dual element
temperature sensor is buffered and fed to the 2:1 multiplexer (U4). The other input is from the on board
thermistor RT1 which has a negative temperature coefficient and a nominal resistance of 100k @ 25°C. The
output of the multiplexer is filtered by a single pole low pass passive RC circuit. Based on the input to the 2:1
multiplexer from the system board, output of one thermistor is supplied to the ADC.
Analog to Digital Converter - The analog outputs of all these sensors are converted to digital signals using
the 16 bit SAR (successive approximation register) ADC (U2). The ADC communicates with the system board
via the 4 wire SPI bus interface (J4).
Plastic Manifold – The plastic manifold provides a mechanical pneumatic connection to the sensors and
allows for mounting of the solenoid valve.
Solenoid Valve - The sensor board uses a solenoid valve to auto null/vent the control pressure sensor to
atmosphere periodically via port 1 of the plastic manifold. The solenoid valve is externally mounted on the
manifold and powered by a 29VDC nominal supply provided by the system board (J2). The N-Channel Power
MOSFET (Q2) turns the solenoid valve ON-OFF.

PAGE 4-10 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

4.6 FRONT PANEL BOARD
The front panel board provides the user interface support in the Trilogy ventilator. It includes circuitry for the
keypad, keypad backlight, audible alarm, visual alarm, and AC present indicator.

Speaker Speaker
Power Mux Power Mux
#1 #2
#1 #2
Power Power

Low Power
Oscillator Speaker Monitor
#1 + Driver Circuit
#1 #1

Quad 2:1
To Filter +
Counter mux
System
Board
Speaker Monitor
Low Power + Driver Circuit
Oscillator #2 #2
#2

AC Power Keypad
Red LED Yellow LED Keypad
LED Backlight

FIGURE 4-6 FRONT PANEL INTERFACE BOARD BLOCK DIAGRAM.

AC Power LED – A green LED (CR3) indicates the presence of AC/DC supply to the Trilogy ventilator.
Red LED – Two red LED’s (CR2 & CR19) are used to indicate urgent and high priority alarm conditions. They
are driven by two separate control lines from the CPU and the CPLD for redundancy during power fail
conditions. Compared to normal operation, during power fail the red LED’s have lower luminous intensity
achieved using current limiting resistors (R105, R106) to preserve power consumption.
Yellow LED – Two yellow LED’s (CR4 & CR5) are used to indicate low priority alarm conditions.
Keypad / User Input Switch Circuit – The front panel has 6 four-legged metal dimple types dome switches
for user input. They support alarm silence, start/stop, left, right, up, and down functions. All share active low
signal configuration. They are powered by the 3.3V power supply with the exception of the start/stop and right
function keys which use the 3.3V_PLD to support additional function during the power fail and low power
mode.
Keypad Backlight - An array of 12 white LED’s (CR7 to CR18) are used to provide back light for the keypad.
All the while LED’s are controlled by a common switch (Q2).
Audible Alarm Signal - Each speaker has a mono-tone and a multi-tone audio alarm signal source. The mono
tone audio alarm signal is generated by the low power oscillators (U3 & U5) running at a fixed frequency of 2.9
KHz. This frequency is set using external resistors (R12 & 14). The multi-tone audio alarm signal is generated
using a combination of four harmonic signals. The 4-bit binary counter (U6) receives a square wave signal at
various frequencies to generate these four harmonic signals. Each of the four harmonics signals is wave
shaped using high-pass (RC) filters and low-pass (active) filter (U1). A summing amplifier (U2) then adds the

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 4-11

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
four harmonic signals and generates the multi-tone audio alarm signal. Based on the input to the 2:1
multiplexer (U4) the multi-tone signal is fed to one speaker driver circuit at a time.
Audible Alarm Driver - The two audio alarm signals are fed to the respective piezo speaker drivers (U7 &
U11) via the summing amplifiers (U14 & U15). The piezo speaker drivers have integrated boost converters and
audio power amplifiers capable of driving the speaker load with a 16Vp-p signal. They provide pop-and-click
removal function through bypass capacitors (C17 & C49) which determine the turn-on time of the audio
amplifier. In addition, the speaker driver circuit provides the band switch function for a soft alarm sounding, and
low power shutdown to support low power mode.
Speaker Monitoring Circuit - The operation of each speaker is verified using the current monitors sub-circuit.
When a speaker is turned ON the high-side current shunt monitor (U8 & U12) generates an output current
proportional to the differential voltage generated across the current sense resistors (R27 & R59). The output
signal is used by the comparators (U9 & U17) to generate the alarm status signals for the CPU to verify
speaker operation. The reference voltage for the comparators (U9 & U17) is set at 193mV.
Speaker Circuit Power - There are two independent power sources available to power the two speaker
circuitry. The power mux (U13 & U16) select one of the two available power sources for each speaker circuitry.
Both the speaker circuits use the different power supplies as primary and backup supplies.

4.7 INTERFACE BOARD

The interface board provides the means for the Trilogy ventilator to communicate with external devices such as
the humidifier and other accessory devices. It includes circuitry for ethernet communication, RS-232 and RS-
485 communication, oxygen sensing, remote alarm interface and accessory power generation.

To
Isolation
System Ethernet
Transformer
Board

Heater
Power
Source

Sensor
Oxygen
Power A
Sensor
Source

To Nurse
Isolation
System Call
Board

24 VDC Current
SUPPLY Sense

Accessory
RS-232 Device

485
Transreceiver

Humidifier

FIGURE 4-7 INTERFACE BOARD BLOCK DIAGRAM

PAGE 4-12 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Ethernet - The Trilogy ventilator supports CAT-5 twisted pair based 10Mbs Ethernet communication protocol.
Oxygen Sensor - The Trilogy ventilator uses a ceramic zerconia solid-electrolyte oxygen sensor (U8) mounted
on the interface board to detect hazardous level of oxygen leak inside the unit. A buck-boost switching
regulator (U7) supplies a constant 1.5W power to the ceramic heater for oxygen sensor heater. A linear voltage
regulator (U16) generates the 3.3 VDC supply for the oxygen sensor output gain amplifier (U10). In addition, it
is also used to generate the 1.8VDC supply (U9) to power the oxygen sensing element. The power to the
heater element and to the sensing element on the oxygen sensor can be disabled by using the switch (Q5).
This helps to prolong the sensor life when not used. There is a minimum recommended delay of 3 minutes for
the oxygen sensor to warm up and generate valid oxygen concentration measurements.
Remote Alarm (Nurse Call) Interface - The remote alarm sub-circuit generates the alarm signal for the
Respironics remote alarm device and nurse call system. Electric isolation between the Trilogy ventilator and
the remote alarm device is achieved using optical isolators (U3 & U6).
Regulated 24VDC supply - The interface board receives 29VDC bulk power supply from the system board
and generates a regulated 24VDC supply using the linear voltage regulator (U1). The supply is used as power
source for the accessory module and can be disabled by the system board using the switch (Q4). The high
side current shunt monitor (U2) uses a current sense resistor (R14) to monitor the output current of the
regulated 24VDC supply. If output current of the supply increases above 400mA the linear voltage regulator
(U1) is shut down.
RS-232 Communication - The Trilogy ventilator supports standard full duplex RS-232 serial communication
protocol. It is used for debug mode communications only.
RS-485 Communication - The Trilogy ventilator supports standard multi-drop half duplex RS-485 serial
communication protocol. It is used by the Trilogy ventilator to communicate with the humidifier and accessory
devices.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 4-13

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 This page intentionally left blank.

PAGE 4-14 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM SETUP
NOTE
Please refer to the appropriate Provider and/or User Manual for additional information.

5.0 CHAPTER OVERVIEW

This chapter provides information regarding setup and operation of the Trilogy Ventilator as needed for
servicing, repairing, and testing of the device.

5.1 KEYPAD LOCK FEATURE

There is a Keypad Lock feature that users can enable from the Options menu. It is intended to prevent
accidental changes to device settings. This feature will lock the navigation keys (Up, Down, Left, and Right
keys). If the Keypad Lock is enabled, a Keypad Unlock message will display on the bottom of the screen any
time you press one of the navigation keys, as shown below.

FIGURE 5-1: KEYPAD UNLOCK MESSAGE

If the keypad is locked, you must unlock it before you can enter the Menu. To unlock the keypad and enter the
menu, you must first hold the Right button for 5 seconds to unlock the keypad. An audible indicator sounds
when the keypad is successfully unlocked. Once the display is unlocked, you can enter the Menu as you
normally would by pressing the Up button.

NOTE

• There is a keypad lock inactivity time-out period. After you have unlocked the keypad as indicated,
the keypad will re-lock after five minutes of inactivity to prevent someone from accidentally pressing a
button and changing any of the settings.
• When Keypad Lock is enabled, the Left, Right, and Up/Down buttons are locked while the ventilator
is turned on. The Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause and Start/Stop buttons continue to function normally.
• The Keypad will automatically unlock if an alarm or informational message occurs and will remain
unlocked the entire time alarms are active.
• Pressing the Left (Cancel) button will cancel the Keypad Unlock action.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 5-1

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
5.2 ACCESSING THE STARTUP AND MONITOR SCREENS
1. After you press the On/Off button to begin therapy, the Startup screen below appears momentarily,
indicating the device name and the software version.

NOTE
No Soft Buttons display on the Monitor screen if Keypad Lock is enabled.

2. The next screen that appears is the Monitor screen. The appearance of this screen will vary,
depending on how you set up the device. If Detailed view is turned off in the options menu, your
screen will look like the screen shown below.

NOTE
The symbols that appear on the Monitor Screen are described in detail
later in this chapter.

a. The top section of the screen, called the Monitor panel, shows the therapy mode and, if you
set up a dual prescription for the patient, the Prescription indicator appears, indicating Primary
or Secondary prescription. The patient breath symbol also displays during a patient-triggered
breath, and a bar graph displays the current pressure level.
b. The center section of the screen displays the current date and time.
c. The bottom section, called the Status panel, displays certain symbols that indicate features
being used, such as Ramp, as well as battery status.

PAGE 5-2 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 3. If Detailed view is turned on in the Options Menu, the Monitor screen will look like the screen
shown below.

This screen contains more detailed information about the therapy.

a. The top Monitor panel contains the Prescription indicator if a dual prescription exists, the ther-
apy mode, a graph displaying the current pressure, and the current date and time. Addition-
ally, this panel also displays patient pressure, respiratory rate (RR), exhaled tidal volume (Vte),
and leak.
b. The second panel in Detailed view is the Measured Settings panel. It provides patient-related
data including Peak Inspiratory Pressure (PIP), Minute Ventilation, Peak Inspiratory Flow,
Mean Airway Pressure (MAP), and I:E Ratio.
c. The third panel is the Status panel and shows the same information displayed in the Detailed
View Off screen, including features in use such as Ramp and battery status.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 5-3

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
5.3 MONITOR SCREEN INDICATORS
This section describes the following indicators:
• Monitor Panel Indicators
• Measured Settings Panel Indicators
• Status Panel Indicators

5.3.1 MONITOR PANEL INDICATORS

All of the indicators that may appear on the Monitor Panel are described in detail in the following table. The
Detailed view is shown below. The monitor panels for the Active circuit and Passive circuit are different, so
both panels are shown. Some of these items do not appear in the Detailed View Off screen.

INDICATOR DESCRIPTION
Prescription If you set up a dual prescription for the patient, the words “Primary” or
“Secondary” appear in the top left corner of the panel to indicate
which prescription is active.
Therapy Mode The current therapy mode displays at the top of the panel (for
example, CPAP, S, S/T, etc.). If a special feature such as Flex,
AVAPS, or Sigh is active, this feature will appear next to the therapy
mode.
Date and Time If you are in Detailed view, the current date and time appear in the top
right hand corner of the panel. (In Detailed View Off, they appear in
the center panel.)

Patient Breath This symbol displays during a patient-triggered breath.

PAGE 5-4 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 INDICATOR DESCRIPTION
Airway Pressure Manometer and The manometer (bar graph) displays the airway pressure in the
Peak Pressure Symbol patient circuit at all times. The manometer bar moves to the right as
pressure increases during inhalation, and moves to the left as
pressure decreases during exhalation. The peak pressure is also
indicated on this bar. It is positioned according to the maximum
patient pressure reached during each breath. The Peak Pressure
symbol appears as a blue bar on the manometer. If a High
Inspiratory Pressure alarm occurs, the Peak Pressure symbol
changes from blue to red.

Low Pressure Indicator If you enable a volume therapy mode, this indicator appears below
the manometer bar, indicating the low pressure alarm setting.

High Pressure Indicator If you enable a volume therapy mode, this indicator appears below
the manometer bar, indicating the high pressure alarm setting.

Pressure This indicator displays the current patient pressure. This only
appears in detailed view.
Respiratory Rate (RR) This indicator displays the measured respiratory rate in Breaths Per
Minute (BPM). This only appears in detailed view.

Exhaled Tidal Volume (Vte) This indicator displays the estimated exhaled tidal volume in milliliters
and reflects compensation for BTPS. This only appears in detailed
view when Passive Circuit is selected.
Inhaled Tidal Volume (Vti) This indicator displays delivered tidal volume in milliliters and reflects
compensation for BTPS. This only appears in detailed view when
Passive Circuit is selected.
Leak This indicator displays the total leak (non-returned flow), between the
unit outlet and the patient, averaged over the previous breath. This
only appears in detailed view when the Passive Circuit is selected.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 5-5

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
5.3.2 TRILOGY 100 & TRILOGY 200 MEASURED SETTINGS PANEL
All of the indicators that may appear on the Measured Settings panel (available only in Detailed view), are
described in the following table.

INDICATOR DESCRIPTION
PIP Peak Inspiratory Pressure displays the maximum pressure delivered
to the patient during the previous breath.
I:E Ratio Displays a comparison of the time spent in inspiration to the time
spent in expiration during the previous breath.
Peak Flow Displays the maximum inspiratory flow delivered to the patient during
the previous breath in l/min BTPS.
MAP Displays the Mean Airway Pressure, which is the weighted average
of pressure in the patient’s airway over 6 breaths.
MinVent Minute ventilation displays the amount of air delivered to the patient
over the last minute in l/min BTPS.

PAGE 5-6 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 MEASURED SETTINGS PANEL
All of the indicators that may appear on the Measured Settings panel (available only in Detailed view), are
described in the following table.

INDICATOR DESCRIPTION
PIP Peak Inspiratory Pressure displays the maximum pressure
delivered to the patient during the previous breath.

I:E Ratio Displays a comparison of the time spent in inspiration to the

time spent in expiration during the previous breath.

Peak Flow Displays the maximum inspiratory flow delivered to the

patient during the previous breath, reflecting compensation
for BTPS.

MAP Displays the Mean Airway Pressure, which is the weighted

average of pressure in the patient’s airway over 6 breaths.

FiO2 Displays the FiO2 setpoint.

MinVent Minute ventilation displays the amount of air delivered to

the patient over the last minute, reflecting compensation
for BTPS.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 5-7

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
5.3.3 STATUS PANEL INDICATORS
All of the indicators that may appear on the Status Panel are described in the following table.

INDICATOR DESCRIPTION
Indicates that the device is in Full Menu Access mode, which
means you can adjust all prescription settings. Respironics
recommends that you change the device to Limited Menu Access
mode before giving the device to the patient, so patients cannot
adjust their prescription settings. Only trained health care
professionals and home care providers should adjust prescription
settings.
Displays when a Secure Digital (SD) memory card is inserted in
the ventilator.

Displays when the ventilator detects an error with the SD card.

Displays at all times when an external battery is attached to the

ventilator. The level of green shading shown in the symbol
indicates the battery capacity and will go down as the battery
charge level decreases. When the entire symbol is green, the
battery is fully charged.
Displays at all times when a detachable battery is attached to the
ventilator. The level of green shading shown in the symbol
indicates the battery capacity and will go down as the battery
charge level decreases. When the entire symbol is green, the
battery is fully charged.
Displays at all times, indicating the status of the internal battery.
The level of green shading shown in the symbol indicates the
battery capacity and will go down as the battery charge level
decreases. When the entire symbol is green, the battery is fully
charged.
A black box displays around the battery that is currently
supplying power to the ventilator when AC power is not available.
(In the status panel shown above, the external battery is in use,
so the symbol displays.)

PAGE 5-8 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 INDICATOR DESCRIPTION
A yellow lightning bolt symbol displays with the Detachable or
Internal battery symbol to indicate when the battery is charging.
(In the status panel shown here, the detachable battery is being
charged, so the symbol appears.

Displays when the Audio Pause button has been pressed and
Audio Pause is active. The alarm is silenced for one minute
when the Audio Pause button is pressed.

Displays when the Ramp feature is active.

NOTE
If a battery in use is very low (less than 20 minutes remaining), the inside of the box surrounding
the battery symbol will change to yellow and all of the indicators in the battery will be empty. If a
battery in use is near depletion (less than 10 minutes remaining), the inside of the box surrounding
the battery symbol will change to red, and all of the bar indicators in the battery will be empty.
These color changes only occur for the last available battery source.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 5-9

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
5.3.4 ON-SCREEN BUTTON PANEL
The illustration below shows the on-screen button panel on the Main Menu screen, in relation to the buttons on
the front of the Trilogy Ventilator.

NOTE
The on-screen buttons will vary depending on what screen you are
in and what settings are enabled on your device.

At the very bottom of the display screen is the on-screen button panel. This panel corresponds with the control
buttons on the ventilator.
• The left on-screen button specifies the action for the Left button on the device.
• The center on-screen button specifies the action for the Up/Down buttons on the device.
• The right on-screen button specifies the action for the Right button on the device.

5.3.5 NAVIGATING THE MENU SCREENS

To navigate through all of the menu screens and settings:
• Use the Up/Down button to scroll through the menu options and settings.
• Use the Left and Right buttons to perform the actions specified on the Left and Right on-screen
buttons.

PAGE 5-10 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

5.4 CHANGING AND VIEWING SETTINGS IN FULL MENU ACCESS MODE
You can view and change settings using the Menu screens when the device is in Full Menu Access mode. To
enter the Menu screens from the Monitor screen, press the Up button on the ventilator. The Main Menu screen
shown below appears.

NOTE

• In the example Main Menu screen shown, the 2/6 that appears in the Menu banner indicates
that item 2 is highlighted from a total of 6 items in the menu.
• For some therapy settings, once you reach the highest or lowest setting available, pressing the
Up/Down button again will cycle back through the settings. For the parameters that do not
wrap, when you reach the highest or lowest setting possible, a “Limit Reached” message
appears in the Menu Banner on-screen.
• If you change a setting but decide you do not want to save it, you can press the Left button to
cancel the change

Choose from the following selections on the Main Menu screen:

• Safely Remove SD Card: This option will appear if an SD card is inserted in the ventilator. Select
this option when you want to remove the SD card. When the “Remove SD Card” confirmation
message appears, remove the card. If you press the left (cancel) button or don’t remove the card
within 60 seconds, the confirmation message will close and the ventilator will continue writing to
the card.
• Settings and Alarms: View and change prescription settings and alarms.
• Options: View and change device settings, such as Full or Limited Access mode, Detailed View,
Language, etc.
• Alarm Log: View a list of the 20 most recent alarms that have occurred.
• Event Log: View a list of all events that have occurred, such as ventilator setting changes, ventila-
tor inoperative conditions, alarms, etc.
• Information: View detailed information about the device, such as the device’s software version
and serial number.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 5-11

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
5.5 CHANGING THE DEVICE SETTINGS AND ALARMS
From the Main Menu screen, use the Up/Down button to highlight the Settings and Alarms menu, and press
the Right button to select the menu. A screen similar to the one below appears.

5.5.1 DEVICE SETTINGS COMMON TO ALL THERAPY MODES

Some of the settings on this menu will vary depending on the therapy mode you select. The section below
describes all of the settings that are common to all therapy modes.

DUAL PRESCRIPTION SETTING

You can turn the dual prescription setting on or off. Enable the setting if you want to create two separate
prescriptions for the patient. For instance, you may want to set up a daytime prescription and then a separate
nighttime prescription. If you enable this setting, then the menu options on the Main Menu will change to
include new options:
• Switch to Primary/Secondary Settings
• Primary Settings and Alarms
• Secondary Settings and Alarms
The Main Menu screen will look like the screen below.

PAGE 5-12 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

5.5.2 MODE SETTING
You can change the Mode setting on the Setting and Alarms screen to one of the following therapy modes:
• CPAP - Continuous Positive Airway Pressure
• S - Spontaneous Ventilation
• S/T - Spontaneous/Timed Ventilation
• T - Timed Ventilation
• PC - Pressure Control Ventilation
• PC-SIMV - Pressure Controlled Synchronized Intermittent Mandatory Ventilation
• CV - Control Ventilation
• AC - Assist Control Ventilation
• SIMV - Synchronized Intermittent Mandatory Ventilation

5.5.3 CIRCUIT TYPE

There are two types of circuit types you can select:
• Passive
• Active PAP
• Active Flow (Trilogy 200, Trilogy O2, & Trilogy 202 Only)
The Passive circuit uses the Whisper Swivel II passive exhalation device. The Active PAP circuit type uses an
active exhalation device with a proximal air pressure sensing connection. The Active Flow circuit type uses an
active exhalation device with a proximal flow sensor.
When using the Passive circuit, the ventilator displays estimated patient pressures based on the resistance of
the standard patient circuit (Whisper Swivel II with 1.8 meter tubing). Adding accessories to the patient circuit
(humidifier, water trap, etc.) may cause an increase in circuit resistance and cause the device to display slightly
higher pressures than what is actually delivered to the patient.
With the Active PAP or Active Flow circuit type selected, patient pressure is measured directly and is not
affected by any change in circuit resistance.
The Passive circuit provides leak compensation. When using the Passive circuit in Volume Ventilation, the set
Vti is delivered to the patient above the calculated circuit and cuff (or mask) leak. This is different from
traditional active circuit ventilation where the cuff (or mask) leak reduces the tidal volume delivered to the
patient. Volume ventilation with the Passive circuit delivers an inspiratory tidal volume close to the device
setting regardless of leak; this should be considered when transitioning a patient from an active to a passive
circuit. With a Passive circuit, Vte is estimated based on the calculated sum of circuit and cuff (or mask) leak.
The Active Flow circuit monitors proximal flow and proximal pressure. When using the Active Flow circuit
configuration, flow trigger with leak compensation may be enabled. The default setting when using the Active
Flow Circuit is Leak Compensation On. The clinician has the option to turn off the leak compensation;

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 5-13

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
however, unintentional leak will not be compensated. Both options measure the flow at the proximal flow
sensor. Leak compensation is not available with PAP circuit configuration.

NOTE

• To change the circuit type, you must be in the Setup screen with the airflow turned off.
• When the Circuit Type setting is set to Passive Circuit, all Ramp Start Pressure settings in all
modes will maintain the minimum range.
• When the Circuit Type setting is set to Active PAP Circuit, the Flex feature is unavailable.

5.5.4 FIO2
You can set the Fractional Inspired Oxygen, which blends in a certain amount of oxygen into the air stream
delivered to the patient. The amount of oxygen blended is based on this setting. You can set the FiO2 from
21% to 100% in increments of 1.
A Flush feature is also available for the FiO2 setting. A Flush button appears on-screen if the FiO2 setting is
greater than 21%. Pressing this button displays the following confirmation screen:

Selecting Yes allows you to temporarily increase the delivered oxygen concentration to 100% for two minutes.
After two minutes is completed, the oxygen concentration will return to the previous FiO2 setting. Selecting No
cancels the action and does not changed the FiO2 setting.

5.5.5 CIRCUIT DISCONNECT

WARNING
You should not rely on any single alarm to detect a circuit disconnect condition. The
Low Tidal Volume, Low Minute ventilation, Low Respiratory rate, and Apnea alarms
should be used in conjunction with the Circuit Disconnect alarm.

This setting enables or disables the circuit disconnect alarm. If enabled, an audible alarm will sound when a
large, continuous air leak (such as mask removal) has been detected in the circuit.
You can choose Off to disable the alarm. Or, you can increase or decrease the setting from 10 to 60 seconds
in 5 second increments. For example, a setting of 10 means that the alarm will sound after the circuit has been
disconnected for 10 seconds.

PAGE 5-14 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

5.5.6 APNEA
This setting enables or disables the apnea alarm. If enabled, an audible alarm will sound when an apnea is
detected.
You can choose Off to disable the alarm. Or, you can increase or decrease the setting from 10 to 60 seconds
in 5 second increments. For example, a setting of 10 means that the alarm will sound if the time between
spontaneous breaths exceeds 10 seconds.

5.5.7 LOW VTE

This setting enables or disables the Low Vte alarm. The alarm activates when the estimated exhaled tidal
volume is less than or equal to this setting. You can choose Off to disable this alarm, or you can increase or
decrease the setting from 40 ml to 2000 ml in 5 ml increments. It cannot be set higher than the High Vte
setting.
When AVAPS is On, the alarm activates when the calculated tidal volume is less that 90% of the target tidal
volume setting. This alarm can be set to on or off.

5.5.8 HIGH VTE

This setting enables or disables the High Vte alarm. The alarm activates when the estimated exhaled tidal
volume is greater than or equal to this setting. You can choose Off to disable this alarm, or you can increase or
decrease the setting from 50 ml to 2000 ml in 5 ml increments. It cannot be set lower than the Low Vte setting,
except to be turned off.

5.5.9 LOW VTI

This setting enables or disables the Low Vti alarm. The alarm activates when the measured inhaled tidal
volume is less than or equal to this setting. You can choose Off to disable this alarm, or you can increase or
decrease the setting from 40 ml to 2000 ml in 5 ml increments. It cannot be set higher than the Vti setting.

5.5.10 HIGH VTI

This setting enables or disables the High Vti alarm. The alarm activates when the measured inhaled tidal
volume is greater than or equal to this setting. You can choose Off to disable this alarm, or you can increase or
decrease the setting from 40 ml to 2000 ml in 5 ml increments. It cannot be set lower than the Vti setting
except to be turned off.

5.5.11 LOW MINUTE VENTILATION

This setting enables or disables the Low Minute Ventilation alarm. The alarm activates when the calculated
minute ventilation is less than or equal to this setting. You can choose Off to disable this alarm, or you can
increase or decrease the setting from 1l/min to 99 l/min in 1 l/min increments. It cannot be set higher than the
High Minuted Ventilation setting.

5.5.12 HIGH MINUTE VENTILATION

This setting enables or disables the High Minute Ventilation alarm. The alarm activates when the calculated
minute ventilation reaches or exceeds this setting. You can choose Off to disable this alarm, or you can
increase or decrease the setting from 1l/min to 99 l/min in 1 l/min increments. It cannot be set lower than the
Low Minute Ventilation setting except to be turned off.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 5-15

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
5.5.13 LOW RESPIRATORY RATE
This setting enables or disables the Low Respiratory Rate alarm. The alarm activates when the measured
respiratory rate is less than or equal to this setting. You can choose Off to disable this alarm, or you can
increase or decrease the setting from 4 BPM to 80 BPM in 1 BPM increments. It cannot be set higher than the
High Respiratory Rate setting.

5.5.14 HIGH RESPIRATORY RATE

This setting enables or disables the High Respiratory Rate alarm. The alarm activates when the measured
respiratory rate reaches or exceeds this setting. You can choose Off to disable this alarm, or you can increase
or decrease the setting from 4 BPM to 80 BPM in 1 BPM increments. It cannot be set lower than the Low
Respiratory Rate except to be turned off.

5.5.15 LOW INSPIRATORY PRESSURE

This setting configures the Low inspiratory Pressure alarm. It is only user-settable in CV, AC, and SIMV
modes. It cannot be set lower than PEEP + 2 pressure units or higher than the High Inspiratory Pressure. For
passive circuits, you can increase or decrease the Low Inspiratory Pressure from 6 to 40 pressure units in
increments of 1. For active circuits, you can increase or decrease the setting from 2 to 40 pressure units in
increments of 1. For pressure modes, this alarm is not user-settable.

5.5.16 HIGH INSPIRATORY PRESSURE

This setting enables or disables the High inspiratory Pressure alarm. It is only user-settable in CV, AC, and
SIMV modes. The High Inspiratory Pressure cannot be set lower than the Low Inspiratory Pressure. You can
increase or decrease the High Inspiratory Pressure from 10 to 80 pressure units in increments of 1. For
pressure modes, this alarm is not user-settable.

5.6 ADDITIONAL SETTING SPECIFIC TO THERAPY MODES

The Settings and Alarms menu also contains many additional settings specific to the various therapy modes.
The specific settings for each therapy mode are described below.

5.6.1 CONTINUOUS POSITIVE AIRWAY PRESSURE (CPAP) MODE

In addition to the general settings described in the previous section of this manual, you can also set the
following setting in CPAP mode.
1. CPAP
You can increase or decrease the CPAP pressure setting from 4 to 20 pressure units in increments
of 1.

NOTE
If the CPAP pressure is set to 4 (the minimum setting), the Ramp Length setting will be unavailable.

2. Trigger Type
The Trilogy can be set to trigger breaths based on automatic flow thresholds or specific flow
settings. You can select either Auto-Trak or Flow Trigger as the Trigger Type. When Auto-Trak is
selected, the AutoTrak trigger initiates based on automatic flow thresholds. When Trigger Type is

PAGE 5-16 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 set to Flow Trigger, Flow Trigger Sensitivity and Flow Cycle Sensitivity become active, and the
trigger initiates based on the Flow Trigger Sensitivity setting.

NOTE
Auto-Trak is only available if the Passive Circuit is selected.

Trigger Type is not available when Active PAP or Active Flow circuit is selected.
Flow trigger is the triggering method used for Active PAP and Active Flow circuits.

3. Flow Trigger Sensitivity

If you set the Trigger Type to Flow Trigger, the Flow Trigger Sensitivity setting displays. You can
increase or decrease the setting from 1 to 9 l/min in 1 l/min increments.
The flow trigger initiates when the patient’s inspiratory effort creates a flow equal to or greater than
the flow sensitivity setting

NOTE
Flow Trigger with leak compensation is only available
if the Active Flow circuit is selected.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 5-17

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 4. Leak Compensation (Trilogy 200, Trilogy O2, & Trilogy 202 Only)
If you are using an Active Flow circuit, you can turn Leak Compensation On or Off.

NOTE
Enabling Leak Compensation when using the Active Flow Circuit configuration only
affects triggering and does not affect tidal volume delivery or Vte measurement.

5. Flow Cycle Sensitivity

If you set the Trigger Type to Flow Trigger, the Flow Cycle Sensitivity setting displays. You can
increase or decrease the setting from 10 to 40 percent (%) in 1% increments for Trilogy 100 and
from 10 to 90 (%) in 1% increments for Trilogy 200, Trilogy O2, & Trilogy 202.
6. Ramp Length
The Ramp Length allows you to set the ramp time. You can disable Ramp by selecting Off, or you
can increase or decrease the Ramp Length setting from 5 to 45 minutes in 5-minute increments.

NOTE
The Ramp Start Pressure setting will not display if the Ramp Length is
set to Off or if the CPAP pressure is set to 4 pressure units.

7. Ramp Start Pressure

You can increase or decrease the ramp start pressure in increments of 1 to 4 pressure units to the
CPAP pressure setting. The patient also has access to this setting, unless the ramp length is set to
Off.

NOTE
Ramp Start Pressure is less than or equal to CPAP -1 pressure unit in CPAP mode.

8. Flex
You can enable or disable the Flex setting. Off disables the setting and prevents the patient from
using Flex. To enable the setting, set Flex to 1, 2, or 3. The patient also has access to this setting,
if Flex is enabled. The Flex feature is not available when using an active circuit.

NOTE

• In CPAP mode, Flex is only available when CPAP is greater than 4 pressure units.
• In S mode, Flex is only available when EPAP is greater than or equal to 4 pressure units
and IPAP is less than or equal to 25 pressure units.

PAGE 5-18 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

5.6.2 SPONTANEOUS (S) MODE
In addition to the general settings described in the previous section of this manual, you can also set the
following setting in S mode.
1. AVAPS
AVAPS is only available if Flex is not enabled.
You can disable AVAPS by selecting Off, or you can enable AVAPS by selecting On. If you select
Off, the IPAP setting displays. If you select On, the IPAP Max Pressure and IPAP Min Pressure
display. These settings are described below.

NOTE
AVAPS is only available if the Passive Circuit is selected.

2. IPAP

NOTE
IPAP, IPAP Max, or IPAP Min cannot be set to more than 30 pressure units above EPAP.

The IPAP setting displays if AVAPS is Off. You can increase or decrease the Inspiratory Positive
Airway Pressure (IPAP) from 4 to 50 pressure units in increments of 1. IPAP is limited to a
maximum of 25 pressure units when Flex is enabled. You cannot set the IPAP setting lower than
the EPAP setting.
3. IPAP Max Pressure
The IPAP Max Pressure setting displays if AVAPS is enabled. You can increase or decrease the
setting from 4 to 50 pressure units in increments of 1. The IPAP Max Pressure must be equal to or
greater than the IPAP Min value.
4. IPAP Min Pressure
The IPAP Min Pressure setting displays if AVAPS is enabled. You can increase or decrease the
setting from 4 to 50 pressure units in increments of 1. The IPAP Min Pressure must be equal to or
greater than the EPAP value, and it must be less than or equal to the IPAP Max Pressure.
5. EPAP

NOTE
EPAP cannot be set to more than 30 pressure units
below IPAP, IPAP Max, or IPAP Min.

You can increase or decrease the Expiratory Positive Airway Pressure (EPAP) from 4 to 25
pressure units in increments of 1. For active circuits, EPAP can be set to zero.
When AVAPS is disabled, the EPAP setting must be less than or equal to the IPAP setting. When
AVAPS is enabled, the EPAP pressure must be less than or equal to the IPAP Min Pressure.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 5-19

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 6. Tidal Volume
The Tidal Volume setting displays if AVAPS is enabled. You can increase or decrease the setting
from 50 to 2000 ml in 5 ml increments. Use this setting to establish the target volume of gas which
the ventilator will produce and deliver during each Spontaneous breath.

NOTE
In CV, AC, and SIMV modes, the tidal volume setting is limited by the Inspiratory Time, to
maintain the system’s minimum and maximum peak flows.

7. Rise Time

NOTE
The Rise Time setting only displays if Flex is disabled. If the Flex is enabled, the device
will use a rise time of 3.

You can adjust the rise time to find the most comfortable setting for the patient. Increase or
decrease the setting from 1 to 6 until you find the right setting. The rise time of 1 to 6 corresponds
to tenths of a second (e.g., a setting of 4 equals 0.4 second rise time).
8. Apnea Rate

NOTE
In S/T, T, PC, PC-SIMV, SIMV, CV, and AC modes, the Apnea Rate is greater than or equal to the
Breath Rate and is limited by the current Inspiratory Time setting to maintain a minimum 1:1 I:E ratio.

If the Apnea alarm is enabled, you can set the Apnea Rate from 4 to 60 BPM in 1 BPM increments.
In S mode, the Apnea Rate is greater than or equal to 1:2 I:E ratio.

5.6.3 SPONTANEOUS/TIMED (S/T) MODE

All of the settings described in the S Mode section are also available in S/T mode, except the Flex setting. In
addition to those settings, the settings below are also available in S/T mode.
1. Breath Rate

NOTE
In volume modes, the Breath Rate range is limited by the current Inspiratory Time
setting to maintain a minimum 1:1 I:E ratio.

In AC mode, you can increase or decrease the Breath Rate setting from 0 to 60 BPM, while in all
other modes, you can increase or decrease the setting from 1 to 60 BPM in 1 BPM increments.
Use the Breath Rate setting to establish the minimum rate of mandatory breaths that the ventilator
will deliver per minute.

PAGE 5-20 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 2. Inspiratory Time
You can adjust the Inspiratory Time setting from 0.3 to 5.0 seconds in 0.1 second increments.
Inspiratory Time is the duration for the inspiratory phase of a mandatory breath.

NOTE

• In pressure modes, the inspiratory time range is limited by the current Breath Rate setting
to maintain a minimum 1:1 I:E ratio.
• In volume modes, the inspiratory time range is limited by the current Tidal Volume and
Breath Rate settings to maintain a minimum 1:1 I:E ratio and the system’s minimum and
maximum peak flow.

5.6.4 TIMED (T) MODE

All of the settings available in S/T mode are available in T mode, except for the Trigger Type setting. Please
refer to the descriptions in the S and S/T Mode sections of this chapter for detailed information on the T mode
settings.

5.6.5 PRESSURE CONTROL MODE

All of the settings available in S/T mode are available in PC mode, except for the Flow Cycle Sensitivity setting
(when Flow Trigger is enabled). Please refer to the descriptions in the S and S/T Mode sections of this chapter
for detailed information on the PC mode settings.

5.6.6 PRESSURE CONTROL SYNCHRONIZED INTERMITTENT MANDATORY VENTILATION (PC-

SIMV) MODE
The following settings, described in the S and S/T mode sections of this section, also are available in PC-SIMV
mode:
• Breath Rate
• Inspiratory Time
• Trigger Type
• Flow Trigger Sensitivity (if Trigger Type is set to Flow Trigger)
• Flow Cycle Sensitivity (if Trigger Type is set to Flow Trigger)
• Rise Time
In addition to these, the following settings are also available in PC-SIMV mode.
1. Pressure
You can increase or decrease the Pressure setting from 4 to 50 pressure units in increments of 1.
This is the pressure the ventilator will deliver during the inspiratory phase of a mandatory or assist
breath.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 5-21

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 2. Pressure Support
You can increase or decrease the Pressure Support setting from 0 to 30 pressure units in
increments of 1. This is the pressure support the ventilator will deliver during the inspiratory phase
of a Spontaneous breath.

NOTE
In PC-SIMV mode, you cannot set up Pressure Support for Mandatory and Assist breaths
(Pressure - PEEP) greater than 30 pressure units.

3. PEEP
The Positive End Expiratory Pressure (PEEP) setting can be increased from 0 to 25 pressure units
in active circuits and 4 to 25 pressure units in passive circuits, in increments of 1. PEEP is the
positive pressure maintained in the patient circuit during exhalation. The PEEP must be less than
or equal to the pressure setting.

NOTE
The Pressure Support and PEEP settings together cannot exceed 50 pressure units.

PAGE 5-22 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

5.6.7 CONTROL VENTILATION (CV) MODE
The following settings, described in the previous sections of this chapter, are also available in CV mode:
• Tidal Volume
• Breath Rate
• Inspiratory Time
• PEEP
• High Inspiratory Pressure
• Low Inspiratory Pressure

NOTE
The Low Inspiratory Pressure is limited to PEEP +2 in CV, AC, and SIMV modes.

In addition to these, the following settings are also available in CV mode.

1. Flow Pattern

NOTE
The Flow Pattern setting might be limited to only Ramp or Square based on the Tidal Volume,
Inspiratory Time, and Breath Rate settings to maintain the minimum and maximum peak flows.

You can choose either Ramp or Square for the Flow Pattern setting.
2. Sigh
You can enable or disable the Sigh setting by selecting On or Off. A Sigh is a breath that is
delivered every 100 breaths at 150% of the normal volume.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 5-23

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
5.6.8 ASSIST CONTROL (AC) MODE
The AC mode contains the following settings described in the S, S/T, PC-SIMV, and CV mode sections in this
chapter. Please refer to the descriptions in those sections for detailed information.
• Tidal Volume
• Breath Rate
• Inspiratory Time
• Flow Pattern
• PEEP
• Trigger Type
• Flow Trigger Sensitivity
• Sigh
• High Inspiratory Pressure
• Low Inspiratory Pressure

NOTE
Flow Cycle Sensitivity is not available in AC mode.

5.6.9 SYNCHRONIZED INTERMITTENT MANDATORY VENTILATION (SIMV) MODE

NOTE
The High Inspiratory Pressure is greater than or equal to PEEP + Pressure Support in SIMV mode.

The SIMV mode contains the following settings described in the S, S/T, PC-SIMV, and CV mode sections in
this chapter. Please refer to the descriptions in those sections for detailed information.
• Tidal Volume
• Breath Rate
• Inspiratory Time
• Pressure Support
• Flow Pattern
• PEEP
• Trigger Type
• Sigh
• Rise Time
• High Inspiratory Pressure
• Low Inspiratory Pressure

PAGE 5-24 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

5.7 VIEWING AND CHANGING OPTIONS MENU ITEMS
From the Main Menu screen, select the Options item, as shown below.

The Options menu appears, shown in the screen below.

The following settings are available on the Options menu.

• Menu Access – You can select Full or Limited menu access. Full menu access allows operators
to access all ventilator and prescription settings. Limited menu access allows operators to access
only certain settings and does not allow them to change prescription settings. To prevent patients
from tampering with prescription settings, do not give them Full menu access.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 5-25

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 • Detailed View – You can turn Detailed View on or off using this setting. Detailed view displays
additional settings and therapy information on the Monitor screen. The figures below show exam-
ples of the Monitor screen with Detailed View on or off.

FIGURE 5-1: DETAILED VIEW ON

FIGURE 5-2: DETAILED VIEW OFF

• Language – The next item on the Options menu allows you to select the Language that the soft-
ware will appear in (English, French, German, etc.). The information on the screens will display in
the language selected here.
• Pressure Units – The next item allows you to select the pressure units that will display on the
screens. You can choose either:
• cmH2O
• hPa
• mBar
All pressure units on the screens will display in the unit of measure selected here.

PAGE 5-26 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 • Alarm Volume – You can adjust the volume of the Trilogy alarms using this setting. Select either
Loud or Soft as the alarm volume options.

WARNING
Make sure the alarm volume is sufficiently louder than the room noise level to ensure that the
audible alarm can be heard by the caregiver.

• Keypad Lock – You can enable or disable the Keypad Lock feature, which is described in detail
earlier in this section. Enabling the Keypad Lock feature can prevent someone from accidentally
pressing a button and changing any of the settings. Select On to enable the feature or Off to dis-
able it.
• Keypad Backlight – The next item you can set is the Keypad Backlight. You can turn the backlight
On or Off using this setting. Whenever you press the On/Off button to begin therapy, the keypad
backlight temporarily lights up. Once therapy is being provided, the keypad will be lit according to
this Keypad Backlight setting. If the setting is On, the backlight remains on while therapy is pro-
vided. If the setting is Off, the backlight remains off while therapy is provided.
• LCD Brightness – The LCD display is lit by a backlight. The backlight turns on when the initial
Startup screen displays. You can adjust the brightness of the LCD backlight from 1 – 10, with 1
being the dimmest setting and 10 being the brightest.
• Screen Saver – You can change the screen saver to reduce power consumption or dim the screen
in a dark room. You can choose the following settings:
• Off: No screen saver displays and the LCD backlight remains lit at your brightness setting.
• Breath: The display appears as a black screen, with only the patient breath indicator and
manometer visible.
• Black: The display’s backlight is turned off and the display is black with no information visible.
• Dim: The display’s backlight is decreased, so that the display is still visible but not as bright.
If enabled, the screen saver will display after 5 minutes of no keypad activity. Pressing any button
on the device will exit the screen saver. Also, any alarm or informational message will exit the
screen saver.

NOTE
Setting the screen saver to Black allows the device to run for a longer period of time
on battery power.

• Date Format – You can choose either mm/dd/yyyy or dd/mm/yyyy as the date format that will dis-
play on the Trilogy screens.
• Time Format – You can choose to display either an AM/PM time format or 24 Hour time format
(for example, 2:49PM or 14:49).
• Month – The month defaults to the current month. The adjustable range is from 1 (January) – 12
(December).
• Day – The day defaults to the current day. The adjustable range is from 1 – 31. The maximum
value is based on the selected month.
• Year – The year defaults to the current year. The adjustable range is from 2000 – 2099.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 5-27

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 • Hour – The hour defaults to the current hour. The adjustable range is from 12AM – 12PM or 0-23,
depending on the selected Time Format.
• Minute – The minute defaults to the current minute. The adjustable range is from 0 – 59.
• IP Address Mode – You can change the IP address mode to either DHCP or Static, depending on
the type of network you are using (if applicable).
• Operational Hours – The operational hours displays the total number of hours that the Trilogy
blower has been on since the last time this value was reset. You can reset this value to zero (0) if
desired (e.g., each time you give the device to a new patient). This value helps you determine how
often the patient is using the device. The Operational Hours shown here differs from the Blower
Hours shown on the Information screens. The Blower Hours displayed in the Information screen is
the total number of hours that the blower has been working over the life of the device. You cannot
reset this value.

PAGE 5-28 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

5.8 VIEWING THE ALARM LOG
From the Main Menu screen, you can select Alarm Log to access the Alarm Log screen. An example is shown
below.

NOTE
In the Alarm Log screen, the 1/2 shown in the Menu banner indicates that page 1 of 2 alarm
pages is being viewed at this time.

The alarm log displays the alarms in chronological order with the most recent events displayed first. It lists the
20 most recent alarms or messages that appeared on the Trilogy display. When the Trilogy is in Limited Menu
access mode, the alarm log cannot be cleared. It can be cleared when in Full Menu access mode. Depending
on how many alarms have occurred, the alarm log may be several pages long. The entries in the alarm log use
the same names that displayed when the alarm initially occurred and was displayed in the Alarm View.

NOTE
In Full Menu access mode, you can press the Right (Clear) button to clear the alarm log if desired.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 5-29

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
5.9 VIEWING THE EVENT LOG
From the Main Menu screen, you can select Event Log to access the Event Log Screen. An example is shown
below.

The event log displays a list of all events that have occurred, such as ventilator setting changes, ventilator
inoperative conditions, alarms, etc., in chronological order with the most recent events displayed first. When
the Trilogy is in Limited Menu access mode, the event log is not available. It can be viewed and cleared when
in Full Menu access mode. You can page through the event log if it is multiple pages. The number of pages
appears in the upper right corner of the panel (in the example above, shown as 1/6).
In the event log descriptions, any description beginning with a 1: or 2: is a prescription change event. The 1
represents a change to a primary setting and the 2 represents a change to a secondary setting. This is
followed by the setting that was changed.
The last two columns indicate setting and alarm changes. If the entry is a setting change, the first column
shows the old setting value and the last column shows the new setting. If the entry is an alarm, the first column
shows the value that triggered the alarm and the last column shows the number of seconds that the alarm was
active.

NOTE
In Full Menu access mode, you can press the Right (clear) button to clear the event log if desired.

PAGE 5-30 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

5.10 VIEWING DEVICE INFORMATION
From the Main Menu screen, you can select Information to access the Information screen. You can also view
the Information screen by holding the Down key for 5 seconds. This causes the detailed view of the Monitor
Screen and the Information Menu to be displayed temporarily. This key sequence is valid from the Monitor
Screen while in Full or Limited Access. An example is shown below.

The Information screen provides you with a summary of the current prescription settings, device settings, and
system settings. You can use the Up/Down buttons to scroll through the information.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 5-31

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 This page intentionally left blank.

PAGE 5-32 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

CHAPTER 6: TROUBLESHOOTING & ALARMS
6.0 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter identifies the alarms associated with the Trilogy Ventilator. This chapter should be used to help
service technicians diagnose problems with the Trilogy Ventilator, along with determining what parts, if any,
need to be replaced.

6.1 TRILOGY VENTILATOR ALARMS

There are three types of alarms:
• High Priority - Require immediate response by the operator.
• Medium Priority - Require prompt response by the operator.
• Low Priority - Require operator awareness. These alarms alert you to a change in the ventilator
status.
Additionally, the ventilator also displays informational messages and confirmation alerts that notify you of
conditions that need attention but do not qualify as alarm conditions.

NOTE
If multiple alarms occur at the same time, all alarms are processed and displayed, but the alarms are
ordered first by priority and then by occurrence, with the newest, highest priority alarms at the top of
the list. The alarm precedence is in the following order: high priority, medium priority, low priority,
and informational messages.

NOTE
Not all alarms are available in every therapy mode; some alarms are mode dependant.

6.2 AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARM INDICATORS

When an alarm condition occurs:
• The alarm LED indicator on the Audio Pause button lights
• The audible alarm sounds
• A message appears on the screen describing the type of alarm
• The remote alarm (if applicable) is activated
Each of these is described in detail below.

6.2.1 ALARM LED INDICATORS

The Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button on the front of the ventilator lights up as follows whenever an alarm is
detected:
• Red Flashing Indicator - When the device detects a high priority alarm, the Alarm Indicator/Audio
Pause button flashes red.
• Yellow Flashing Indicator - When the device detects a medium priority alarm, the Alarm Indicator/
Audio Pause button flashes yellow.
1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 6-1
TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 • Yellow Solid Indicator - When the device detects a low priority alarm, a solid yellow light appears
on the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button.
The Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button does not light up when informational messages or confirmation alerts
display.

6.2.2 AUDIBLE INDICATORS

NOTE
For the alarm indicators noted throughout this manual, each “dot” represents an audible beep.

An audible indicator sounds whenever a power failure or a high, medium, or low priority alarm is detected.
Additionally, an audible indicator sounds for informational messages and to confirm that certain actions have
occurred (for example, when an SD card is inserted or removed from the device).
• Ventilator Inoperative Audible Indicator – When a ventilator inoperative alarm occurs, a contin-
uous audible alarm sounds. The alarm descriptions later in this chapter display this indicator
as:
• Power Failure Audible Indicator – When a power failure occurs, a series of beeps sounds in a 1
beep pattern, repeating one second on, then one second off. The alarm descriptions later in this
chapter display this indicator as: • •
• High Priority Audible Indicator – When a high priority alarm is detected, a series of beeps sound
in the following pattern, which is repeated twice: 3 beeps, a pause, and then 2 more beeps. This
indicator continues until the cause of the alarm is corrected or the audible alarm is paused. The
alarm descriptions later in this chapter display this indicator as: • • • • • ••• ••
• Medium Priority Audible Indicator – When a medium priority alarm is detected, a series of
beeps sound in a 3-beep pattern. This pattern repeats until the cause of the alarm is corrected or
the audible alarm is paused. The alarm descriptions later in this chapter display this indicator as:
•••
• Low Priority Audible Indicator – When a low priority alarm is detected, a series of beeps sound
in a 2-beep pattern. This pattern repeats until the cause of the alarm is corrected or the audible
alarm is paused. The alarm descriptions later in this chapter display this indicator as: • •
• Informational Messages and Confirmation Audible Indicators – When an informational mes-
sage appears on screen, a brief, 1- beep audible indicator sounds. Additionally, when the device
detects that a certain action has been completed (for example, when the Start/Stop button is
pressed to start therapy, or when an SD card is inserted or removed from the device) a brief, 1-
beep audible indicator sounds. The alarm descriptions later in this chapter display this indicator
as: •

PAGE 6-2 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

6.2.3 ALARM MESSAGES

NOTE
An alarm message will also display in the Menu Banner if a menu is active when an alarm occurs.

When the ventilator detects an alarm, the Alarms and Messages Screen is displayed showing a description of
the alarm condition. When an alarm message appears, it will be highlighted in red if it is a high priority alarm or
in yellow if it is a medium or low priority alarm. (The highlight color matches the alarm LED color on the Alarm
Indicator/Audio Pause button.) If an alarm is manually reset by the user, the Alarms and Messages screen is
removed and the Monitoring Screen is re-displayed. If the alarm self-cancels, the Alarms and Messages
screen remains displayed, but the highlight from the active alarm is removed, the LED is unlit, and the audible
alarm stops. The screen below is an example of a possible alarm message.

If a menu is displayed on the screen when an alarm occurs, the description of the newly generated alarm is
displayed in the menu banner area. This is done so that the modification to the current parameter can be
completed before addressing the alarm condition in case the modification affects the alarm condition. The
screen below is an example of an alarm message displayed in the menu banner.

The Alarms and Messages Screen will automatically display in place of the Monitor screen when exiting from
the menu system using the Exit soft key when an alarm is displayed in the menu banner. If an alarm is
manually reset by the user or self-cancels, the menu banner on-screen before the alarm occurred will
reappear.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 6-3

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
If a Ventilator Inoperative alarm occurs, the entire display screen turns red and the Ventilator inoperative
message appears on-screen, as shown below.

To turn the ventilator off from a Ventilator Inoperative condition, use the normal power off sequence. When the
Start/Stop button is selected, the following screen will display.

Select the Right button (Yes) to turn the ventilator off and stop the audible alarm. Selecting the Left button (No)
will return the screen to the Ventilator Inoperative Alarm Screen without silencing the audible alarm.

6.2.4 REMOTE ALARM

When the ventilator detects an alarm condition, if you are using a remote alarm system, a signal is sent from
the ventilator to activate the remote alarm.

6.3 AUDIO PAUSE AND ALARM RESET FEATURES

This section describes the Audio Pause and Alarm Reset features.

6.3.1 AUDIO PAUSE

When an alarm occurs, you can temporarily silence the audible indicator by pressing the Alarm Indicator/Audio
Pause button. The alarm is silenced for 60 seconds and then will sound again if the cause of the alarm has not
been corrected. Each time the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button is pressed, the alarm silence period resets
to one minute.

PAGE 6-4 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

When Audio Pause is active, the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause symbol appears if you are on the Monitor
screen. Additionally, an “Audio Pause” message displays in the menu banner on the Alarm Display screen.
You can ‘pre-silence’ alarms that have not yet occurred by pressing the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button
while no alarms are active. Then, if an alarm occurs, the audible indicator does not sound until the Audio
Pause time limit has expired.

6.3.2 ALARM RESET

The Reset button is used to clear the currently active alarm(s) from the display and stop the LED and audible
alarm indicator. This button should be selected after the situation causing the alarm(s) has been corrected. All
active alarms are cancelled and alarm detection is restarted when this button is selected.
The ventilator self-cancels certain alarms if the cause of the alarm is corrected, shutting off the alarm LED, the
audible alarm, and the alarm background color. However, the alarm text remains on the screen. You can
manually reset an alarm by pressing the Left button (Reset). The Audio Pause function is cancelled if the alarm
is manually reset.

NOTE

• Alarm Reset will not affect ventilator inoperative alarms.

• When the device automatically resets an alarm, the alarm message remains
displayed until you select the Left (Reset button).

6.3.3 ALARM VOLUME CONTROL

You can adjust the Alarm Volume from the Options menu. You can select Loud or Soft, depending on your
preference.

WARNING
Make sure the alarm volume is set loud enough to be heard by the caregiver.

6.3.4 WHAT TO DO WHEN AN ALARM OCCURS

WARNING
You should not rely on any single alarm to detect a circuit disconnect condition. The Low Tidal Volume,
Low Minute Ventilation, Low Respiratory Rate, and Apnea alarms should be used in conjunction with
the Circuit Disconnect alarm.

Complete the following steps when an alarm occurs:

1. Look at the alarm indicators and listen to the audible alarm sound. Note the color of the Alarm
Indicator/Audio Pause button (red or yellow) and whether the LED is solid or flashing.
2. Look at the display to check the alarm message that appears on-screen and whether it is high-
lighted in red or yellow.
3. Press the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button to temporarily silence the audible alarm. A visual
indicator displays if you are on the Monitor screen or an “Audio Pause” message appears in the
menu banner on the Alarm Display screen.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 6-5

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 4. Look up the alarm in the alarm descriptions later in this section to determine the source of the
alarm and the appropriate action.

6.4 ALARM SUMMARY TABLE

The following table summarizes all of the high, medium, and low priority alarms and informational messages.

VISUAL(ALARM
DESCRIPTION OF INDICATOR DEVICE
ALARM PRIORITY AUDIBLE
ALARM BUTTON AND ACTION
DISPLAY)
Loss of Power High • • It may occur when a Red flashing Shuts
complete power failure button; Blank down
has occurred and screen
power was lost while
the device was
providing therapy. This
may happen if the
internal battery was the
only power source in
use and was
completely depleted.

Ventilator High It occurs when the Red flashing Shuts

Inoperative ventilator detects an button; “Ventilator down if
internal error or a Inoperative” can’t
condition that may message provide
affect therapy. therapy
safely. Or,
continues
to operate
at a
limited
level

PAGE 6-6 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 VISUAL(ALARM
DESCRIPTION OF INDICATOR DEVICE
ALARM PRIORITY AUDIBLE
ALARM BUTTON AND ACTION
DISPLAY)
Ventilator High • • • •• It occurs when the Red flashing Operates
Service device cannot perform button; “Ventilator
Required to specification, a Service Required”
backup safety feature message
is compromised, or the
delivery of therapy is
compromised. If the
problem is not
corrected, the device
will generate a
reminder message
once per hour, or
whenever power is
cycled, until the issue is
corrected. Additionally,
if the device is powered
off, a reminder
message will
immediately appear
when the device is
turned on again.

Check Circuit High • • • •• It occurs when the Red flashing Operates

device detects a button; “Check
problem with the Circuit” message
patient circuit, such as
pinched or detached
tubing, water
condensation in the
proximal pressure
lines, or problems with
the active exhalation
device.

Low Circuit High • • • •• It occurs when the Red flashing Operates

Leak system detects a button; “Low
problem with the leak Circuit Leak”
device in the passive message
circuit.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 6-7

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 VISUAL(ALARM
DESCRIPTION OF INDICATOR DEVICE
ALARM PRIORITY AUDIBLE
ALARM BUTTON AND ACTION
DISPLAY)
High Expiratory High • • • •• It occurs when the Red flashing Operates
Pressure delivered pressure button; “High
exceeds the target Expiratory
patient pressure during Pressure”
the expiratory phase by message
5 pressure units. This
may be due to pinched
tubing or the patient
having a fast breath
rate. The alarm will
automatically terminate
when the delivered
pressure comes within
5 pressure units during
the expiratory phase.

Low Expiratory High • • • •• It occurs when the Red flashing Operates

Pressure delivered pressure is 5 button; “Low
pressure units or more Expiratory
below the target patient Pressure”
pressure during the message
expiratory phase. The
alarm will automatically
terminate when the
delivered pressure
comes within 5
pressure units of the
target patient pressure
during the expiratory
phase.

High Internal High • • • •• It occurs when there is Red flashing Continues

Oxygen a leak in the internal air button; “High to operate
delivery system that Internal Oxygen” when
allows oxygen to build message internal
up inside the device. oxygen
The alarm is generated concentra
when the internal tion
oxygen concentration reaches
reaches 5% above 5% above
ambient levels. ambient
levels.

PAGE 6-8 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 VISUAL(ALARM
DESCRIPTION OF INDICATOR DEVICE
ALARM PRIORITY AUDIBLE
ALARM BUTTON AND ACTION
DISPLAY)
High Oxygen High • • • •• It occurs when the Red flashing Operates
Flow (Trilogy concentration of button; “High
O2 & Trilogy oxygen from the device Oxygen Flow”
202 Only) is 10% above the FiO2 message
set point for more than
30 seconds. This could
be caused by a
problem with the output
of the oxygen source.

Low Oxygen High • • • •• It occurs when the Red flashing Operates

Flow (Trilogy concentration of button; “Low
O2 & Trilogy oxygen from the device Oxygen Flow”
202 Only) is 10% below the FiO2 message
set point for more than
30 seconds. This could
be caused by the
oxygen source being
disconnected from the
device, an occlusion in
the tubing from the
oxygen source to the
device, or a problem
with the output of the
oxygen source.

High Oxygen High • • • •• It occurs when the Red flashing Operates

Inlet Pressure pressure of the oxygen button; “High
(Trilogy O2 & from the source Oxygen Inlet
Trilogy 202 measures greater than Pressure”
Only) 87 psi. message

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 6-9

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 VISUAL(ALARM
DESCRIPTION OF INDICATOR DEVICE
ALARM PRIORITY AUDIBLE
ALARM BUTTON AND ACTION
DISPLAY)
Low Oxygen High • • • •• It occurs when the Red flashing Operates
Inlet Pressure pressure of the oxygen button; “Low
(Trilogy O2 & from the oxygen source Oxygen Inlet
Trilogy 202 measures less than 40 Pressure”
Only) psi. This could be message
caused by the oxygen
source being
disconnected from the
device, an occlusion in
the tubing from the
oxygen source to the
device, or a problem
with the output of the
oxygen source.

Circuit High • • • •• It occurs when the Red flashing Operates

Disconnect breathing circuit is button; “Circuit
disconnected or has a Disconnect”
large leak. The alarm message
will automatically
terminate when the
leak is fixed for 6
seconds and breaths
are delivered again.

Apnea High • • • •• It occurs when the Red flashing Operates

patient has not button; “Apnea”
triggered a breath message
within the time
specified in the apnea
alarm setting. The
alarm will automatically
terminate when two
consecutive patient
breaths are detected
that meet the apnea
alarm time setting.

PAGE 6-10 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 VISUAL(ALARM
DESCRIPTION OF INDICATOR DEVICE
ALARM PRIORITY AUDIBLE
ALARM BUTTON AND ACTION
DISPLAY)
High Vte High • • • •• It occurs when the Red flashing Operates
estimated exhaled tidal button; “High Vte”
volume is greater than message
the High Vte setting.
The alarm will
automatically terminate
when a breath occurs
in which the estimated
exhaled tidal volume
does not reach the
High Vte alarm setting
for three consecutive
breaths.

Low Vte High • • • •• It occurs when the Red flashing Operates

estimated exhaled tidal button; “Low Vte”
volume is less than the message
Low Vte alarm setting.
The alarm will
automatically terminate
when a breath occurs
in which the estimated
exhaled tidal volume
exceeds the Low Vte
alarm setting for three
consecutive breaths.

High Vti High • • • •• It occurs when the Red flashing Operates

delivered tidal volume button; “High Vti”
is greater than the High message
Vti alarm setting. The
alarm will automatically
terminate when a
breath occurs in which
the delivered tidal
volume does not reach
the High Vti alarm
setting for three
consecutive breaths.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 6-11

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 VISUAL(ALARM
DESCRIPTION OF INDICATOR DEVICE
ALARM PRIORITY AUDIBLE
ALARM BUTTON AND ACTION
DISPLAY)
Low Vti High • • • •• It occurs when the Red flashing Operates
delivered tidal volume button; “Low Vti”
is less than the Low Vti message
alarm setting. The
alarm will automatically
terminate when a
breath occurs in which
the delivered tidal
volume exceeds the
Low Vti alarm setting
for three consecutive
breaths.

High High • • • •• It occurs when the Red flashing Operates

Respiratory respiratory rate is button; “High
Rate greater than the High Respiratory Rate”
Inspiratory Rate alarm message
setting. The alarm will
automatically terminate
when the measured
respiratory rate is less
than the High
Respiratory Rate alarm
setting.

Low High • • • •• It occurs when the Red flashing Operates

Respiratory respiratory rate is less button; “Low
Rate than the Low Respiratory Rate”
Respiratory Rate alarm message
setting. The alarm will
automatically terminate
when the measured
respiratory rate is
greater than the Low
Respiratory Rate alarm
setting.

PAGE 6-12 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 VISUAL(ALARM
DESCRIPTION OF INDICATOR DEVICE
ALARM PRIORITY AUDIBLE
ALARM BUTTON AND ACTION
DISPLAY)
High Inspiratory High • (for first two It occurs in several Peak Pressure Operates
Pressure consecutive stages and escalates symbol turns red.
occurrences) from an audible beep When condition
• • • (for 3rd for the first two first occurs, a
consecutive occurrences to a high beep will sound.
occurrence) priority alarm if the When condition
problem continues. It occurs for third
• • • •• is detected differently time, button
(for 10th for volume and flashes yellow and
consecutive pressure therapy yellow “High
occurrence) modes. Inspiratory
For volume modes, Pressure”
the alarm will sound if message
the measured patient appears. When
pressure exceeds the condition occurs
High Inspiratory for 10th time,
Pressure setting button flashes red
specified by the and red “High
clinician. The alarm Inspiratory
will automatically Pressure”
terminate when the message
peak inspiratory appears.
pressure is less then or
equal to the High
Inspiratory Pressure
alarm setting.
For pressure modes,
the alarm occurs when
the delivered pressure
exceeds the target
patient pressure by 5
pressure units or more
during the inspiratory
phase. The device will
automatically cycle to
the expiratory phase
and continue to
operate. The alarm will
automatically terminate
when the delivered
pressure falls within 5
pressure units of the
target patient pressure
during the inspiratory
phase

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 6-13

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 VISUAL(ALARM
DESCRIPTION OF INDICATOR DEVICE
ALARM PRIORITY AUDIBLE
ALARM BUTTON AND ACTION
DISPLAY)
Low Inspiratory High • • • •• It is detected differently Red flashing Operates
Pressure for volume and button: “Low
pressure therapy Inspiratory
modes. Pressure”
For volume modes, message
the alarm will sound if
the measured patient
pressure is less than
the Low Inspiratory
Pressure setting by the
clinician. The alarm
will automatically
terminate when the
peak pressure at the
end of the breath is
greater than or equal to
the Low Inspiratory
Pressure alarm setting.
For pressure modes,
the alarm occurs when
the delivered pressure
is 5 pressure units or
more below the target
patient pressure during
the inspiratory phase.
the alarm will
automatically terminate
when the delivered
pressure comes within
5 pressure units of the
target patient pressure
during the expiratory
phase.

High Minute High • • • •• It occurs when the Red flashing Operates

Ventilation patient’s minute button; “High
ventilation is greater Minute
than the High Minute Ventilation”
Ventilation alarm message
setting. The alarm will
automatically terminate
when the calculated
minute ventilation is
less than the High
Minute Ventilation
alarm setting.

PAGE 6-14 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 VISUAL(ALARM
DESCRIPTION OF INDICATOR DEVICE
ALARM PRIORITY AUDIBLE
ALARM BUTTON AND ACTION
DISPLAY)
Low Minute High • • • •• It occurs when the Red flashing Operates
Ventilation patient’s minute button; “Low
ventilation is less than Minute
the Low Minute Ventilation”
Ventilation alarm message
setting. The alarm will
automatically terminate
when calculated minute
ventilation is greater
than the Low Minute
Ventilation alarm
setting.

Low Battery Escalates • • • It occurs when the last Medium Priority - Operates
from (Medium - battery available is low Yellow flashing
Medium to when approx. or nearly depleted. button. “Low
High 20 minutes This alarm occurs in Detachable
remain) two stages. When Battery,” “Low
• • • •• approximately 20 External Battery,”
minutes of battery run or “Low Internal
(High - when
time remains, a Battery” message
approx. 10
medium priority alarm appears in yellow,
minutes
is generated. If no On Status Panel,
remain)
action is taken and the box around
battery continues to battery is yellow
deplete, the alarm
escalates to a high High Priority - Red
priority alarm when flashing button.
approximately 10 “Low Detachable
minutes of battery run Battery,” “Low
time remains. External Battery,”
or “Low Internal
Battery” message
appears in red,
On Status Panel,
box around
battery is red

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 6-15

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 VISUAL(ALARM
DESCRIPTION OF INDICATOR DEVICE
ALARM PRIORITY AUDIBLE
ALARM BUTTON AND ACTION
DISPLAY)
High Escalates • • • for It occurs when the Yellow flashing Operates
Temperature from medium estimated patient button and yellow
Medium to airstream temperature “High
High • • • •• or the ventilator internal Temperature”
for high temperature is too high. message
The alarm occurs in appears. If
several stages. condition
Internal fans are worsens, button
started when the flashes red and
medium priority alarm red “High
is generated. If the Temperature”
condition causing the message
high temperature is not appears.
corrected and the
temperature continues
to rise, the alarm will
escalate to the high
priority alarm.

Replace Low or • • for low It occurs when the “Replace Operates

Detachable High, detachable battery is Detachable
Battery depending • • • •• nearing the end of its Battery” message
on cause for high useful life or a failure in appears. If
of alarm the detachable battery battery is nearing
that prevents it from end of useful life,
charging or discharging message appears
has been detected. with yellow
The alarm occurs in background and
several stages, from button is solid
low to high priority. If yellow. If battery
the alarm is reset fails, message
without removing the appears with red
battery, the alarm will background and
be regenerated once button flashes red.
every hour until the
detachable battery is
removed. The
detachable battery is
not used, and the
power source is
switched to the next
available power source
if the alarm is the high
priority alarm.

PAGE 6-16 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 VISUAL(ALARM
DESCRIPTION OF INDICATOR DEVICE
ALARM PRIORITY AUDIBLE
ALARM BUTTON AND ACTION
DISPLAY)
Ventilator Medium • • • It occurs when the Yellow flashing Operates
Service device has detected an button; “Ventilator
Recommended error, but the error will Service
not affect device Recommended”
performance or safety. message
Therapy and safety are
not compromised. If
the problem is not
corrected, the device
will generate a
reminder message
once per day, or
whenever power is
cycled, until the issue is
corrected. Additionally,
if the device is powered
off, a reminder
message will
immediately appear
when the device is
turned on again.

Keypad Stuck Low • • It occurs when a key Solid yellow Operates

becomes lodged inside button; “Keypad
the case of the device. Stuck” message

Battery Info • This info message “Batt Discharge Operates

Discharging occurs when the Stopped - Temp.”
Stopped Due to detachable or internal message
Temperature battery becomes
overheated while
providing power for the
device. The battery is
not used and the power
source is switched to
the next available
power source.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 6-17

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 VISUAL(ALARM
DESCRIPTION OF INDICATOR DEVICE
ALARM PRIORITY AUDIBLE
ALARM BUTTON AND ACTION
DISPLAY)
Battery Not Info • This info message “Batt Not Operates
Charging Due occurs when the Charging - Temp.”
to Temperature detachable or internal message
battery becomes too
hot while charging or
the device was in too
cold an environment
before charging
started. Battery
charging stops until the
battery cools or warms
sufficiently.

Battery Not Info • This info message “Detach Battery Operates

Charging occurs when the device Not Charging” or
has detected an error “Internal Battery
condition with the Not Charging”
battery that prevents it message
from accepting a
charge. Battery
charging stops.

Check External Info • This info message “Check External Operates

Battery occurs when a bad Battery” message
connection exists to the
external battery or the
external battery failed.
The device continues
to operate using power
from the detachable
battery, if available, or
the internal battery.

Battery Info • This info message “External Battery Operates

Depleted occurs when the Depleted” or
affected battery is fully “Detachable
depleted. The device Battery Depleted”
continues to operate message appears
using the next available
power source.

PAGE 6-18 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 VISUAL(ALARM
DESCRIPTION OF INDICATOR DEVICE
ALARM PRIORITY AUDIBLE
ALARM BUTTON AND ACTION
DISPLAY)
AC Power Info • This info message “AC Power Switches
Disconnected occurs when the AC Disconnected” to
power source was lost, message, and a alternate
and the device has box appears power
switched to an around battery in source
alternate power source use.
(either a detachable or
external battery, if
connected, or the
internal battery if no
other source is
available). If AC power
returns, the ventilator
will beep, but no
message will appear on
the display.

External Info • This info message “External Batt Switches

Battery occurs when the Disconnected” to
Disconnected external battery power message, and a alternate
source is lost and the box appears power
device has switched to around battery in source
an alternate power use.
source (either a
detachable battery, if
connected, or the
internal battery if no
other source is
available). If external
power returns, the
ventilator will beep, but
no message will appear
on the display.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 6-19

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 VISUAL(ALARM
DESCRIPTION OF INDICATOR DEVICE
ALARM PRIORITY AUDIBLE
ALARM BUTTON AND ACTION
DISPLAY)
Detachable Info • This info message “Detachable Batt Switches
Battery occurs when the Disconnected” to
Disconnected detachable battery message, and a alternate
power source is lost box appears power
and the device has around battery in source
switched to an use.
alternate power source
(the internal battery if
not other source is
available). If
detachable battery
power returns, the
ventilator will beep, but
no message will appear
on the display.

Start On Info • This info message “Start On Battery” Operates

Battery indicates that the message
ventilator has started appears.
on battery power and
no AC power is
available. The device
operator should verify
that this is what is
wanted.

Card Error Info • This info message “Card Error” Operates

occurs when an message appears
unusable SD card is
inserted into the
ventilator. The device
continues to operate
but data cannot be
logged onto the SD
card.

PAGE 6-20 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

6.5 TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE

DEVICE ACTION POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTIVE ACTION

Unit does not power on • No power available • Verify AC or Batteries are
present
• Front Panel Board On/Off circuit • Replace the Front Panel PCA
faulty
• System/CPU PCA does not • Replace the System/CPU
recognize keypress Subassembly PCA

Unit power on, but Blower • Blower not connected to PCA • Check connection from Blower
will not start to PCA
• Blower faulty • Replace Blower
• Faulty motor drive on PCA • Replace System/CPU
Subassembly PCA

Unit is on, but Display is • LCD not connected properly • Check LCD Cable
blank
• Inverter not connected properly • Check Inverter and connection
• Faulty Driver on System/CPU PCA • Replace System/CPU
Subassembly PCA

Unit and Display are on, • Front Panel not connected properly • Check connection from Front
but AC Power LED and Panel to System.
Keypad are not functioning
• Faulty Front Panel board • Replace Front Panel Board
Audible Alarm does not • Speakers not connected properly • Check Speaker connections
beep 3 times at startup
• Faulty Speakers • Replace Speakers
• Faulty Front Panel PCA • Replace Front Panel PCA
• Faulty System/CPU PCA • Replace System/CPU
Subassembly PCA

Any of the red (~1.5 sec), • Front Panel not connected properly • Check connection from Front
yellow (~1.5 sec), and Panel to System
white (~3 sec) LEDs do
not light during startup
• Faulty Front Panel board • Replace Front Panel Board

Display flashes on and off • Bad power source • Verify good power source
sporadically
• CPU resetting • Replace System/CPU
Subassembly

Unit does not detect • Internal connections not connected • Check connection on Power
Detachable Battery properly Management Board
• Faulty Detachable Battery • Replace Detachable Battery

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 6-21

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 Unit does not detect • Battery not connected properly • Check connection on Power
Internal Battery Management Board
• Faulty Internal Battery • Replace Internal Battery

Unit does not detect • Battery not connected properly • Check connections on Power
External Lead Acid battery internally and/or externally Management Board and on
• Faulty External Lead Acid battery outside of the unit
• Replace External Lead Acid
battery

One alarm has much lower • Faulty Speaker • Replace Speaker

pitch or tone than other
alarm
• Faulty Front Panel PCA • Replace Front Panel Board

Display blank, but • Dislodged LCD (ribbon) cable • Verify LCD cable/connections
backlight working
• Faulty LCD (ribbon) cable • Replace LCD Cable
High Pos Flow at • Flow Straightener damaged or • Ensure Flow Straightener is
Calibration missing installed in Flow Sensor
Assembly correctly and is not
damaged.

Trilogy Error Code relating • Unit needs rebooted • Reboot unit using RASP
to Battery issues command or allow unit to go to
• Erroneous read by Charger chip
sleep
from power sequencing
• Remove all power from unit,
which includes physically
disconnecting the Internal
Battery, then reconnect.

Internal Battery fails • Faulty Detachable Battery • Replace Detachable Battery if

current test or does not go found faulty.
into requested mode
• Faulty Power Management Board
• Replace Power Management
Board.

Detachable Battery fails • Faulty External Battery • Replace External Battery.

current test or does not go
into requested mode
• Faulty Power Management Board • Replace Power Management
Board.

Unit won’t reach Pressure • Incorrect settings • Verify settings.

Therapy settings in Run-in
• Tubing setup incorrectly • Verify tubing is connected
properly and there are no
leaks.
• Verify Active Exhalation Valve
is functioning properly.

PAGE 6-22 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 Failures involving pressure • Tubing or porting block issues • Verify tubing and porting block
or flow tests are connected properly and not
• Faulty Sensor PCA
leaking.
• If possible, verify faulty Sensor
PCA, replace if suspected

Solid alarm when using • CPU possibly rebooting or not • Remove all power to reset and
Lead Acid or AC power fail running if possible obtain error logs;
alarm with known good Li- replace System/CPU PCA if
ion’s suspected

Vent Service Required • E143 (Pressure Span) in Error Log • Upgrade software. If error
before software upgrade persists, or is not E143, refer to
the proper Error Code Section
of this chapter.

Trilogy error code relating • Device software communication to • Evaluate test report and/or
to battery issues the batteries Trilogy error log. If there is
nothing conclusive from the
evaluation, retest the unit.

High Pressure Leak Fail - • Verify seating of the O2 • Reseat as needed or replace
this is indicative of a leak proportional valve manifold if suspect.
on the O2 flow side
(Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202 • Verify connection of green tube to • Reseat or replace green tube/
manifold port clips as needed.
Only)
• Verify green tube to port clip • Reseat or replace O-rings as
adaptor needed.
• Verify O-rings on port clip adapter • Replace PCA if all other related
to pressure sensor are present parts were verified not to leak.
• Pressure sensor leaking

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 6-23

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 Low Pressure Leak Fail - • Verify Interface between air duct • Reseat or replace as needed.
This is indicative of a leak and lower portion of air element
on the air flow side
• Replace manifold if suspect.
seated properly
(Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202 • Reseat all connections and
• Verify air element to mixer is intact retest.
Only)
and O-rings are not rolled
• Verify mixer to O2 element is intact
and O-rings are not rolled
• Verify O2 element to manifold is
intact and O-rings are not rolled
• Verify seating of the O2
proportional valve
• Verify sense tubes from both O2
and air elements to associated flow
sensors are seated properly and
free from holes or defects
• Ensure tubes are connected
properly

Valve Functional Fail - • Verify seating on the O2 • Reseat as needed or replace

Indicative of valve not proportional valve manifold.
properly opening or
impeded air path • Foreign material in air path • Remove material if possible,
otherwise replace manifold if
(Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202 • Faulty wire connection from O2
suspect.
Only) proportional valve to board
• Reseat connection or replace
• Faulty OBM PCA suspect part.
• Verify connector is seated,
otherwise replace PCA

PCA Communication Fail - • Faulty OBM to Trilogy Serial Cable • Verify cable connection, reseat
Indicative of PCA not or replace as needed
communicating
• Faulty PCA
(Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202
• Verify connector integrity.
Reseat Cable at PCA
Only)
• Replace PCA.
Fan Test Fail - Indicative of • Faulty OBM Fan • Verify fan cable connection.
a fan now working
(Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202
• Connection between fan and board • Reseat connection.
Only) • Faulty PCA • Replace Fan.
• Replace PCA

Current Test Fails - • Faulty PCA • Reseat connections

Indicative of idle current
not within limits
• Replace PCA
(Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202
Only)

PAGE 6-24 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

6.6 DOWNLOADING TRILOGY ALARM ERROR CODE INFORMATION
1. Insert a SD Card into the SD Card slot on the Trilogy Ventilator.
2. Press down the Audio Pause and Down Button at the same time.
3. Scroll down in the menu until you come to ‘Write Event Log to SD Card”. Select OK.
4. After write is complete, scroll back up to and select “Safely Remove SD Card”
5. Remove the SD Card from the Trilogy Ventilator.
6. Connect an SD Card Reader to your PC.
7. Place the SD Card into the SD Card reader.
8. Double click on the Trilogy Tool Box Icon.
9. Click on the BrowseUUTLogs Menu.
10. Select the location of the SD Card or PC Folder containing the Log Downloads.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 6-25

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 11. Select the Trilogy Folder.

12. At the screen below, select the “Select Cur Dir” button. Do not select individual files.

PAGE 6-26 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 13. The UUT for which you wish to view the files, will appear in the “Log Identifier” window.

14. Select the file for the UUT you wish to view and then click on the “OK” button.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 6-27

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 15. The encrypted files will then be displayed in the window. To close the file, select the red “X” in the
top right corner of the window.

16. Select “No” to exit the program.

PAGE 6-28 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

6.7 TRILOGY ERROR CODES AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS

NOTE
Use the corrective action(s) listed in section 6.5 (Troubleshooting Table) before using corrective
action(s) listed in the error code charts below.

6.7.1 VENTILATOR INOPERATIVE ALARM ERROR CODES

ERROR
PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
CODE

E-9 • Motor Capacitor not installed • Check the Capacitor

• Motor Connector not soldered properly • Check Motor connector
• Motor Rotor Locked or other mechanical • Replace Motor
problem • Replace System/CPU PCA

E-14 • Board revision resistors are not installed • Load Correct Software
• Software is running on wrong revision of • Replace System/CPU PCA
the board

E-21 • Problem with serial communication • Replace System/CPU PCA

between DSP and Host

E-37 • Host CPU is constantly rebooting • Reinstall Software

• Replace System/CPU PCA
E-71 • Parameter Settings corrupted • Replace System/CPU PCA
E-73 • Parameter Settings corrupted • Replace System/CPU PCA
E-76 • Defective EEPROM • Replace System/CPU PCA
E-77 • Defective EEPROM • Replace System/CPU PCA
• Program Execution Error
E-90 • Software does not support newer/older • Reinstall software
revision of Hardware
• Board revision resistors on System/CPU • Replace the System/CPU PCA
PCA are setup incorrect

E-101 • Program Execution Error • Contact Respironics Product Support

E-103 • Control Flow Sensor out of electrical spec • Check Tubing
• Check Manifold
• Replace Sensor PCA

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 6-29

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 E-125 • 3 reboots occurred within 24 hours • Examine error logs for reasons for
reboots
• Proceed accordingly
E-141 • Motor connector not soldered correctly • Check Bulk Capacitor
• Motor Rotor Locked or other mechanical • Check Motor connector
problem • Replace Motor
• Replace System/CPU PCA

E-145 • Both control and Monitoring Pressure • Check tubing

sensors failed. • Check manifold
• ADC failed • Replace Sensor PCA
E-146 • Both control and Monitoring Pressure • Check tubing
sensors failed. • Check manifold
• ADC failed • Replace Sensor PCA
E-158 • A serious alarm has occurred before six • None - recorded for informational
breaths have been taken after blower is purposes to indicate that backup therapy
turned on. The lack of therapy data causes could not be provided for the Ventilator
back up therapy not to be initiated and the Inoperative condition currently active
ventilator to become completely
inoperative. The alarms that would initiate
this possible scenario are: both pressure
sensors failing, both pressure and flow
sensors failing, a failure of non-volatile
memory, or a high pressure patient alarm

E-160 • Obstructed intake • Check Inlet filter / Air Path for obstruction
• Obstructed flow path • Check circuit
• Obstructed or disconnected pressure • Check internal tubing
tubing
• Faulty Blower • Replace Blower
E-163 • Control Flow Sensor out of electrical • Check tubing
specification • Check manifold
• Replace Sensor PCA

PAGE 6-30 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 E-172 • Unit is exceeding 60cm of delivered • Check the tubing for pinched or blocked
pressure tubes
• High pressure sensor reading • Check the circuit for leaks
• Large amount of drift • Check the Active Exhalation Valve
• Pinched/blocked tubing functionality
• Check the tubing for leaks, kinks, or
blockages
• Replace the Sensor board
• Replace the System/CPU PCA
E-253 • Communication failure • Replace the System/CPU PCA
• The Host CPU is unable to communicate
with the DSP

E-306 • Disconnected O2 tubing • Connect / replace O2 tubing

• O2 level greater than 35% • Replace Interface Board
E-323 • When the device encounters errors while it • Replace System/CPU Subassembly
has started to apply the Rx Setting from the
SD Card, the device stops the Rx update
and tries to restore back the old setting on
the device. During the restoration of these
old settings of the device, if there is an
error this error code is generated

E-357 • Control Flow Sensor out of electrical spec • Check tubing

• Check manifold
• Replace Sensor Board PCA

6.7.2 VENTILATOR SERVICE REQUIRED ALARM ERROR CODES

ERROR
PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
CODE

E-17 • Big Motor Capacitor not installed or wrong value • Install or Replace Capacitor
or at the end of life cycle • Replace System/CPU PCA
E-31 • Problem with +3.3V_DSP • Replace System/CPU PCA
• U23 failure
• DSP failure
E-32 • Faulty Sensor Board Cable • Check Sensor Board Cable
• Faulty Sensor Board Circuitry • Replace Sensor Board PCA
• Replace System/CPU PCA
1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 6-31
TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 E-36 • Cpld not programmed • Replace System/CPU PCA
• Pin 15 of U30 shorted
• Cpld failed
E-64 • Unit not calibrated • Recalibrate the device
• Calibration Table corrupted • Replace the System/CPU PCA
E-65 • Unit not calibrated • Recalibrate the device
• Calibration Table corrupted • Replace the System/CPU PCA
E-66 • Unit not calibrated • Recalibrate the device
• Calibration Table corrupted • Replace the System/CPU PCA
E-67 • The sensor has drifted so much that the positive • Replace Sensor Board PCA
or negative displacement of the zero point has
moved the maximum or minimum calculable
pressure value up or down somewhat. Enough
positive displacement can reduce the top end of
pressure readings below that expected by the
Trilogy design. By similar reasoning, enough
negative displacement can result in a condition
where the pressure sensor cannot read low
enough for Trilogy
• The drift data for a sensor is also collected at
zero pressure, and is converted to engineering
units. When the absolute value (since the sensor
can drift in either direction) of this drift exceeds a
configured limit, a range error has occurred

E-69 • The sensor has drifted so much that the positive • Replace Sensor Board PCA
or negative displacement of the zero point has
moved the maximum or minimum calculable
pressure value up or down somewhat. Enough
positive displacement can reduce the top end of
pressure readings below that expected by the
Trilogy design. By similar reasoning, enough
negative displacement can result in a condition
where the pressure sensor cannot read low
enough for Trilogy
• The drift data for a sensor is also collected at
zero pressure, and is converted to engineering
units. When the absolute value (since the sensor
can drift in either direction) of this drift exceeds a
configured limit, a range error has occurred

PAGE 6-32 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 E-70 • The sensor has drifted so much that the positive • Replace Sensor Board PCA
or negative displacement of the zero point has
moved the maximum or minimum calculable
pressure value up or down somewhat. Enough
positive displacement can reduce the top end of
pressure readings below that expected by the
Trilogy design. By similar reasoning, enough
negative displacement can result in a condition
where the pressure sensor cannot read low
enough for Trilogy
• The drift data for a sensor is also collected at
zero pressure, and is converted to engineering
units. When the absolute value (since the sensor
can drift in either direction) of this drift exceeds a
configured limit, a range error as occurred

E-80 • The sensor has drifted so much that the positive • Replace Sensor Board PCA
or negative displacement of the zero point has
moved the maximum or minimum calculable
pressure value up or down somewhat. Enough
positive displacement can reduce the top end of
pressure readings below that expected by the
Trilogy design. By similar reasoning, enough
negative displacement can result in a condition
where the pressure sensor cannot read low
enough for Trilogy
• The drift data for a sensor is also collected at
zero pressure, and is converted to engineering
units. When the absolute value (since the sensor
can drift in either direction) of this drift exceeds a
configured limit, a range error has occurred

E-94 • Barometric pressure sensor is reading maximum • Replace the Sensor Board PCA
or minimum counts for an extended period of
time

E-100 • Software error • Recalibrate the device

• Bad table written by Production or Field Service • Replace the System/CPU PCA
Calibration

E-106 • Speaker 1 failed or not installed • Install speaker 1

• Check connection between front
panel and system board
• Replace the Front Panel PCA
• Replace the System/CPU PCA

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 6-33

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 E-107 • Speaker 2 failed or not installed • Install speaker 2
• Check connection between front
panel and system board
• Replace the Front Panel PCA
• Replace the System/CPU PCA
E-130 • The sensor has drifted so much that the positive • Check tubing
or negative displacement of the zero point has • Check manifold
moved the maximum or minimum calculable
pressure value up or down somewhat. Enough • Replace the Sensor Board PCA
positive displacement can reduce the top end of
pressure readings below that expected by the
Trilogy design. By similar reasoning, enough
negative displacement can result in a condition
where the pressure sensor cannot read low
enough for Trilogy
• The drift data for a sensor is also collected at
zero pressure, and is converted to engineering
units. When the absolute value (since the sensor
can drift in either direction) of this drift exceeds a
configured limit, a range error has occurred

E-131 • Control pressure sensor is reading maximum or • Check tubing

minimum counts for an extended period of time • Check manifold
• Check the Sensor Board Cable
• Replace the Sensor PCA
• Replace the System/CPU PCA

E-132 • Monitor pressure sensor is reading maximum or • Check tubing

minimum counts for an extended period of time • Check manifold
• Check the Sensor Board Cable
• Replace the Sensor PCA
• Replace the System/CPU PCA

E-133 • Proximal pressure sensor is reading maximum or • Check tubing

minimum counts for an extended period of time • Check manifold
• Check the Sensor Board Cable
• Replace the Sensor PCA
• Replace the System/CPU PCA

PAGE 6-34 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 E-134 • Control flow sensor is reading maximum or • Check tubing
minimum counts for an extended period of time • Check manifold
• Check the Sensor Board Cable
• Replace the Sensor PCA
• Replace the System/CPU PCA

E-135 • Monitor flow sensor is reading maximum or • Check tubing

minimum counts for an extended period of time • Check manifold
• Check the Sensor Board Cable
• Replace the Sensor PCA
• Replace the System/CPU PCA

E-136 • Air stream Temperature 1 sensor is reading • Check Airstream Temp Sensor
maximum or minimum counts for an extended connections
period of time • Replace Sensor
• Replace Sensor Board
• Replace System/CPU PCA
E-137 • dP Pressure Temperature sensor is reading • Check dP Pressure Temp Sensor
maximum counts for an extended period of time • Replace Sensor
• Replace Sensor Board PCA
• Replace System/CPU PCA

E-138 • Barometric Pressure sensor is reading a count • Replace the Sensor PCA
outside of its valid range • Replace the System/CPU PCA
E-139 • Software Error • Recalibrate the device
• Replace the System/CPU PCA
E-143 • Control or Monitoring Pressure sensor has • Turn off Blower and allow 30
drifted too far away from the other seconds for drift processing to
complete
• Replace the Sensor PCA

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 6-35

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 E-147 • The sensor has drifted so much that the positive • Replace Sensor Board
or negative displacement of the zero point has
moved the maximum or minimum calculable
pressure value up or down somewhat. Enough
positive displacement can reduce the top end of
pressure readings below that expected by the
Trilogy design. By similar reasoning, enough
negative displacement can result in a condition
where the pressure sensor cannot read low
enough for Trilogy
• The drift data for a sensor is also collected at
zero pressure, and is converted to engineering
units. When the absolute value (since the sensor
can drift in either direction) of this drift exceeds a
configured limit, a range error has occurred

E-161 • Internal Li-Ion has a TDA due to Discharge • Replace Power Management PCA
Overcurrent or Discharge Short Circuit • Replace Internal Li-Ion battery
• PMB fault • Replace System/CPU PCA
• System Board fault
• Internal Li-Ion fault
E-164 • Monitor Flow Sensor out of electrical spec • Check tubing
• Check manifold
• Replace Sensor Board
E-174 • Can’t communicate with Charger Chip • Replace Power Management PCA
• PMB fault • Replace Internal Li-Ion battery
• Internal Li-Ion fault • Replace Detachable Li-Ion battery
• Detachable Li-Ion fault • Replace System/CPU PCA

E-175 • Can’t communicate with Internal Li-Ion battery • Replace Power Management PCA
after five tries and charger is not trying to wake- • Replace Internal Li-Ion battery
up charge the battery
• Could take up to 210 seconds for alarm to be
reported because the Charger is trying to wake-
up charge the Internal Li-Ion
• PMB fault
• Internal Li-Ion fault
E-177 • Internal Li-Ion battery not Authentic • Replace Internal Li-Ion battery
• Fake battery • Replace Power Management PCA
• PMB fault
• Internal Li-Ion fault

PAGE 6-36 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 E-189 • Detachable or Internal Li-Ion usable and V_battLi • Replace Power Management PCA
< 9 volts for greater than 10 sec indicates Li-Ion
battery unable to power the System
• PMB fault
E-191 • AFE chip does not receive the appropriate • Replace Internal Li-Ion battery
frequency on the WDI pin from the Gas Gauge • Replace Power Management PCA
chip. Both of these chips are i the Li-Ion battery
pack.
• Internal Li-Ion fault
E-193 • Internal Li-Ion battery permanent failure • Replace Internal Li-Ion battery
E-195 • Internal Li-Ion Battery State of Health < 50%. • Cycle the Internal Li-Ion (discharge
• Full charge capacity (FCC) is less than 51% of battery so that capacity change is
> 50%, then rest for > 2 hours.
the Design Capacity
Charge to 100%, then rest for > 2
• Internal Li-Ion FCC error hours)
• Internal Li-Ion fault • Replace Internal Li-Ion battery
• Internal Li-Ion end of life
E-197 • Internal Li-Ion not present as indicated by the • Replace Power Management PCA
Charger Chip status • Replace Internal Li-Ion battery
• PMB fault
• Internal Li-Ion battery pack fault
E-203 • Circuitry failure • Replace System/CPU PCA
E-205 • Error indicates a shorted Q25, Q26 in the battery • Replace the Power Management
discharge path on the Power Management PCA. PCA
If either FET is shorted and AC is connected,
then AC voltage will be connected to the Pb Acid
battery terminals if one is connected and
enabled. This may bring down the AC supply
due to excessive current because the AC supply
is trying to charge the PB Acid. If the AC supply
folds back the unit should run properly

E-207 • Q11 failure on Power Management PCA • Replace Power Management PCA
E-208 • Internal Li-Ion Cycle Count exceeded > 475 • Replace Internal Li-Ion battery
cycles
• Internal Li-Ion end of life
E-265 • Checks if Li-Ion battery is present by attempting • Replace the Internal Battery
to communicate when the Charger CHip safety • Replace the Power Management
signal indicates the battery is not present. Safety
PCA
signal from the Li-Ion may be disconnected or
Charger CHip may have a fault so it is not
detecting a Li-Ion battery

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 6-37

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 E-267 • FCC > 150% of the Li-Ion design capacity • Cycle the Internal Li-Ion (discharge
• Corrupted Gas Gauge battery so that capacity change is
> 50%, then rest for > 2 hours.
Charge to 100%, then rest for > 2
hours)
• Replace Internal Li-Ion battery
E-269 • Error indicates an open VBULK FET. This • Replace Power Management PCA
MOSFET connects the output of the AC/DC
supply to the input of the boost converter. Unit
will not run on AC power. Will use battery power
if available

E-270 • Error indicates an open Q11, which controls the • Replace Power Management PCA
discharge of the Li-Ion batteries post VbattLi.
When the Lithium Ion power is selected, this FET
is turned on. If Q11 fails open, there will be no Li-
Ion battery power to the system

E-272 • Charger chip failure • Replace Power Management PCA

• FET failure
E-273 • Unit not calibrated • Recalibrate the device
• Calibration table corrupted • Replace the System/CPU PCA
E-274 • Unit not calibrated • Recalibrate the device
• Calibration table corrupted • Replace the System/CPU PCA
E-290 • One or more “Ventilator Service Required” errors • Examine the Significant Event Log
are active in the system error log. The first column of data
contains the first error code that is
causing this error message.
• Address according to this first error
code
• Each time you address an error,
cycle the motor (OFF to ON to
OFF) and check the Significant
Event Log again until this alarm is
no longer sounded
• Remove all power from the unit
and then reapply power, then turn
the motor ON to see if this
message is still reported

E-302 • Voltage reference on internal ADC failed • Replace System/CPU PCA

E-311 • Unit wasn’t calibrated or calibration table was • Recalibrate
destroyed • Replace System/CPU PCA

PAGE 6-38 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 E-333 • U24 circuitry failure • Replace System/CPU PCA
• U26 circuitry failure
E-338 • Unit not calibrated • Recalibrate
• Calibration Table corrupted • Replace System/CPU PCA
E-340 • CPLD stopped sending alive signal to the Host • Replace System/CPU PCA
CPU

E-344 • Failure of Oxygen Blending Module • Recalibrate the device

• Replace the Blending Module PCA
E-349 • Communication between Host and OBM was lost • Replace OBM PCA
• Replace Interface PCA
E-356 • Before a drift is computed for this sensor, its • Replace Sensor PCA
auto-null valve is opened to atmosphere. A test • Replace System/CPU PCA
is performed to ensure that the valve has fully
opened in accordance with the time provided by
the technical specification

E-358 • Proximal Flow Sensor out of electrical spec. • Check tubing

• Check manifold
• Replace Sensor PCA

6.7.3 VENTILATOR SERVICE RECOMMENDED ALARM ERROR CODES

ERROR
PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
CODE

E-15 • Hardware current limiting is not working correctly • Replace the System/CPU PCA
• Replace Motor
E-16 • Problem with power management board or • Replace respective battery
batteries (if no AC present) • Replace the Power
Management Board

E-18 • Problem with DC/DC circuitry • Replace the System/CPU PCA

E-19 • Problem with DC/DC circuitry • Replace the System/CPU PCA
E-22 • Motor Temperature sensor failed • Replace Motor
• Problem with U37 circuitry • Replace System/CPU PCA
E-23 • Internal watchdog on DSP failed • Replace System/CPU PCA

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 6-39

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 E-68 • Error indicates a short in the Li-Ion battery • Replace Power Management
discharge path on the Power Management PCA. PCA
Normally, the Host software recognizes a useable
Detachable and Internal battery and attempts to
disable the discharge path of the Internal Battery.
Since the Internal Battery discharge path has failed
shorted, current will be shared by the Internal and
Detachable Battery

E-78 • Unable to read a valid time from the RTC chip • Replace the System/CPU PCA
E-79 • The time read from the RTC does not match time • Replace the System/CPU PCA
on Host CPU

E-119 • Battery charging is detected when there is no AC • Replace Power Management

present PCA

E-122 • Unable to write to Event Log • Replace the System/CPU PCA

E-123 • Error indicates a shorted Q29 in the Li-Ion Battery • Replace the Power
discharge path on the Power Management PCA. Management PCA
This MOSFET prevents a low mA sneak current
from the Internal Battery when the discharge path
is disabled by either the Host software or the
hardware

E-149 • Before a drift is computed for this sensor, its auto- • Replace Sensor Board
null valve is opened to atmosphere. A test is • Replace System/CPU PCA
performed to ensure that the valve has fully
opened in accordance with the time provided by
the technical specification. This is performed by
ensuring that the control pressure has dropped
significantly enough after the valve has opened
and a de-bounce time has expired. If the pressure
reading before the valve was opened was not high
enough (due to ventilator therapy settings) to
provide a valid criteria regarding a significant drop
in pressure, then the check is not performed.
When this condition is in effect for a consecutive
number of attempted drifts, the error is reported

E-159 • Problem with power management board or • Replace Power Management

batteries - unit would not go into Sleep when AC PCA
Power removed • Replace System/CPU PCA
E-198 • Circuitry failure • Replace the System/CPU PCA

PAGE 6-40 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 E-199 • Detachable Battery harness failure • Replace Detachable Battery
• Power Management Board Failure harness

• Circuitry failure • Replace the Power

Management PCA
• Replace the System/CPU PCA
E-200 • Circuitry failure • Replace the System/CPU PCA
E-201 • Power Management Board Failure • Replace the Power
• Circuitry failure Management PCA
• Replace the System/CPU PCA
E-202 • Circuitry failure • Replace the System/CPU PCA
• Replace Interface PCA
E-204 • U3 failure • Replace System/CPU PCA
• CPLD failure
E-271 • Error indicates an open Q13, Q14 in the Lead Acid • Replace Power Management
battery discharge path on the Power Management PCA
PCA. When Pb Acid is selected by the hardware
or software, VBATTSENSE would be low. If AC is
disconnected, there would be no battery backup
from the Li-Ion battery

E-289 • One or more “Ventilator Service Recommended” • Examine the Significant Event
errors are active in the system Log error log. The first column
of data contains the first error
code that is causing this error
message
• Address according to this first
error code
• Each time you address an error,
cycle the motor (OFF to ON to
OFF) and check the Significant
Event Log again until this alarm
is no longer sounded
• Remove all power from the unit
and then reapply power, then
turn the motor ON to see if this
message is still reported

E-304 • O2 sensor failed • Replace Interface PCA

E-345 • Internal O2 sensor at end of life or watchdog failure • Replace OBM PCA
E-354 • Unit not calibrated • Recalibrate
• O2 Sensor Calibration Table corrupted • Replace System/CPU PCA

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 6-41

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
6.7.4 OTHER POWER ALARM ERROR CODES

ERROR ON-SCREEN
PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
CODE MESSAGE

E-53 High Vte • The measured Exhaled Tidal • Check device and circuit setup if
Volume is greater than or patient circuit is available
equal to the alarm setting • Check the Active Exhalation
• Flow Sensor problem Valve functionality, if it is
• Active exhalation valve attached
problem • Check the alarm settings against
the therapy settings.
• Check the tubing for leaks,
kinks, or blockages
• Replace the Sensor PCA and re-
calibrate

E-54 Low Vte • The measured Exhaled Tidal • Check device and circuit setup if
Volume is less than or equal to patient circuit is available
the alarm setting • Check the circuit tubing for
• High leak pinched or blocked tubes if
• Flow sensor problem patient circuit is available

• Active exhalation valve

• Check the circuit for leaks if
patient circuit is available
problem
• Check the Active Exhalation
Valve functionality, if it is
attached
• Check the alarm settings against
the therapy settings
• Check the tubing for leaks,
kinks, or blockages
• Replace the Sensor PCA and
recalibrate

E-81 Card Error • Faulty SD Card • Use different SD Card

E-83 Card Error • Foreign object inserted in card • Use correct MMC/SD card
slot • Re-insert card
• Unformatted card • Replace System/CPU PCA
• Card prematurely removed

PAGE 6-42 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 E-84 Card Error • Foreign object inserted in card • Use correct MMC/SD card
slot • Re-insert card
• Unformatted card • Replace System/CPU PCA
• Card prematurely removed
E-85 Card Error • Foreign object inserted in card • Use correct MMC/SD card
slot • Re-insert card
• Unformatted card • Replace System/CPU PCA
• Card prematurely removed
E-86 Card Error • Foreign object inserted in card • Use correct MMC/SD card
slot • Re-insert card
• Unformatted card • Replace System/CPU PCA
• Card prematurely removed
E-87 Card Error • Foreign object inserted in card • Use correct MMC/SD card
slot • Re-insert card
• Unformatted card • Replace System/CPU PCA
• Card prematurely removed
E-88 Card Error • Foreign object inserted in card • Use correct MMC/SD card
slot • Re-insert card
• Unformatted card • Replace System/CPU PCA
• Card prematurely removed
E-89 Card Error • Foreign object inserted in card • Use correct MMC/SD card
slot • Re-insert card
• Unformatted card • Replace System/CPU PCA
• Card prematurely removed
E-93 Keypad Stuck • Key is providing reading that it • Check the Keypad for stuck keys
has been held down for 2 • Replace the Front Panel PCA
minutes
• Replace the System/CPU PCA

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 6-43

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 E-109 High Expiratory • Unit is not reaching the • Check device and circuit setup if
Pressure exhaled pressure setting; patient circuit available
Patient Pressure during • Check the circuit tubing for
exhalation is greater than or
pinched or blocked tubes if
equal to Exhaled Pressure
patient circuit available
Setting = 5 cm for 5 seconds
or more • Check the Active Exhalation
Valve functionality, if it is
attached
• Check the tubing for leaks,
kinks, or blockages
• Replace the Sensor PCA and
recalibrate

E-110 Low Inspiratory • Unit is not reaching the • Check device and circuit setup if
Pressure inhalation pressure setting; In patient circuit available
CPAP, S, S/T, T, PC, and PC- • Check the circuit tubing for
SIMV modes, the lowest
pinched or blocked tubes if
Patient Pressure delivered
patient circuit available
during inhalation is less than
the lowest inhalation pressure • Check the circuit for leaks if
- 5 cm; In CV, AC, and CIMV patient circuit is available
modes, the lowest Patient • Check the Active Exhalation
Pressure delivered during Valve functionality, if it is
inhalation is less than the Low attached
PIP Alarm setting
• Check the tubing for leaks,
• Low pressure sensor reading kinks, or blockages
• Large amount of drift • Replace the Sensor PCA and
• Pinched/blocked tubing recalibrate

E-111 High Respiratory • The measured Breath Rate is • Check device and circuit setup if
Rate greater than or equal to the patient circuit available
alarm setting • Check the circuit tubing for
• False triggering pinched or blocked tubes if
• Alarm/setting mismatch patient circuit available

• Spontaneous breathing above • Check the circuit for leaks if

patient circuit is available
the alarm
• Check the Active Exhalation
Valve functionality, if it is
attached
• Check the alarm settings against
the therapy settings
• Check the tubing for leaks,
kinks, or blockages
• Replace the Sensor PCA and
recalibrate

PAGE 6-44 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 E-112 Low Respiratory • The measured Breath Rate is • Check device and circuit setup if
Rate less than or equal to the alarm patient circuit available
setting • Check the circuit tubing for
• Alarm/setting mismatch pinched or blocked tubes if
• Spontaneous breathing below patient circuit available
the alarm high leak • Check the circuit for leaks if
patient circuit is available
• Check the Active Exhalation
Valve functionality, if it is
attached
• Check the alarm settings against
the therapy settings
• Check the tubing for leaks,
kinks, or blockages
• Replace the Sensor PCA and
recalibrate

E-113 High Minute • The measured Minute • Check device and circuit setup if
Ventilation Ventilation is greater than or patient circuit available
equal to the alarm setting • Check the circuit for leaks if
• Alarm/setting mismatch patient circuit is available
• Low breath rate (leak) • Check the Active Exhalation
• High exhaled tidal volume Valve functionality, if it is
attached
(flow sensor problem, active
exhalation valve problem) • Check the alarm settings against
the therapy settings
• Check the tubing for leaks,
kinks, or blockages
• Replace the Sensor PCA and
recalibrate

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 6-45

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 E-114 Low Minute • The measured Minute • Check device and circuit setup if
Ventilation Ventilation is less than or patient circuit available
equal to the alarm setting • Check the circuit tubing for
• Alarm/setting mismatch pinched or blocked tubes if
• High leak patient circuit available

• High breath rate

• Check the circuit for leaks if
patient circuit is available
• Low exhaled tidal volume (flow
sensor problem)
• Check the Active Exhalation
Valve functionality, if it is
attached
• Check the alarm settings against
the therapy settings
• Check the tubing for leaks,
kinks, or blockages
• Replace the Sensor PCA and
recalibrate

E-115 High Vti • The measured inhaled tidal • Check device and circuit setup if
volume is greater than or patient circuit available
equal to the alarm setting • Check the Active Exhalation
• Flow sensor problem Valve functionality, if it is
• Active exhalation valve attached
problem • Check the alarm settings against
the therapy settings
• Check the tubing for leaks,
kinks, or blockages
• Replace the Sensor PCA and
recalibrate

E-116 Low Vti • The measured inhaled tidal • Check device and circuit setup if
volume is less than or equal to patient circuit available
the alarm setting • Check the circuit tubing for
• High leak pinched or blocked tubes if
• Flow sensor problem patient circuit available

• Active exhalation valve

• Check the circuit for leaks if
patient circuit is available
problem
• Check the Active Exhalation
Valve functionality, if it is
attached
• Check the alarm settings against
the therapy settings
• Check the tubing for leaks,
kinks, or blockages
• Replace the Sensor PCA and
recalibrate

PAGE 6-46 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 E-118 Low Circuit Leak • The leak in the system is too • Check device and circuit setup
small • Check the circuit tubing for
• Wrong circuit pinched or blocked tubes
• Blocked tubes • Check the circuit setting against
• Sensor problems the circuit being used
• Check the tubing for leaks,
kinks, or blockages
• Replace the Sensor PCA and
recalibrate

E-120 Apnea • Spontaneous breathing has • Check device and circuit setup
not been detected within the • Check the circuit tubing for
alarm time
pinched or blocked tubes
• High leak • Check the circuit for leaks
• Check the Active Exhalation
Valve functionality, if it is
attached
• Check the tubing for leaks,
kinks, or blockages
• Replace the Sensor Board PCA
and recalibrate

E-121 Circuit • High flow condition has been • Check device and circuit setup
Disconnect detected • Check the circuit tubing for
• High leak pinched or blocked tubes
• Flow Sensor problem • Check the circuit for leaks
• Check the Active Exhalation
Valve functionality, if it is
attached
• Check the tubing for leaks,
kinks, or blockages
• Replace the Sensor Board PCA
and recalibrate

E-162 Replace • Detachable Li-Ion has a TDA • Replace Detachable Li-Ion

Detachable due to Discharge Overcurrent
Battery
• Replace Power Management
or Discharge Short Current
PCA
• PMB fault • Replace System CPU PCA
• System Board fault
• Detachable Li-Ion fault

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 6-47

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 E-165 Low Expiratory • When the Expiratory pressure • Check the circuit tubing for
is less than or equal to the pinched or blocked tubes if
EPAP/CPAP/PEEP - 5 patient circuit available
pressure units in value for 5 • Check the circuit for leaks if
seconds or more
patient circuit available
• Deactivated if the Attained • Check the Active Exhalation
Expiratory Pressure > EPAP/
Valve functionality, if it is
PEEP/CPAP - 5 pressure units
attached
• Check the tubing for leaks,
kinks, or blockages
• Replace the sensor board
E-170 High Inspiratory • Unit is exceeding the • Check the circuit tubing for
Pressure inhalation pressure setting; IN pinched or blocked tubes if
CPAP, S, S/T, T, PC, and PC- patient circuit available
SIMV modes, the highest • Check the circuit for leaks if
Patient Pressure delivered
patient circuit available
during inhalation is greater
than the highest inhalation • Check the Active Exhalation
pressure + 5 cm; In CV, AC, Valve functionality, if it is
and SIMV modes, the highest attached
Patient Pressure delivered • Check the tubing for leaks,
during inhalation is greater kinks, or blockages
than the High PIP Alarm
setting • Replace the Sensor PCA
• High pressure Sensor reading
• Large amount of drift
• Pinched/blocked tubing
E-171 High Inspiratory • Unit is exceeding the • Check the circuit tubing for
Pressure inhalation pressure setting; IN pinched of blocked tubes if
CPAP, S, S/T, T, PC, and PC- patient circuit is available
SIMV modes, the highest • Check the circuit for leaks if
Patient Pressure delivered
patient circuit is available
during inhalation is greater
than the highest inhalation • Check the Active Exhalation
pressure + 5 cm; In CV, AC, Valve functionality, if it is
and SIMV modes, the highest attached
Patient Pressure delivered • Check the tubing for leaks,
during inhalation is greater kinks, or blockages
than the High PIP Alarm
setting • Replace the Sensor PCA
• High pressure sensor reading
• Large amount of drift
• Pinched/blocked tubing

PAGE 6-48 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 E-173 Start On Battery • Vent was started on battery • None - recorded for
power informational purposes to
indicate the unit was started
without AC power.

E-176 Replace • Can’t communicate with • Replace the Power

Detachable Detachable Li-Ion battery and Management PCA
Battery charger is not trying to wake- • Replace the Detachable Li-Ion
up charge the battery. Could
take up to 210 seconds for
alarm to be reported because
the charger is trying to wake-
up charge the Detachable Li-
Ion
• PMB fault
• Detachable Li-Ion fault
E-178 Replace • Detachable Li-Ion battery not • Replace Detachable Li-Ion
Detachable authentic
Battery
• Replace Power Management
• Fake battery PCA
• PMB fault
• Detachable Li-Ion fault
E-179 AC Power • AC was disconnected • Verify AC connected
Disconnected
• PMB fault • Replace Power Management
• AC Power Supply fault PCA

• Power Cord fault • Replace AC Power Supply

• A/D channel fault
• Replace System/CPU PCA

E-180 External Batt • Lead Acid was disconnected • Connect Lead Acid
Disconnected
• Power Cord fault • Verify Lead Acid Battery Cord
• PMB fault • Replace Power Management
• A/D channel fault PCA
• Replace System/CPU PCA
E-181 Detach Batt • Detachable Li-Ion was • Verify Detachable Li-Ion
Disconnected disconnected connected
• Li-Ion connector fault • Replace Detachable Li-Ion cable
• PMB fault • Replace Power Management
• A/D channel fault PCA
• Replace System/CPU PCA
E-183 Low External • Low battery - Lead Acid has < • Charge Lead Acid Battery
Battery 20 minutes run time remaining • Replace Lead Acid Battery
and it is last available power
source

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 6-49

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 E-184 Low Detachable • Low battery - Detachable Li- • Charge Detachable Li-Ion
Battery Ion has < 20 minutes run time Battery
remaining and it is last • Replace Detachable Li-Ion
available power source
Battery

E-185 Low Internal • Low battery - Internal Li-Ion • Charge Internal Li-Ion Battery
Battery has < 20 minutes run time
remaining and it is last
available power source

E-186 Low External • Depleted battery - Lead Acid • Charge Lead Acid battery
Battery has < 10 minutes run time • Replace Lead Acid battery
remaining and it is last
available power source

E-187 Low Detachable • Depleted battery - Detachable • Charge Detachable Li-Ion

Battery Li-Ion has < 10 minutes run Battery
time remaining and it is last • Replace Detachable Li-Ion
available power source
battery

E-188 Low Detachable • Depleted battery - Internal Li- • Charge Internal Li-Ion Battery
Battery Ion has < 10 minutes run time
remaining and it is last
available power source

E-192 Replace • AFE chip does not receive the • Replace Detachable Li-Ion
Detachable appropriate frequency on the battery
Battery WDI pin from the Gas Gauge • Replace Power Management
chip. Both of these chips are
Board
in the Li-Ion battery pack
• Detachable Li-Ion fault
E-194 Replace • Detachable Li-Ion Battery • Replace Detachable Li-Ion
Detachable Permanent Failure battery
Battery

E-196 Replace • Detachable Li-Ion State of • Cycle the Detachable Li-Ion

Detachable Health < 50%. Full Charge (discharge battery so that
Battery Capacity (FCC) is less than capacity change is > 50%, then
51% of the design capacity rest for > 2 hours. Charge to
• Detachable Li-Ion FCC error 100%, then rest for > 2 hours)

• Detachable Li-Ion fault • Replace Detachable Li-Ion

battery
• Detachable Li-Ion end of life
E-206 Replace • Corruption of battery gas • Replace Battery
Detachable gauge
Battery
• Cycle the Detachable Li-Ion
(diecharge battery so that
capacity change is > 50%, then
rest for > 2 hours. Charge to
100%, then rest for > 2 hours)

PAGE 6-50 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 E-209 Replace • Detachable Li-Ion Cycle Count • Replace Detachable Li-Ion
Detachable > 5500 cycles Battery
Battery
• Detachable Li-Ion end of life
E-218 Batt Discharge • Internal Li-Ion charge current • Inspect fans
Stopped-Temp. greater than 4 Amps for • Replace cooling fan(s)
greater than 2 sec. Battery
charge FET is turned off. High
temperature during discharge.
Battery recovers if
temperature is less than 55°
C.

E-219 Batt Discharge • Detachable Li-Ion charge • Inspect fans

Stopped-Temp. current greater than 4 Amps • Replace cooling fan(s)
for greater than 2 sec. Battery
charge FET is turned off. High
temperature during discharge.
Battery recovers if
temperature is less than 55°
C.

E-230 Battery Not • Internal Li-Ion temp > 45° C or • Inspect fans
Charging - Temp. < 0° C when charging is • Replace cooling fan(s)
initiated. Resets when temp <
42° C and > 3° C • Replace Internal Li-Ion
• Internal Li-Ion temp > 50° C or
< -2.5° C during charging.
Resets when temp 42° C and
> 0.5° C
• High/low ambient temperature
• Cooling fan(s) fault
• Detachable Li-Ion fault
E-231 Battery Not • Detachable Li-Ion temp > 45° • Inspect fans
Charging - Temp. C or < 0° C when charging is • Replace cooling fan(s)
initiated. Resets when temp <
42° C and > 3° C • Replace Detachable Li-Ion
• Detachable Li-Ion temp > 50°
C or < -2.5° C during charging.
Resets when temp 42° C and
> 0.5° C
• High/low ambient temperature
• Cooling fan(s) fault
• Detachable Li-Ion fault

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 6-51

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 E-234 Upgrade Failed • Unable to open the new • Reformat card and replace new
Screen software file on the card software file on the card
• Re-insert card, retry upgrade
E-235 Upgrade Failed • Unable to read the new • Reformat card and replace new
Screen software file on card software file on the card
• The new software file on the • Re-insert card, retry upgrade
card is corrupt

E-236 Upgrade Failed • The user tried to upgrade to • Reformat card and replace new
Screen an older version of software software file on the card
• Re-insert card, retry upgrade
E-237 Upgrade Failed • The user tried to upgrade to a • Reformat card and replace new
Screen version of software that is not software file on the card
intended fro the Trilogy • Re-insert card, retry upgrade
Ventilator

E-238 Upgrade Failed • The new software file on the • Reformat card and replace new
Screen card is corrupt software file on the card
• Re-insert card, retry upgrade
E-239 Upgrade Failed • Unable to program the new • Replace System/CPU PCA
Screen software on the Host CPU

E-240 Upgrade Failed • The user tried to upgrade to a • Reformat card and replace new
Screen version of software that is not software file on the card
intended for the Trilogy • Re-insert card, retry upgrade
Ventilator

E-241 Upgrade Failed • Unable to program the new • Replace System/CPU PCA
Screen software on the DSP

E-242 Upgrade Failed • Unable to program the new • Reformat card and replace new
Screen software on the Host CPU software file on the card.
• Re-insert card, retry upgrade
• Replace System/CPU PCA
E-245 Software stops • Last battery depleted • Replace or charge the battery
blower and Loss
of All Power
sounds

E-246 Internal Battery • Unable to charge Internal Li- • Replace Internal Li-Ion
Not Charging Ion battery after 30 minutes • Replace Detachable li-Ion
• PMB fault • Replace Power Management
• Internal Li-Ion fault PCA
• Detachable Li-Ion fault

PAGE 6-52 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 E-247 Detach Battery • Unable to charge Detachable • Replace Detachable Li-Ion
Not Charging Li-Ion battery after 30 minutes • Replace Internal Li-Ion
• PMB fault • Replace Power Management
• Detachable Li-Ion fault PCA
• Internal Li-Ion fault
E-266 Replace • Checks if Li-Ion battery is • Replace the Power
Detachable present by attempting to Management PCA
Battery communicate when the • Replace Detachable Battery
Charger Chip safety signal
indicates the battery is not
present. Safety signal from
the Li-Ion may be
disconnected or Charger Chip
may have fault so it is not
detecting a Li-Ion battery

E-280 External Battery • Lead Acid was depleted • Replace or charge Lead Acid
Depleted

E-281 Detachable • Detachable Li-Ion was • Replace or Charge Detachable

Battery Depleted depleted Li-Ion

E-282 Internal Battery • Internal Li-Ion was depleted • Charge Internal Li-Ion
Depleted
• Internal Li-Ion discharge FET • Replace Internal Li-Ion
off

E-283 Upgrade Screen • Software upgrade completed • None - recorded for

Complete successfully informational purposes to
indicate that a software upgrade
was completed

E-291 Check Circuit • Patient circuit does not match • Change circuit or Circuit Type
Circuit Type • Reconnect tubing correctly
• Tubing on active circuit not • Reconnect tubing
connected properly
• Install correct porting block
• Tubing on active circuit fell off
• Replace Sensor PCA
• One of dual sensors failed
E-299 Card Error • When the SD Card does not • Erase unnecessary files on card.
have enough memory • Ensure card > 75 MB
available to write EDF (3 days
of Waveform and 1 year of • Use new card
Annotations and Detailed
data) and Event Log (CSV)
Files

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 6-53

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 E-300 Card Error • When the Card is detected as • Check write protect switch on
a write protected SD Card card
• Use new card
• Replace System/CPU PCA
E-301 Card Error • Error in creating files/ • Use new card
directories on the SD Card • Replace System/CPU PCA
E-305 High Internal • Disconnected O2 tubing • Connect/replace O2 tubing
Oxygen
• O2 level between 25% and • Replace Interface PCA
35%

E-307 High • It could be caused by air • Check/replace fans

Temperature stream temperature, motor • Replace batteries
temperature or batteries
temperature • Replace motor
• Replace air stream temperature
sensor

E-308 High • It could be caused by air • Check/replace fans

Temperature stream temperature, motor • Replace batteries
temperature or batteries
temperature • Replace motor
• Replace air stream temperature
sensor

E-309 Check External • Lead Acid is useable and • Check connections

Battery current is being drawn from • Replace External Battery Cable
the Li-Ion battery
• Replace Lead Acid Battery
• External Battery Cable fault
• Replace Power Management
• Faulty connection to Leak Acid PCA
battery terminals
• Replace System/CPU PCA
• PMB fault
• A/D channel fault
• High impedance Lead Acid
battery

E-312 Prescription • If usable Rx found on the SD • None - recorded for

Change screen Card for the device. informational purposes that the
displayed at time prescription was read
of Rx Update successfully from the SD card.

E-313 Prescription • Rx from the SD Card is ready • None - recorded for

Review screen for user review informational purposes that the
displayed at time prescription was read
of Rx Update successfully from the SD card.

PAGE 6-54 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 E-314 Failed -Card is • If the Rx is only for the current • Check write protect switch on
read only device and the card is read card
only • Replace System/CPU PCA
E-315 Failed - Serial • If the Serial Number in the Rx • None - recorded for
Number Card does not match the informational purposes that the
Serial Number of the device serial number in the prescription
does not match the serial
number for the device.

E-316 Failed - Circuit • If the circuit type in the Rx on • None - recorded for
Type the card does not match the informational purposes that the
Circuit Type in the device circuit type in the prescription
does not match the circuit type
for the device.

E-317 Prescription • Failure to update the Rx due • None - recorded for

Change Failed to the errors in the Rx settings informational purposes to
indicate that the prescription had
bad settings.

E-318 Prescription • Rx update is complete • None - recorded for

Change informational purposes to
Complete indicate that the prescription
update was completed
successfully.

E-319 Prescription • Rx update is cancelled by the • None - recorded for

Change user by either UI option or by informational purposes indicate
Cancelled pulling out of the card before that the prescription update was
Rx Update is complete not completed.

E-320 Prescription • failure to update the Rx due to • None - recorded for

Change Failed error in the file format or errors informational purposes to
in reading the file indicate that the prescription
data on the card could not be
read.

E-321 Prescription • Rx version incorrect for the • None - recorded for

Change failed device informational purposes to
indicate that the version of the
prescription data on the SD card
was bad.

E-322 Prescription • Rx checksum is incorrect • None - recorded for

Change Failed informational purposes to
indicate that the prescription on
the SD card had a bad
checksum.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 6-55

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 E-339 Pressure Sensor • Temperature Table used in • Run unit to heat up, turn unit off
Drift - turn off for temperature compensation for (leave plugged in), let unit cool
20 secs. dP sensor is not sufficient for down to get more data in
use Temperature Table
• Replace Sensor Board
E-342 High Priority • Pressure at Oxygen Blending • Check supply pressure
Module inlet below 40 psi • Check inlet pressure sensor
connections
• Replace OBM PCA
E-343 High Priority • Pressure at Oxygen Blending • Check supply pressure
Module above 87 psi • Check inlet pressure sensor
connections
• Replace OBM PCA
E-348 Upgrade Failed • OBM did not accept new • Reformat card and replace new
Screen software version software file on card
• Re-insert card; retry upgrade
E-351 Low Oxygen • Delivered oxygen • Check supply pressure
Flow concentration less than FiO2 • Check inlet pressure sensor
set point - 10% connections
• Check internal flow element for
leaks
• Replace OBM Module
• Replace OBM PCA
E-352 High Oxygen • Delivered oxygen • Check inlet pressure
Flow concentration greater than • Replace OBM valve
FiO2 setpoint + 10%
• Replace OBM PCA
E-359 High Internal • O2 level inside OBM > 30% • Connect O2 tubing in OBM
Oxygen
• Disconnect O2 source or replace
sensor in OBM

E-360 Low Vte • The desired tidal volume • Check the tubing (inside and
cannot be delivered within the outside unit) for leaks, kinks, or
limits of the IPAP MIn and Max blockages
settings • Replace the sensor board and
• High leak recalibrate
• Flow Sensor problem

PAGE 6-56 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE
7.0 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter describes the Maintenance intervals and procedures for the Trilogy Ventilator.

7.1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

Routine maintenance involves periodic checking, cleaning, and or replacing the following item as necessary:
• Air Inlet Filter
• Enclosures

7.1.1 AIR INLET FILTER

Under normal usage, you should clean the inlet filter at least once every two weeks and replace it with a new
filter every six months or sooner if needed.

7.1.2 ENCLOSURES
Commensurate with hospital or homecare policies, Respironics recommends cleaning the cabinet and
inspecting for damage as necessary.

7.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

The following Preventive Service procedures will be followed by authorized service personnel at the intervals
outlined in the maintenance schedule below. Preventive Maintenance must be performed by Respironics or a
Respironics’ trained location.
Your new Philips Respironics Trilogy ventilator includes a blank PM Service Due label affixed to the bottom of
your device. The label is blank, which allows you to document when service is due. Service is due every
10000 blower hours or 24 months whichever comes first depending on the usage of the device or 17,500
blower hours for blower maintenance.
During the initial install, you will need to record the date and hours (if not already written) on the blank label to
maximize your in-service interval. Record the service date as 24 months from the date first placed on a
patient. Record the hours as 10000 blower hours for initial usage.
The device blower hours are listed in the device software in the information menu.
A new blank label should be applied to the Trilogy Ventilator after the 10000 hours or 24 months maintenance
and after the 17,500 Blower Maintenance has been performed. The label should be completed according to
the table below with the new next maintenance due blower hours and new next maintenance due date (should
be 24 months from date of completed Maintenance) before returning the ventilator.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 7-1

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 WHEN TO COMPLETE LABEL INFORMATION LABEL COMPLETED BY
First ever product use • Record 10000 on the bottom • Trilogy Dealer
line and 24 months from date of
install on the top line.

After first 10000 hours / 24 • Record 17,500 on the bottom • Service Technician
months maintenance line and add date 24 months
completion from 10000 / 24 months
maintenance completion date.
For example if the maintenance
was completed on 01/01/2010
(MM/DD/YYYY) the date
recorded on the top line should
be 1/1/2012 (MM/DD/YYYY).

After first 17,500 blower • Record 27,500 on the bottom • Service Technician
maintenance completion line and add date 24 months
from blower maintenance
completion date. For example if
the maintenance was completed
on 01/01/2010 (MM/DD/YYYY)
the date recorded on the top line
should be 01/01/2012 (MM/DD/
YYYY).

After second 10000 hours / • Record 35,000 on the bottom • Service Technician
24 months maintenance line and add date 24 months
completion from 10000 hours / 24 months
maintenance completion date.
For example if the maintenance
was completed on 01/01/2010
(MM/DD/YYYY) the date
recorded on the top line should
be 01/01/2012 (MM/DD/YYYY).

After second 17,500 blower • Record 45,000 on the bottom • Service Technician
maintenance completion line and add date 24 months
from blower maintenance
completion date. For example if
the maintenance was completed
on 01/01/2010 (MM/DD/YYYY)
the date recorded on the top line
should be 01/01/2012 (MM/DD/
YYYY).

PAGE 7-2 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 NOTES
NOTE 1: The hours used above may vary based on the return. If the device is returned for blower
maintenance and there were 19,000 blower hours recorded the next maintenance due hours should be
recorded as 29,000.

NOTE 2: After the initial 10000 hours or 24 months Maintenance has been performed, if a device is
returned the second time using the date interval and it has not reached the blower maintenance interval
perform the 10000 hours / 24 months maintenance again and the label should be completed to show the
due date for the Blower Maintenance again.

For example - Service completes the 10000 hours / 24 months Maintenance on 01/01/2010 (MM/DD/
YYYY), they complete the Preventive Maintenance to show 17,500 as the Maintenance due hours and 1/
1/2012 for the Maintenance due date. On 01/01/2012 (MM/DD/YYYY) the device was returned for
Maintenance as the label states and there are only 12,000 hours recorded on the blower. At this point you
may contact the customer to see if they would like the blower maintenance performed early.

If they decide to have the blower maintenance performed complete the maintenance and record 22,000
on the bottom line for the next maintenance due hours and 1/1/2014 on the top line for the next
maintenance due date.

If they decide to not have the blower maintenance performed perform the 10000 hours / 24 months
maintenance and once completed record 17,500 on the bottom line for next maintenance due hours and
1/1/2014 on the top line for the next maintenance due date.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 7-3

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
7.2.1 TRILOGY RECOMMENDED MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

TIME / HOURS OF SERVICE RECOMMENDED MAINTENANCE

Prior to initial use on a patient • Charge Internal and Detachable Batteries to 100%
capacity by plugging ventilator into an AC power source
for up to 8 hours
• Perform System Checkout Procedure per Trilogy Clinical
Manual

Prior to long term storage after initial • Charge both Internal and Detachable batteries to 100%
use capacity prior to storage.

While in storage after initial • Recharge internal and detachable batteries to 100%
connection to AC Power, every 3 capacity by plugging ventilator into an AC power source.
months Batteries should recharge in 8 hours or less.

If in use, every two weeks • Inspect and clean air inlet filter
If in use, every 6 months • Replace air inlet filter
• Inspect enclosures and external connections for damage
and contact Philips Respironics service if necessary
• Inspect power cord for damage and replace if necessary.
Every 10000 hours or 24 Months, • Refer to appropriate section below.
whichever comes first

Every 17,500 hours • Refer to appropriate section below.

PAGE 7-4 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

7.2.2 10000 HOURS OR 24 MONTHS (WHICHEVER COMES FIRST) MAINTENANCE ITEMS

ITEM ACTION
Blower Hours/Date of Maintenance Record the blower hours and maintenance date.

Lithium Ion Battery Cycle Count Limit Check the Cycle Count on the Detachable and Internal
Batteries. Procedure listed below.

The service technician has the ability to access the number of

cycles that both the Detachable and Internal batteries have
gone through. The Internal Battery has the capacity to reach
475 cycles and the Detachable Battery has the capacity to
reach 500 cycles before the battery life is exhausted.
Respironics recommends checking the cycle count of both
batteries during the annual preventive maintenance. By
viewing and recording the cycle count the service technician
will be able to determine if the batteries need to be replaced
based on the number of cycles accumulated since the last
annual preventive maintenance that was performed on the
Trilogy. Below is an example of how the technician may
determine if the batteries need replaced.

Internal Battery Cycle Capacity: 475 cycles

Internal Battery Cycles Used: 125 cycles
Internal Battery Cycles remaining: 350 cycles

Detachable Battery Cycle Capacity: 500 cycles

Detachable Battery Cycles Used: 125 cycles
Detachable Battery Cycles remaining: 375 cycles

This example shows that the Trilogy Internal Battery and

Detachable Battery went through 125 cycles from the last
annual preventive maintenance leaving 375 cycles for the
Detachable Battery and 350 cycles for the Internal Battery. By
using this method, the service technician can assume that the
batteries will have enough cycles remaining until the next
annual preventive maintenance is performed.

Respironics recommends that you replace the Detachable and

Internal batteries when they have logged 400 or greater cycles.

Replace Inlet Filter (RI p/n 1035443) Replace the Inlet Filter.

Outer Enclosure Clean the Outer Enclosure.

SD Card Interface Inspect the Door Hinge and foam. Inspect the Latch/Release
mechanism.

Connectors Verify the integrity of connectors on the rear of the unit,

including the AC cord retainer.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 7-5

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 ITEM ACTION
Porting Blocks Check O-Rings around the porting blocks for cracks, wear, or
incorrect fit. Lubricate or replace the porting block as
necessary.

Detachable Battery (if present) Verify the latch and guide mechanism is intact and functional.
Compare the capacity LEDs on the Detachable Battery Pack to
the Detachable Battery Icon on the User Interface. The Charge
levels should be within 1 level of each other.

Handle Verify the Handle is free of defects. Check O-Rings around the
handle for cracks, wear, or incorrect fit. Lubricate or replace as
necessary.

Rubber Feet Verify that all of the Rubber Feet are present.

Power Cord Inspect the power Cord for any cracks/cuts.

External Tubing Clean or replace all external tubing as necessary.

Cables and Internal Tubing Remove the Bottom Enclosure and verify the integrity of cable
connectors and internal tubing.

Cleaning Remove the Bottom Enclosure and vacuum out the bottom of
the unit using an Anti-static vacuum.

Perform Field Service Application Preform the Field Service Application Post Test Procedure*.
(FSA) Post Test Procedure

* If the unit fails the Calibration Verification Test or Final Test refer to the Troubleshooting Chapter of this
service manual to determine the corrective action that needs taken. Once the corrective action has been
performed run the Calibration Verification and Final Test again.

PAGE 7-6 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

7.2.3 17, 500 BLOWER MAINTENANCE ITEMS

ITEM ACTION
Blower Hours/Date of Maintenance Record the blower hours and maintenance date.

Blower Assembly (RI p/n 1054951) Replace the Blower Assembly with a new Blower Assembly.

Lithium Ion Battery Cycle Count Limit Check the Cycle Count on the Detachable and Internal
Batteries. Procedure listed below.

The service technician has the ability to access the number of

cycles that both the Detachable and Internal batteries have
gone through. The Internal Battery has the capacity to reach
475 cycles and the Detachable Battery has the capacity to
reach 500 cycles before the battery life is exhausted.
Respironics recommends checking the cycle count of both
batteries during the annual preventive maintenance. By
viewing and recording the cycle count the service technician
will be able to determine if the batteries need to be replaced
based on the number of cycles accumulated since the last
annual preventive maintenance that was performed on the
Trilogy. Below is an example of how the technician may
determine if the batteries need replaced.

Internal Battery Cycle Capacity: 475 cycles

Internal Battery Cycles Used: 125 cycles
Internal Battery Cycles remaining: 350 cycles

Detachable Battery Cycle Capacity: 500 cycles

Detachable Battery Cycles Used: 125 cycles
Detachable Battery Cycles remaining: 375 cycles

This example shows that the Trilogy Internal Battery and

Detachable Battery went through 125 cycles from the last
annual preventive maintenance leaving 375 cycles for the
Detachable Battery and 350 cycles for the Internal Battery. By
using this method, the service technician can assume that the
batteries will have enough cycles remaining until the next
annual preventive maintenance is performed.

Respironics recommends that you replace the Detachable

and Internal batteries when they have logged 400 or greater
cycles.

Replace Inlet Filter (RI p/n 1035443) Replace the Inlet Filter.

Outer Enclosure Clean the Outer Enclosure.

SD Card Interface Inspect the Door Hinge and foam. Inspect the Latch/Release
mechanism.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 7-7

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 ITEM ACTION
Connectors Verify the integrity of connectors on the rear of the unit,
including the AC cord retainer.

Porting Blocks Check O-Rings around the porting blocks for cracks, wear, or
incorrect fit. Lubricate or replace the porting block as
necessary.

Detachable Battery (if present) Verify the latch and guide mechanism is intact and functional.
Compare the capacity LEDs on the Detachable Battery Pack
to the Detachable Battery Icon on the User Interface. The
Charge levels should be within 1 level of each other.

Handle Verify the Handle is free of defects. Check O-Rings around

the handle for cracks, wear, or incorrect fit. Lubricate or
replace as necessary.

Rubber Feet Verify that all of the Rubber Feet are present.

Power Cord Inspect the power Cord for any cracks/cuts.

External Tubing Clean or replace all external tubing as necessary.

Cables and Internal Tubing Remove the Bottom Enclosure and verify the integrity of cable
connectors and internal tubing.

Cleaning Remove the Bottom Enclosure and vacuum out the bottom of
the unit using an Anti-static vacuum.

Perform Complete Field Service Once the Blower Assembly has been replaced preform the
(FSA) Application (Pre and Post Field Service Application Pre and Post Test Procedures*.
Test)*

* If the unit fails the Field Service Application Pre and/or Post Test refer to the Troubleshooting section
of this service manual to determine the corrective action that needs taken. Once the corrective action
has been performed run the Calibration Verification and Final Test again.

PAGE 7-8 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

7.3 TRILOGY VENTILATOR MAINTENANCE RECORD

MODEL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER

DATE PURCHASED BLOWER HOURS

BLOWER ASSEMBLY INLET FILTER

(Date Replaced) (Date Replaced)

INTERNAL BATTERY DETACHABLE BATTERY

CYCLE COUNT LIMIT CYCLE COUNT LIMIT
(Cycles Remaining) (Cycles Remaining)

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 7-9

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
7.4 CHECKING THE INTERNAL BATTERY AND DETACHABLE BATTERY CYCLE
COUNTS
1. Double click on the Trilogy Tool Box Icon.

NOTE
If the Trilogy Toolbox software is not downloaded to your computer, refer to the Testing Chapter
of this manual for download instructions.

2. Select Read from the Menu Bar.

3. Select either Detach.Batt info (Detachable Battery) or Inter.Batt info (Internal battery) depending
on which battery you would like to read the cycle counts for.
4. Once selected the battery information will display in the Log window. The screen abbreviations are
as follows:
• Capacity – Battery capacity displayed as a percentage.
• V – Battery Voltage displayed in millivolts.
• I – Battery Current displayed in miliamps
• T – Battery Temperature displayed in Celsius.
• SH – State of Health displayed as a percentage.
• CC – Battery Cycle Count displayed as a number between 0 and 500.
• CF – Condition Flag displayed as a 1 or 0.
• ME – Max Error displayed as a percentage.
• S/N – Battery Serial Number displayed as a number.
• SM – Ship Mode displays either Standby or Success.

PAGE 7-10 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

7.5 INTERNAL BATTERY CONDITIONING PROCEDURE
Respironics recommends replacement of the Internal Battery when the battery reaches 400 or more cycles. If
the Internal Battery is not replaced and the Cycle Count is greater than 400 or the Max Error is greater than
25% then the following procedure must be performed to ensure it is still functioning properly.
1. Remove the Detachable Battery.
2. Set the device to the following therapy settings:
• T mode
• IPAP = 34 pressure units
• EPAP = 4 pressure units
• BPM = 10
• Rise Time = 1
• Inspiratory Time = 1 second
3. Connect AC, turn on Ventilator and charge battery to 100% capacity. Battery is fully charged when
the Lightning bolt charge indicator is not displayed.
4. Disconnect AC and allow battery to discharge until Ventilator turns off.
5. Allow battery to rest for a minimum of 5.5 hours. Do not connect AC power and do not attempt to
turn the Ventilator on.
6. Connect AC power and allow the Internal Battery to charge to 100%. Battery is fully charged when
the Lightning bolt charge indicator is not displayed.
7. Allow battery to rest for minimum 2.5 hours. Do not disconnect AC power during this time.
8. Open the Trilogy Toolbox software and read the Internal Battery State of Health and MaxError
using the Tool Box. Refer to Section 7.4 for more instructions.

NOTE
If the Trilogy Toolbox software is not downloaded to your computer, proceed to the Testing
Chapter of this manual for download instructions.

9. The Internal Battery must have a State of Health > 60% and MaxError =1%. If the Internal Battery
does not meet the pass criteria it must be replaced.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 7-11

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
7.6 CLEANING AND DISINFECTION PROCEDURES
7.6.1 CLEANING THE VENTILATOR
The ventilator’s exterior surface and the exterior of the detachable battery pack (if using) should be cleaned
before and after each patient use, and more often if needed.

WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, always unplug the power cord from the wall outlet or
external battery before cleaning.

CAUTION

• Do not immerse the device in liquid or allow any liquid to enter the enclosure, inlet
filter, or any opening. This may result in equipment damage.
• Do not use harsh detergents, abrasive cleaners, or brushes to clean the ventilator
system. Use only the cleaning agents and methods described below.

1. Unplug the device and clean the front panel and exterior of the enclosure as needed using a clean
cloth dampened with any of the following cleaning agents:
• Water
• Soapy water or a mild detergent
• Hydrogen Peroxide (3%)
• Isopropyl Alcohol (91%)
• 10% bleach solution (10% bleach, 90% water)
2. Do not allow any liquid to drip into the ventilator case or detachable battery pack. After cleaning,
use a soft, dry cloth to remove any residual cleaner. Use extra care when cleaning the display.
Abrasive cleaners can scratch the display.
3. Allow the device to dry completely before plugging in the power cord.

PAGE 7-12 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

7.6.2 CLEANING AND REPLACING THE AIR INLET FILTER

CAUTION

• Operating the device with a dirty filter may prevent the system from working properly and may
damage the device.
• A dirty inlet filter may cause high operating temperatures that may affect device performance.
Examine the inlet filter for integrity and cleanliness before each use. When the filter becomes dirty, it
must be replaced to ensure normal device operation.

Under normal usage, you should clean the grey foam filter at least once every two weeks and replace it with a
new filter every six months or sooner if needed.
1. If the device is operating, stop the airflow by pressing the On/Off button. Disconnect the device
from the power source.
2. Remove the filter from the enclosure by gently squeezing the filter in the center and pulling it away
from the device.
3. Examine the filter for cleanliness and integrity.
4. Wash the gray foam filter in warm water with a mild detergent. Rinse thoroughly to remove all
detergent residue. Allow the filter to air dry completely before reinstalling it. If the foam filter is torn
or damaged, replace it. (Only Respironics-supplied filters should be used as replacement filters.)

CAUTION
Never install a wet filter into the device. It is recommended that you clean the filter in the morning and
alternate using the two foam filters provided with the system to ensure sufficient drying time for the
cleaned filter.

5. Reinstall the filter.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 7-13

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 This page intentionally left blank.

PAGE 7-14 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

CHAPTER 8: REPAIR & REPLACEMENT
8.0 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter illustrates the replaceable components for the Trilogy Ventilators. Procedures for replacing the
components are also provided in this chapter.

NOTE
Refer to the Testing Section for required testing after component
replacement.

NOTE
Refer to the Repair Kits Section for proper repair kit identification.

WARNING

• To prevent electrical shock, disconnect the electrical supply before attempting to make
any repairs to the Trilogy Ventilators.

CAUTION

• Electronic components used in this device are subject to damage from static electricity.
Repairs made to this device must be performed only in an antistatic, ESD-protected
environment.
• During all repair and replacement procedures, ensure that any connections that are
broken during the process (fittings, tubing, and hoses) are reconnected securely.
• When using a leak detector, be careful that it does not come in contact with any
electrical components.
• Using the Trilogy Toolbox Application, place the unit in "Ship Mode" prior to any
disassembly of the unit. Otherwise, ensure that the Internal Battery connection is the
first to be disconnected and reconnected during re-assembly.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-1

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
8.1 EXTERNAL COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
8.1.1 DETACHABLE BATTERY PACK REPLACEMENT

Handle

FIGURE 8-1: DETACHABLE BATTERY PACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

Removal
1. Lift the black handle and remove the Detachable Battery Pack from the ventilator using the pull
tab.
Installation
1. With the pull tab on the Detachable Battery Pack oriented at the top, place the black tab into the
slot located on the bottom of the Detachable Battery compartment and push the detachable bat-
tery pack into place.

PAGE 8-2 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

8.1.2 INLET FILTER REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Grasp the Inlet Filter and remove it from the Inlet Air Path Assembly (Trilogy 100 & Trilogy 200) or
from the Oxygen Blending Module (Trilogy O2/Trilogy 202).
Installation
1. Place the Inlet Filter into the slot on the Inlet Air Path Assembly (Trilogy 100 & Trilogy 200) or the
slot on the Oxygen Blending Module (Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202).

8.1.3 INLET AIR PATH ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT (TRILOGY 100 & TRILOGY 200 ONLY)
Removal
1. Remove the four screws securing the Inlet Air Path Assembly to the ventilator.

FIGURE 8-2: AIR PATH ASSEMBLY SCREW LOCATIONS

2. Pull the Inlet Air Path Assembly up and away from the ventilator.
Installation
1. Place the Inlet Air Path Assembly into place on the ventilator.
2. Ensure the Air Path Foam is properly in place (Gray (foam) side down).
3. Secure the Inlet Air Path Assembly to the ventilator, tightening the four screws to 8 in-lbs.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-3

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
8.1.4 OXYGEN BLENDING MODULE REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Remove the four screws securing the Inlet Air Path Assembly to the ventilator.
2. Remove the Oxygen Blending Module tube from the port on the Rear Enclosure.
3. Remove the four pin connector from the slot on the Rear Enclosure.
4. Remove the Grommet from the hole in the Rear Enclosure.
5. Remove the Oxygen Blending Module from the Rear Enclosure.
Installation
1. Connect the four pin connector to the slot on the Rear Enclosure, and seat grommet into opening,
verifying no wires are pinched.
2. Connect the Oxygen Blending Module tube to the port on the Rear Enclosure, verifying the tube is
routed over top of the green tube.
3. Seat the Oxygen Blending Module onto the Rear Enclosure.
4. Secure the Oxygen Blending Module to the Rear Enclosure with four screws, tightening to 8 in-lbs.

FIGURE 8-3: OXYGEN BLENDING MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

PAGE 8-4 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

8.1.5 AIR PATH FOAM REPLACEMENT

FIGURE 8-4: AIR PATH FOAM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

Removal
1. Remove the Inlet Air Path Assembly or Oxygen Blending Module. Refer to the Inlet Air Path
Assembly Section or Oxygen Module Assembly Section for more details.
2. Remove the Air Path Foam from the ventilator.
Installation
1. Place the Air Path Foam into the ventilator. Ensure that the grey (foam) side is facing down.
2. Install the Inlet Air Path Assembly or Oxygen Blending Module. Refer to the Inlet Air Path Assem-
bly Section or Oxygen Module Assembly Section for more details.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-5

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
8.1.6 ACTIVE/PASSIVE PORTING BLOCK REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Remove the screw securing the Active/Passive Porting Block to the ventilator.

2. Lift the Active/Passive Porting Block straight up away from the ventilator.
Installation
1. Push the Active/Passive Porting Block into place.
2. Secure the Active/Passive Porting Block to the ventilator using one screw.

8.1.7 HANDLE REPLACEMENT

Removal
1. Remove the two 1/8” Hex screws securing the handle to the ventilator.

FIGURE 8-5: SCREW REMOVAL (REPEAT FOR OTHER SIDE)

2. Remove the Handle from the Ventilator.

3. Remove the two handle o-rings from the ventilator.
Installation
1. Insert the two handle o-rings in the ventilator.
2. Secure the handle to the ventilator by tightening the two 1/8” Hex screws to 8 in-lbs.

PAGE 8-6 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

8.2 FRONT/REAR/BOTTOM ENCLOSURE REMOVAL

CAUTION
Circuitry is powered if the Internal battery is connected.

1. Remove the Detachable Battery Pack. Refer to the Detachable Battery Pack Replacement Sec-
tion for more details.
2. Remove the Inlet Air Path Assembly or Oxygen Blending Module. Refer to the Inlet Air Path
Assembly Section or Oxygen Blending Module Section for more details.
3. Remove the Air Path Foam. Refer to the Oxygen Blending Module Replacement Section for more
details.
4. Remove the Active/Passive Porting Block. Refer to the Install the Inlet Air Path Assembly or Oxy-
gen Blending Module. Refer to the Inlet Air Path Assembly Section or Oxygen Module Assembly
Section for more details. Section for more details.
5. Remove the Handle. Refer to the Handle Replacement Section for more details.
6. Lay the Trilogy on its top to expose the Bottom Enclosure.
7. Remove the four screws securing the Bottom Enclosure to the Trilogy.

FIGURE 8-6: BOTTOM ENCLOSURE SCREW LOCATIONS

8. With the LCD facing you lift up the Bottom Enclosure and remove the Alarm connections from
Speaker 1 and Speaker 2 on the Front Panel Board.
9. Lay the ventilator LCD side down on a protected surface.
10. Remove the Internal Battery Cable from J2 on the Power Management Board.
11. Remove the DC Battery Cable from J4 on the Power Management Board.
12. Remove the oxygen tube from the Exhalation Control Module.
13. Remove the Ethernet Cable from J19 on the System Board.
14. Remove the Interface Cable from J7 on the System Board.
15. Remove the AC Connector from J1 on the Power Supply Board.
16. Remove the Battery Fan from J18 on the System Board.
17. Remove the Capacitor wires from J6 on the System Board.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-7

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 18. Slide the Bottom Enclosure away from the Front and Rear Enclosures. Proceed to the Bottom
Enclosure Assembly Component Removal/Installation section for instructions on how to remove/
install the Bottom Enclosure Assembly components.
19. Remove the four screws securing the Front and Rear Enclosures together.

20. While holding the enclosures together place the Trilogy on its top so the opening is facing up.
21. Gently slide the Front and Rear Enclosures apart.
22. Remove the Sensor Cable from J4 on the Sensor Board.
23. Remove the Blower Cable from J5 on the System Board.
24. Remove the Blower Fan Cable from J17 on the System Board.
25. Remove the tape securing the Exhalation Control wires to the metal support.
26. Remove the Exhalation Control Module wires from J10 on the System Board.
27. Remove the Exhaust Fan wires from J1 on the System Board.
28. Remove the Detachable Battery Cable from J1 and J3 on the Power Management Board.
29. Cut the two tie wraps securing the Blower wires to the plastic support bracket.
30. Slide the Front and Rear Enclosures Apart.
31. Remove the Top Plate from the device.
32. The Front and Rear Enclosure are now disconnected. Proceed to the Front or Rear Enclosure
Assembly Component Removal/Installation sections for instructions on how to remove/install the
Assembly components. Also, Refer to the Oxygen Blending Module Components Section for
instructions on how to remove/install the Oxygen Blending Module components.

PAGE 8-8 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

8.2.1 TOP PLATE REMOVAL
Removal
1. Disconnect the Front, Rear, and Bottom Assemblies. Refer to the Front/Rear/Bottom Enclosure
Removal Section for more details.
2. Slide the Top Plate out of the groves in the top of the Front or Rear Assemblies.

Grooves

Installation
1. Slide the Top Plate into the groves in the top of the Front or Rear Assemblies.
2. Install the Front, Rear, and Bottom Assemblies. Refer to the Front/Rear/Bottom Enclosure Instal-
lation Section for more details.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-9

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 8.3 BOTTOM ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
COMPONENT NAME CONTAINED IN
1. Battery Fan Cover 1045171
2. Battery Fan 1045180
3. Capacitor 1045302
4. Internal Battery 1055806 / 1055957
5. Interface PCA 1045297
6. Speaker 1045311
7. Speaker Hold-Down 1045301
8. Base Enclosure Assembly 1045295 / 1061268 / 1061269
1070256
9. Oxygen Connector 1045298
10. DC Power Connector 1045300 1
11. AC Power Connector 1045299

7
8

9
10
11

FIGURE 8-7: BOTTOM ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY

PAGE 8-10 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

8.3.1 AC POWER CONNECTOR REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Using a small phillips screwdriver and a 1/9” wrench, remove the two screws securing the AC Con-
nector to the Bottom Enclosure.

FIGURE 8-8: SCREW LOCATIONS

2. Remove the AC Power Connector from the Bottom Enclosure.

Installation
1. Slide the AC Power Connector into the proper slot in the Bottom Enclosure.
2. Using a 4 in-lbs torque wrench and a 1/9” wrench, secure the AC Connector to the Bottom Enclo-
sure.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-11

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
8.3.2 DC POWER CONNECTOR REPLACEMENT

FIGURE 8-9: DC POWER CONNECTOR

Removal
1. Using a 3/4” wrench, remove the nut securing the DC Connector to the Bottom Enclosure.
2. Remove the DC Connector from the Bottom Enclosure.
Installation
1. Place the DC Connector into its slot in the Bottom Enclosure.
2. Using a 3/4” wrench, connect the DC Connector to the Bottom Enclosure by tightening the nut to 7
in-lbs.

PAGE 8-12 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

8.3.3 OXYGEN OUTLET REPLACEMENT

Removal
1. Using a 5/8” wrench, remove the nut securing the Oxygen Outlet to the Bottom Enclosure.
2. Remove Oxygen Outlet and tubing from the Bottom Enclosure.
Installation
1. Place the Oxygen Outlet into its slot in the Bottom Enclosure.
2. Connect the tubing to the Oxygen Outlet as shown below.
3. Using a 5/8” wrench, connect the Oxygen Outlet to the Bottom Enclosure by tightening the nut to 7
in-lbs.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-13

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
8.3.4 SPEAKER REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Remove the two screws securing the Hold-Down and two cord clips to the Bottom Enclosure.
2. Remove the Speakers from the device.
Installation
1. Place the Speaker in the Bottom Enclosure.
2. Place the Hold-Down into its position in the Bottom Enclosure.
3. With the Bottom Enclosure positioned with the AC Inlet on the right, place the cord clips in their
proper position (the 5/16” cord clip should be positioned on the right and the larger cord clip on the
left).

4. Ensure the Interface Cable is properly routed through the cord clips.
5. Secure the cord clips and hold-down to the Bottom Enclosure by tightening the two screws to 8 in-
lbs.

PAGE 8-14 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 5

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-15

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
8.3.5 INTERNAL BATTERY FAN REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Unscrew the Battery Fan Cover from the Battery Fan.

FIGURE 8-10: BATTERY FAN COVER

2. Cut the Tie warp securing the Fan wires to the Capacitor/Internal Battery Fan Retainer.
3. Release the locking tabs securing the Internal Battery Fan to the Capacitor/Internal Battery
Retainer.

FIGURE 8-11: INTERNAL BATTERY FAN LOCKING TABS (BATTERY SHOWN WITHOUT BATTERY FAN COVER)

4. Remove the Internal Battery Fan from the Capacitor/Internal Battery Fan Retainer.
Installation
1. Align the holes in the Internal Battery Fan with the pins on the Retainer.
2. Push the Internal Battery Fan down until it locks in place.

PAGE 8-16 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 3. Using a tie wrap secure the Fan wires to the Capacitor/Internal Battery Fan Retainer. The wires
are to be secured to the front of the Capacitor/Battery Retainer with the wire tie in the orientation
below. The wires must be loose and not pinched by the wire tie.

FIGURE 8-12: PROPER ROUTING OF FAN AND CAPACITOR WIRES

4. Secure the Battery Fan Cover to the Battery Fan by tightening it to 4 in-lbs.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-17

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
8.3.6 CAPACITOR/INTERNAL BATTERY REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Remove the three screws securing the Capacitor/Internal Battery Retainer to the Bottom Enclo-
sure.

FIGURE 8-13: CAPACITOR/INTERNAL BATTERY FAN RETAINER SCREWS

2. Cut the two tie wraps securing wires to the Capacitor/Internal Battery Retainer.
3. Remove the Capacitor and/or Internal Battery.
Installation
1. Place the Capacitor into its slot in the Bottom Enclosure.
2. Route the Internal Battery cable through the slot in the Internal Battery/Capacitor retainer.

FIGURE 8-14: PROPER CABLE ROUTING

3. Secure the Capacitor and/or Internal Battery to the Bottom Enclosure using the Capacitor/Battery
Retainer. Tighten the three screws to 8 in-lbs.
4. Using a tie wrap, secure the Capacitor wires to the Capacitor/Internal Battery Retainer.

PAGE 8-18 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 6

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-19

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
8.3.7 INTERFACE PCA REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Remove the Internal Battery/Capacitor Retainer.
2. Remove the Interface to System Board Cable from J4 on the Interface PCA.
3. Remove the Ethernet to System Board Cable from J5 on the Interface PCA.

FIGURE 8-15: ETHERNET TO SYSTEM BOARD CABLE CONNECTION

4. Remove the four screws securing the Interface PCA to the Interface Board Retainer.

FIGURE 8-16: INTERFACE PCA SCREW LOCATIONS

Installation
1. Secure the Interface PCA to the Bottom Enclosure by tightening the screws to 8 in-lbs.
2. Connect the Ethernet to System Board Cable to J5 on the Interface PCA.

PAGE 8-20 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 3. Connect the Interface to System Board Cable from J4 on the Interface PCA.
4. Connect the Interface PCA to the Interface PCA Retainer.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-21

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
PAGE 8-22 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

8.3.8 INTERFACE PCA RETAINER REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Remove to the Interface PCA. Refer to the Interface PCA Replacement section for more detailed
instructions.
2. Remove the two screws securing the Interface PCA Retainer to the Bottom Enclosure.

FIGURE 8-17: INTERFACE PCA RETAINER SCREW LOCATIONS

Installation
1. Place the Interface PCA Retainer into the Bottom Enclosure.
2. Secure the Interface Board Retainer to the Bottom Enclosure by tightening the screws to 8 in-lbs.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-23

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
8.3.9 BOTTOM ENCLOSURE REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Remove the AC Power Connector. Refer to the Interface PCA Retainer Replacement Section for
more details.
2. Remove the DC Power Connector. Refer to the DC Power Connector Replacement Section for
more details.
3. Remove the Oxygen Outlet. Refer to the Oxygen Outlet Replacement Section for more details.
4. Remove the Sonalert. Refer to the Speaker Replacement Section for more details.
5. Remove the Internal Battery Fan. Refer to the Internal Battery Fan Replacement Section for more
details.
6. Remove the Capacitor and Internal Battery. Refer to the Capacitor/Internal Battery Replacement
Section for more details.
7. Remove the Interface PCA. Refer to the Interface PCA Replacement Section for more details.
8. Remove the Interface PCA retainer. Refer to the Interface PCA Retainer Replacement Section for
more details.
Installation
1. Install the Interface PCA retainer. Refer to the Interface PCA Retainer Replacement Section for
more details.
2. Install the Interface PCA. Refer to the Interface PCA Replacement Section for more details.
3. Install the Capacitor and Internal Battery. Refer to the Capacitor/Internal Battery Replacement
Section for more details.
4. Install the Internal Battery Fan. Refer to the Internal Battery Fan Replacement Section for more
details.
5. Install the Sonalert. Refer to the Speaker Replacement Section for more details.
6. Install the Oxygen Outlet. Refer to the Oxygen Outlet Replacement Section for more details.
7. Install the DC Power Connector. Refer to the DC Power Connector Replacement Section for more
details.
8. Install the AC Power Connector. Refer to the Interface PCA Retainer Replacement Section for
more details.
9. Print a generic Serial/Model Number label. The label must be in accordance with the following
specifications: Label Size = 1-1/8” x 2” (maximum size), Font Size = 10 point (minimum)

IMPORTANT!
The new label MUST include the same Model Number, and Serial
Number as those of which are on the original label.

10. Affix the new label to the Bottom Enclosure in the same location as the original label. Affix the
clear overlay (RI p/n 221013) over the printed label. Two clear overlays are provided with the Bot-
tom Enclosure RP Kit.
11. Affix the Warning label in the same location as the original Warning Label.

PAGE 8-24 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

8.4 FRONT ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
COMPONENT NAME CONTAINED IN
1. Front Enclosure 1045182 / 1070252
2. KeyPad 1045183
3. Inverter PCA 1045163
4. LCD Screen 1045184
5. LCD Cable Ferrite 1045164 &
1045195
6. LCD Cable 1045225
7. Front Panel/Keypad LED PCA 1045200
8. System PCA Support 1045195
13 9. PCB Module Plate “A” 1045197
11 9 10. System PCA w/Daughter Board 1045199
11. Power Management PCA 1045201
12. PCB Module Plate “B” 1045198
13. Power Management PCA Support 1045196

3 1
5

12
8 2
10
6
4

FIGURE 8-18: FRONT ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-25

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
8.4.1 KEYPAD/FRONT ENCLOSURE REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Remove the four screws securing the metal brackets to the front case. Three of the four screws
are located between the metal bracket and the Front Enclosure.

FIGURE 8-19: METAL BRACKET SUPPORT SCREW LOCATIONS

2. Remove the assembly secured by the metal brackets out of the Front Enclosure to expose the
Keypad.
3. Remove the Keypad.

FIGURE 8-20: KEYPAD REMOVAL

FIGURE 8-21: FRONT ENCLOSURE WITH KEYPAD REMOVED

PAGE 8-26 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Installation
1. Install the Keypad into the Front Enclosure.
2. Place the assembly secured with the metal brackets into the Front Enclosure.
3. Secure the Metal Brackets to the Front Enclosure by tightening the screw to 8 in-lbs.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-27

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
8.4.2 FRONT PANEL PCA REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Remove the 4 screws connecting the Front Panel PCA to the Power Management Board Support.

FIGURE 8-22: MOUNTING SCREW LOCATIONS

2. Remove the Front Panel PCA from the Assembly.

FIGURE 8-23: FRONT PANEL PCA REMOVAL

Installation
1. Place the Front Panel PCA on the Power Management Board Support.
2. Secure the Front Panel PCA to the Power Management Board Support by tightening the screws to
8 in-lbs. The two long screws go on the bottom and the two short screws go on the top.

PAGE 8-28 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

8.4.3 PCA INVERTER REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Remove the connection from location J20 on the Power Management Board.

FIGURE 8-24: LOCATION J20 ON THE POWER MANAGEMENT PCA

2. Remove the LCD connection from location J2 on the PCA Inverter.

FIGURE 8-25: LOCATION J2 ON THE PCA INVERTER & SCREW LOCATIONS

3. Remove the two screws securing the PCA Inverter to the Power Management Board Support.
Refer to Figure 8-25.
Installation
1. Secure the PCA Inverter to the Power Management Board Support by tightening the screws to 6
in-lbs.
2. Connect the LCD Cable to J2 on the PCA Inverter.
3. Connect the PCA Inverter to J20 on the Power Management Board.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-29

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
8.4.4 METAL SUPPORT BRACKET REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Remove the Front Panel PCA. Refer to the Front Panel PCA Replacement Section for more
details.
2. Remove the PCA Inverter. Refer to the PCA Inverter Replacement Section for more details.
3. Remove the one remaining screw connecting the Power Management PCB Support to the Metal
Bracket.

FIGURE 8-26: REMAINING SCREW

4. On a scratch proof surface, carefully turn the assembly over (LCD facing down).
5. Remove the 3 screws securing the PCB Supports to the side of the Metal Support Brackets.

FIGURE 8-27: SCREWS SECURING THE METAL BRACKETS TO THE PCB SUPPORTS

Installation
1. Secure the PCB Supports to the side walls of the Metal Support Brackets by tightening the screws
to 8 in-lbs.
2. Secure the Power Management PCB Support to the Metal Bracket.
3. Install the PCA Inverter. Refer to the PCA Inverter Replacement Section for more details.
4. Install the Front Panel PCA. Refer to the Front Panel PCA Replacement Section for more details.

PAGE 8-30 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

8.4.5 POWER MANAGEMENT PCA REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Remove the Keypad/Front Enclosure. Refer to the Keypad/Front Enclosure Replacement Section
for more details.
2. Remove the Front Panel PCA. Refer to the Front Panel PCA Replacement Section for more
details.
3. Remove the PCA Inverter. Refer to the PCA Inverter Replacement Section for more details.
4. Remove the Metal Support Brackets. Refer to the Metal Support Bracket Replacement Section for
more details.
5. Remove the four screws securing the Power Management PCA support to the System PCA Sup-
port.

FIGURE 8-28: SCREW LOCATIONS

6. Depress the locking tab on the plastic standoff and firmly lift the Power Management PCA straight
up and away from the System PCA.

FIGURE 8-29: LOCKING TAB

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-31

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 7. Remove the four screws securing the Power Management PCA Support to the Power Manage-
ment PCA.

FIGURE 8-30: PCB SUPPORT SCREWS

Installation
1. Secure the Power Management PCA to the Power Management PCA Support by tightening the
screws to 8 in-lbs.
2. Align the locking tab with the slot in the Power Management PCA. While firmly pressing down
secure the Power Management PCA to the System PCA
3. Using the four screws, secure the Power Management PCA support to the System PCA support
by tightening the screws to 12 in-lbs.
4. Install the Metal Support Brackets. Refer to the Metal Support Bracket Replacement Section for
more details.
5. Install the PCA Inverter. Refer to the PCA Inverter Replacement Section for more details.
6. Install the Front Panel PCA. Refer to the Front Panel PCA Replacement Section for more details.
7. Install the Keypad/Front Enclosure. Refer to the Keypad/Front Enclosure Replacement Section for
more details.

PAGE 8-32 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

8.4.6 SYSTEM PCA REPLACEMENT

IMPORTANT
After the System PCA has been replaced you must go to http://my.respironics.com to download the
latest firmware to the Trilogy 100 Device. Follow the Operating Software Updates procedure located in
the Testing Chapter of this Service Manual to complete the firmware installation. Once the latest
firmware has been loaded to the device proceed to the Trilogy 100 Field Service Application for Final
Testing of the device. If the firmware is not loaded the device will not operate or pass the Field Service
Application Testing.

Removal
1. Remove the Keypad/Front Enclosure. Refer to the Keypad/Front Enclosure Replacement Section
for more details.
2. Remove the Front Panel PCA. Refer to Front Panel PCA Replacement Section for more details.
3. Remove the PCA Inverter.
4. Remove the Metal Support Brackets. Refer to Metal Support Bracket Replacement Section for
more details.
5. Remove the Power Management PCA. Refer to the Power Management PCA Replacement Sec-
tion for more details.
6. Lift up the brown tab and remove the LCD Cable from location J3 on the System PCA.

FIGURE 8-31: LCD CABLE AT LOCATION J3

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-33

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 7. Remove the two screws securing the System PCA to the System PCA Support.

FIGURE 8-32: SCREW LOCATIONS

8. Remove the System PCA to Sensor PCA Cable from location J4 on the System PCA.
Installation
1. Connect the System PCA to Sensor PCA Cable to J4 on the System PCA.
2. Secure the Sensor PCA to the System PCA Support by tightening the screws to 8 in-lbs.
3. Connect the LCD Cable to J3 on the System PCA.
4. Install the Power Management PCA. Refer to the Power Management PCA Replacement Section
for more details.
5. Install the Metal Support Brackets. Refer to the Metal Support Bracket Replacement Section for
more details.
6. Install the PCA Inverter. Refer to the PCA Inverter Replacement Section for more details.
7. Install the Front Panel PCA. Refer to the Front Panel PCA Replacement Section for more details.
8. Install the Keypad/Front Enclosure. Refer to the Keypad/Front Enclosure Replacement Section for
more details.

PAGE 8-34 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

8.4.7 LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD) REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Remove the Keypad/Front Enclosure. Refer to the Keypad/Front Enclosure Replacement Section
for more details.
2. Remove Front Panel PCA. Refer to the Front Panel PCA Replacement Section for more details.
3. Remove the PCA Inverter. Refer to the PCA Inverter Replacement Section for more details.
4. Remove the Metal Support Brackets. Refer to the Metal Support Bracket Replacement Section for
more details.
5. Remove the Power Management PCA. Refer to the Power Management PCA Replacement Sec-
tion for more details.
6. Remove the System PCA. Refer to the System PCA Replacement Section for more details.
7. Lift up the brown locking tab, slide the cable through the ferrite, and remove LCD Cable from LCD.

FIGURE 8-33: LCD CABLE

FIGURE 8-34: LCD CABLE REMOVED

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-35

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 8. Remove the three screws securing the LCD to the System Board Support.

FIGURE 8-35: SCREW LOCATIONS

Installation
1. Slide the LCD Cable through the Ferrite and connect it to LCD.
2. Secure the LCD to the System Board Support by tightening the screws to 6 in-lbs.
3. Install the System PCA. Refer to the System PCA Replacement Section for more details.
4. Install the Power Management PCA. Refer to the Power Management PCA Replacement Section
for more details.
5. Install the Metal Support Brackets. Refer to the Metal Support Bracket Replacement Section for
more details.
6. Install the PCA Inverter. Refer to the PCA Inverter Replacement Section for more details.
7. Install the Front Panel PCA. Refer to the Front Panel PCA Replacement Section for more details.
8. Install the Keypad/Front Enclosure. Refer to the Keypad/Front Enclosure Replacement Section for
more details.

PAGE 8-36 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

8.5 REAR ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY COMPONENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
COMPONENT NAME CONTAINED IN
1. Top Plate 1045586
2. Bellows Clip 1045307
3. Sensor PCA Assembly 1045152 / 1070248
4. Rear Enclosure 1045149
5. Detachable Battery Connector Assembly 1045166
6. Exhaust Fan 1045178
7. Vent Exhaust Outlet Air Path Assembly 1045178
8. Detachable Battery Retainer 1045167
9. Flow Sensor Assembly 1045150 / 1070249 1
10. Transition Tube 1045154 2
11. Porting Block Adaptor 1045174
12. Power Supply PCA 1045151 3
13. Transition Tube Locator 1045165
14. Motor Blower Assembly 1054951
15. Active Exhalation Control Module 1045153
16. Active Exhalation Control Module O-rings 1045153 4
6
14
7
13

15

16 12 11
10
9

FIGURE 8-36: REAR ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-37

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
8.5.1 DETACHABLE BATTERY CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Remove the connection from J2 located on the Trilogy Power Supply Board.
2. Remove the three screws connecting the Detachable Battery Connector Assembly to the Rear
Enclosure.

FIGURE 8-37: DETACHABLE BATTERY CONNECTOR SCREW LOCATIONS

3. Separate the Retainer from the Detachable Battery Assembly.

FIGURE 8-38: SEPARATING THE DETACHABLE BATTERY ASSEMBLY FROM THE RETAINER

Installation
1. Slide the Detachable Battery Connector Assembly into the Retainer.
2. Secure the Detachable Battery Connector Assembly to the Rear Enclosure by tightening the
screws to 8 in-lbs.
3. Connect the two-prong connector to location J2 on the Trilogy Power Supply Board.

PAGE 8-38 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

8.5.2 STIRRING FAN/STIRRING FAN RETAINER REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Lift the center tab straight up to release the adhesive on the back of the tab from the Motor Blower
Assembly.
2. Pull the Stirring Fan Retainer away from the Motor Blower Assembly.

FIGURE 8-39: STIRRING FAN RETAINER REMOVAL

3. Push the tabs on Stirring Fan Retainer out to remove the Stirring Fan from the Retainer.
Installation
1. Remove the adhesive backing from the Stirring Fan Retainer.
2. Clip the Stirring Fan Retainer onto the Motor Blower Assembly.
3. Place the Stirring Fan into the Stirring Fan Retainer.

NOTE
Verify that the Fan label is toward the Motor.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-39

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
8.5.3 ACTIVE EXHALATION MODULE REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Remove the tubing from the Exhalation Module ports.

To Oxygen Outlet Connector

FIGURE 8-40: TUBING CONNECTIONS AND SCREW LOCATIONS

2. Remove the four screws securing the Active Exhalation Module to the Rear Enclosure.

PAGE 8-40 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Installation
1. Ensure the two O-rings are properly in place on the Active Exhalation Module.

FIGURE 8-41: REMOVAL/INSTALLATION OF ACTIVE EXHALATION MODULE

2. Connect the Active Exhalation Module to the Rear Enclosure by tightening the four screws to 6 in-
lbs.
3. Connect the tubing to the Active Exhalation Module ports.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-41

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
8.5.4 MOTOR BLOWER ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Remove the three screws securing the Isolation Assembly to the Rear Enclosure.

FIGURE 8-42: SCREW LOCATION

2. Slightly lift the entire Motor Blower Assembly up and out of the Rear Enclosure.
3. Disconnect the Transition Tube from the Flow Element Assembly.
Installation
1. Connect the Transition Tube to the Flow Element Assembly. Refer to Figure 8-43 for more
detailed instructions.
2. Place the Assembly into the Rear Enclosure.
3. Secure the Assembly to the Rear Enclosure by tightening the screws to 8 in-bs.
4. Once the Motor Blower Assembly is secured, turn the enclosure over and wrap the Bellow around
the Blower until it seals.

PAGE 8-42 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

8.5.5 TRANSITION TUBE REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Remove the Motor Blower Assembly. Refer to the Motor Blower Assembly Replacement Section
for more details.
2. Remove the Transition Tube from the Flow Sensor Assembly.

FIGURE 8-43: DISCONNECTING/INSTALLING THE TRANSITION TUBE FROM FLOW SENSOR ASSEMBLY

Installation
1. Connect the small end of the Transition Tube to the Motor Blower Assembly. Verify proper align-
ment of the Transition Tube.
2. Connect the large end of the Transition Tube around the end of the Flow Sensor Assembly. Verify
proper alignment of the Transition Tube.
3. Seat the Transition Tube disk into the Locator.
4. Install the Motor Blower Assembly. Refer to the Motor Blower Assembly Replacement Section for
more details.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-43

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
8.5.6 TRILOGY 100 FLOW SENSOR ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Remove the all of the tubing, including the Transition Tube, from the Flow Sensor Assembly.
2. Remove the two screws securing the Flow Sensor Assembly to the Rear Enclosure.

FIGURE 8-44: SCREW LOCATION

3. Remove the Outlet Flow Path Thermistor and Temperature Sensor Caps from the Flow Sensor
Assembly.
4. Pull the Flow Sensor Assembly from the Rear Enclosure.

PAGE 8-44 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Installation
1. Ensure the two porting block caps are installed on the Flow Sensor Assembly.

FIGURE 8-45: PORTING BLOCK CAP INSTALLATION

2. Place the Flow Sensor Assembly into the correct location in the Rear Enclosure.

FIGURE 8-46: FLOW SENSOR ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-45

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 3. Place the Temperature Sensor Cap and Outlet Flow Path Thermistor into the proper location in the
Flow Sensor Assembly.

FIGURE 8-47: SENSOR CAP INSTALLATION

4. Secure the Flow Sensor Assembly to the Rear Enclosure by tightening the screws to 8 in-lbs.

PAGE 8-46 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 5. Install all of the tubing back to the proper location. Refer to the drawings below.

FIGURE 8-48: PROPER TUBING CONNECTIONS 1

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-47

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 FIGURE 8-49: PROPER TUBING CONNECTIONS 2

PAGE 8-48 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 FIGURE 8-50: PROPER TUBING CONNECTIONS 3

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-49

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 FIGURE 8-51: PROPER TUBING CONNECTIONS 4

PAGE 8-50 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

8.5.7 TRILOGY 200, TRILOGY O2, & TRILOGY 202 FLOW SENSOR ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Remove the all of the tubing, including the Transition Tube, from the Flow Sensor Assembly.
2. Remove the two screws securing the Flow Sensor Assembly to the Rear Enclosure.

FIGURE 8-52: SCREW LOCATION

3. Remove the Outlet Flow Path Thermistor and Temperature Sensor Cap from the Flow Sensor
Assembly.
4. Pull the Flow Sensor Assembly from the Rear Enclosure.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-51

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Installation
1. Ensure the two porting block caps are installed on the Flow Sensor Assembly.

FIGURE 8-53; PORTING BLOCK CAP INSTALLATION

2. Place the Flow Sensor Assembly into the correct location in the Rear Enclosure.

FIGURE 8-54: FLOW SENSOR INSTALLATION

PAGE 8-52 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 3. Place the Temperature Sensor Cap and Outlet Flow Path Thermistor into the proper location in the
Flow Sensor Assembly.

FIGURE 8-55: TEMPERATURE SENSOR CAP INSTALLATION

4. Secure the Flow Sensor Assembly to the Rear Enclosure by tightening the screws to 8 in-lbs.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-53

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 5. Install all of the tubing back to the proper location. Refer to the drawings below.

FIGURE 8-56: PROPER TUBING CONNECTIONS 1

PAGE 8-54 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 FIGURE 8-57: PROPER TUBING CONNECTIONS 2

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-55

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 FIGURE 8-58: PROPER TUBING CONNECTIONS 3

PAGE 8-56 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

8.5.8 PORTING BLOCK ADAPTOR REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Remove the Flow Sensor Assembly. Refer to the Trilogy 100 Flow Sensor Assembly Section or
the Trilogy 200, Trilogy O2, & Trilogy 202 Section for more information for more details.
2. Remove all of the tubing connected to the Porting Block Adaptor.
3. Remove the two screws connecting the Porting Block Adaptor to the Rear Enclosure.
Installation
1. For Trilogy 100 device ensure the porting block caps are installed as shown.

FIGURE 8-59: TRILOGY 100 TUBING & CAP PLACEMENT

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-57

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 2. For Trilogy 200, Trilogy O2, & Trilogy 202 devices ensure the porting block caps are installed as
shown.

FIGURE 8-60: TRILOGY 200, TRILOGY O2, & TRILOGY 202 TUBING & CAP PLACEMENT

PAGE 8-58 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 3. Connect the Porting Block Adaptor to the Rear Enclosure by tightening the screws to 8 in-lbs.

FIGURE 8-61: PORTING BLOCK INSTALLATION

NOTE
Verify that the long arm of the Porting Block Adaptor
goes towards the highest wall of the enclosure.

4. Connect the correct tubing to the proper location on the Porting Block Adaptor.
5. Install the Flow Sensor Assembly. Refer to the Trilogy 100 Flow Sensor Assembly Section or the
Trilogy 200, Trilogy O2, & Trilogy 202 Section for more information for more details.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-59

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
8.5.9 TRILOGY 100 SENSOR PCA REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Slide the Sensor PCA out of the Rear Enclosure.

FIGURE 8-62: SENSOR PCA REMOVAL

2. Remove any tubing connected to the Sensor PCA.

Installation
1. Slide the Sensor PCA into the grooves in the Rear Enclosure.

FIGURE 8-63: GROOVE LOCATION

2. Connect the proper tubing to the Sensor PCA. Refer to Figure 8-50.

PAGE 8-60 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

8.5.10 TRILOGY 200, TRILOGY O2, & TRILOGY 202 SENSOR PCA REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Slide the Sensor PCA out of the Rear Enclosure.
2. Remove any tubing connected to the Sensor PCA.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-61

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Installation
1. Connect thermistor to J1 on Sensor PCA.
2. Connect tube from bottom of PCA Manifold to Flow Sensor Assembly, routing under the thermistor
wires
3. Connect the Porting Block Adaptor tube 3 to MT2 on Sensor PCA, routing over thermistor wires.
4. Connect Port Block Adaptor Tube 2 to remaining port on Sensor PCA, routing over MT1 Tube.

FIGURE 8-64: TUBING AND ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

PAGE 8-62 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 5. Follow the steps in the Figure below to insert the PCA in the enclosure and make the final connec-
tions.

FIGURE 8-65: PCA PLACEMENT AND FINAL CONNECTIONS8

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-63

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 6. Ensure items 1, 2, 3, and 4 are assembled properly.

FIGURE 8-66: TEE TUBING CONNECTIONS

7. Ensure part 2 is attached to the Active Exhalation Control Valve red port.
8. Ensure item 3 is connected from the Filter/Tee to the Flow Sensor Assembly, routing the tube
under the Flow Path Assembly and over the thermistor.
9. Connect the Tube from the Sensor PCA Manifold top port to filter, routing over MT2 tube and
under MT1 tube and Flow Path Assembly.
10. Ensure the coiled pice of tubing has a plug attached to the end.
11. Ensure the coiled tube is attached to the Tee and nested under the Flow Sensor Assembly, with
tubing routed under the filter/Tee Assembly.
12. Connect Sensirion Hi and Lo tubes to Outlet Flow Path.

PAGE 8-64 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

8.5.11 POWER SUPPLY PCA REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Remove the Motor Blower Assembly. Refer to the Motor Blower Assembly Replacement Section
for more details.
2. Remove the Transition Tube. Refer to the Transition Tube Replacement Section for more details.
3. Remove the Flow Sensor Assembly. Refer to the Trilogy 100 Flow Sensor Assembly Section or
the Trilogy 200, Trilogy O2, & Trilogy 202 Section for more information for more details.
4. Remove the Sensor PCA. Refer to the Trilogy 100 Sensor PCA Section or the Trilogy 200 & O2
Sensor PCA Section for more details.
5. Remove the Power Supply PCA to Power Management Board Cable from location J2 on the
Power Supply PCA.
6. Remove the six screws securing the Power Supply PCA to the Rear Enclosure.

FIGURE 8-67: SCREW LOCATION

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-65

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Installation
1. Connect the Power Supply to the Rear Enclosure by tightening the screws to 8 in-lbs.

2. Connect the Power Supply PCA to Power Management Board Cable to location J2 on the Power
Supple PCA.
3. Install the Sensor PCA. Refer to the Trilogy 100 Sensor PCA Section or the Trilogy 200 & O2 Sen-
sor PCA Section for more details.
4. Install the Flow Sensor Assembly. Refer to the Trilogy 100 Flow Sensor Assembly Section or the
Trilogy 200, Trilogy O2, & Trilogy 202 Section for more information for more details.
5. Install the Transition Tube. Refer to the Transition Tube Replacement Section for more details.
6. Install the Motor Blower Assembly. Refer to the Motor Blower Assembly Replacement Section for
more details.

PAGE 8-66 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

8.5.12 EXHAUST FAN ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Remove the Motor Blower Assembly. Refer to the Motor Blower Assembly Replacement Section
for more details.
2. Remove the Transition Tube. Refer to the Transition Tube Replacement Section for more details.
3. Remove the Flow Sensor Assembly. Refer to the Trilogy 100 Flow Sensor Assembly Section or
the Trilogy 200 & Trilogy O2, & Trilogy 202 Section for more information for more details.
4. Remove the Sensor PCA. Refer to the Trilogy 100 Sensor PCA Section or the Trilogy 200 & O2
Sensor PCA Section for more details.
5. Remove the Power Supply PCA. Refer to the Power Supply PCA Replacement Section for more
details.
6. Lift the Exhaust Fan Assembly up and out of the Rear Enclosure.
Installation
1. Place the Exhaust Fan Assembly in the Rear Enclosure. Route the Fan wires over the highest
wall of the enclosure.

2. Place the Power Supply PCA over top of the Exhaust Fan Assembly and secure it to the Rear
Enclosure by tightening the screws to 8 in-lbs.
3. Connect the Power Supply PCA to Power Management Board Cable to location J2 on the Power
Supple PCA.
4. Install the Sensor PCA. Refer to the Trilogy 100 Sensor PCA Section or the Trilogy 200 & O2 Sen-
sor PCA Section for more details.
5. Install the Flow Sensor Assembly. Refer to the Trilogy 100 Flow Sensor Assembly Section or the
Trilogy 200, Trilogy O2, Trilogy 202 Section for more information for more details.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-67

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 6. Install the Transition Tube. Refer to the Transition Tube Replacement Section for more details.
7. Install the Motor Blower Assembly. Refer to the Motor Blower Assembly Replacement Section for
more details.

FIGURE 8-68: PROPER ROUTING OF TRILOGY 100 TUBING AND WIRING

FIGURE 8-69: PROPER ROUTING OF TRILOGY 200, TRILOGY O2, TRILOGY 202 TUBING AND WIRING

PAGE 8-68 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

8.6 FRONT/REAR/BOTTOM ENCLOSURE INSTALLATION
1. Place the Top Plate in the groves on the Front and Rear Enclosure.
2. Move the enclosure close enough to connect the wiring.
3. Using two tie wraps, secure the Ferrite on the Blower wires to the plastic support bracket.
4. Connect the Detachable Battery cable to J1 and J3 on the Power Management Board.
5. Connect the Exhaust Fan to J1 on the System Board.
6. Connect the Exhalation Control Module to J10 on the System Board.
7. Secure the Exhalation Control Module Wires to the Metal Support using cloth tape.
8. Connect the Blower Fan to J17 on the System Board.
9. Connect the Blower to J5 on the System Board.
10. Connect the Sensor Cable to J4 on the Sensor Board.
11. Ensuring not to pinch tubing or wiring, slide the Front and Rear Enclosures completely together.
12. Secure the Front and Rear Enclosures together by tightening the screws to 8 in-lbs.
13. The Front and Rear Enclosure are now in place. It is now time to connect the Bottom Enclosure.
14. Connect the Capacitor to J6 on the System Board.
15. Connect the Battery Fan to J18 on the System Board.
16. Connect the AC Connector to J1 on the Power Supply Board.
17. Connect the Power Supply to location J1 on the Power Management Board.
18. Connect the Interface Cable to J7 on the System Board.
19. Connect the Ethernet Cable to J19 on the System Board.
20. Connect the Oxygen Tube to the Exhalation Control Module.
21. Connect the DC Battery Cable to J4 on the Power Management Board.
22. Connect the Internal Battery Cable to J2 on the Power Management Board.

CAUTION
Once the Internal Battery Cable is connected, power may be active.

23. Fold the Bottom Enclosure over to seal the enclosure together. Be sure that the wiring and tubing
is clear of the seam and not kinked.
24. With the LCD facing you gently lift up one end and connect the Alarms to Speaker 1 and Speaker
2 on the front Panel Board.
25. Secure the Bottom Enclosure to the Front and Rear Enclosures by tightening the screws to 8 in-
lbs.
26. Connect the Active/Passive Port. Refer to the Install the Inlet Air Path Assembly or Oxygen Blend-
ing Module. Refer to the Inlet Air Path Assembly Section or Oxygen Module Assembly Section for
more details. Section for more details.
27. Insert the Air Path Foam. Refer to the Oxygen Blending Module Replacement Section for more
details.
28. Connect the Inlet Air Path Assembly or Oxygen Blending Module Assembly. Refer to the Inlet Air
Path Assembly Section or the Oxygen Blending Module Assembly procedure for more details.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-69

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
8.7 OXYGEN BLENDING MODULE COMPONENT REPAIR & REPLACEMENT PROCE-
DURES

8.7.1 OXYGEN BLENDER FILTER/WHISPER CAP REPLACEMENT

Removal
1. Pull the Whisper Cap from the Air Inlet Duct.
2. Remove the Filter from the Air Inlet Duct.
Installation
1. Place the Filter into the Air Inlet Duct.
2. Place the Filter Cap over the Filter and ensure it is securely in place (you will hear a snap).

FIGURE 8-70: FILTER AND WHISPER CAP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

PAGE 8-70 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

8.7.2 OXYGEN BLENDER HOUSING REMOVAL
Removal
1. Remove the Filter/Whisper Cap. Refer to Oxygen Blender Filter/Whisper Cap Replacement Sec-
tion for more details.
2. Remove the metal ring from the front of the Housing.
3. Remove the six screws securing the Manifold to the Housing.
4. Lift the Manifold out of the Housing.
Installation
1. Place the Manifold into the Housing.
2. Secure the Manifold to the Housing by tightening the four screws to 8 in-lbs.
3. Secure the two screws that connect the Mixer the to Housing by tightening the screws to 6 in-lbs.
4. Secure the metal ring to the assembly by tightening the screws to 6 in-lbs.
5. Install the Filter/Whisper Cap. Refer to Oxygen Blender Filter/Whisper Cap Replacement Section
for more details.

2 x 6 IN LB

4 x 8 IN LB

2 x 6 IN LB

FIGURE 8-71: OXYGEN BLENDER HOUSING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-71

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
8.7.3 MIXING ELEMENT/FLOW ELEMENT TUBES REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Remove the Filter/Whisper Cap. Refer to Oxygen Blender Filter/Whisper Cap Replacement Sec-
tion for more details.
2. Remove the Oxygen Blender Housing. Refer to the Oxygen Blender Housing Removal Section for
more details.
3. Release the Pressure Sensor Clip from the PCA.
4. Remove the rest of the tubing from the Flow Element Tubes.
5. Remove the screw securing the Mixing Element to the PCA.
6. Pull the Mixing element still connected to the Flow Element Tubes away from the Manifold.
7. Unscrew the screw securing the Flow Element Tubes to the Mixing Element.
Installation
1. Ensure that the two o-rings are in place at the end of the Flow Element Tubes.
2. Dip the end of the Flow Element Tubes in an alcohol bath and inert them into the Mixing Element.
3. Secure the Flow Element Tubes to the Mixing Element by securing the screw to 6 in-lbs.

FIGURE 8-72: MIXING ELEMENT/FLOW TUBES REPLACEMENT

4. Ensure that the two o-rings are in place at the other end of the Flow Element Tubes.

PAGE 8-72 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 5. Using a standoff, secure the Mixing Element to the PCA be securing the screw to 6 in-lbs.

FIGURE 8-73: TUBE INSERTION AND STANDOFF PLACEMENT

6. Reconnect the tubing to the Flow Element Tubes and ensure it is connected properly to the PCA
flow sensors.
7. Ensuring that the two small o-rings are in place reconnect the Pressure Sensor Clip to the PCA.
8. Install the Oxygen Blender Housing. Refer to Oxygen Blender Housing Removal Section for more
details.
9. Install the Filter/Whisper Cap. Refer to Oxygen Blender Filter/Whisper Cap Replacement Section
for more details.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-73

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
8.7.4 OXYGEN BLENDER PCA/PCA SPACER REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Remove the Filter/Whisper Cap. Refer to Oxygen Blender Filter/Whisper Cap Replacement Sec-
tion for more details.
2. Remove the Oxygen Blender Housing. Refer to Oxygen Blender Housing Removal Section for
more details.
3. Remove the Mixing Element/Flow Element Tubes. Refer to Mixing Element/Flow Element Tubes
Replacement Section for more details.
4. Disconnect the Valve connection from location P4 on the PCA.
5. Remove the two screws that secure the PCA to the Manifold.
6. Remove the screw that connect the PCA Spacer to the Manifold.

FIGURE 8-74: OXYGEN BLENDER PCA/PCA SPACER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

PAGE 8-74 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Installation
1. Connect the PCA Spacer to the Manifold by tightening the screw to 6 in-lbs.
2. Connect the PCA to the Manifold be securing the two screws to 6 in-lbs.
3. Connect the Valve Wire to location P4 on the Main PCA.
4. Install the Mixing Element/Flow Element Assembly. Refer to Mixing Element/Flow Element Tubes
Replacement Section for more details.
5. Install the Oxygen Blender Housing. Refer to Oxygen Blender Housing Removal Section for more
details.
6. Install the Filter/Whisper Cap. Refer to Oxygen Blender Filter/Whisper Cap Replacement Section
for more details.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-75

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
8.7.5 OXYGEN BLENDER PRESSURE SENSOR PORT CLIP REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Remove the Filter/Whisper Cap. Refer to Oxygen Blender Filter/Whisper Cap Replacement Sec-
tion for more details.
2. Remove the Oxygen Blender Housing. Refer to Oxygen Blender Housing Removal Section for
more details.
3. Remove the Mixing Element/Flow Element Tubes. Refer to Mixing Element/Flow Element Tubes
Replacement Section for more details.
4. Remove the Oxygen Blender PCA/PCA Spacer. Refer to Oxygen Blender PCA/PCA Spacer
Replacement Section for more details.
5. Unlatch the Port Clip from the bottom of the Oxygen Blender PCA.
6. Remove the Port Clip with green tube attached and two o-rings from the Oxygen Blender PCA.
Installation
1. Verify the green tube is inserted flush against the mating surface on the new Port Clip.
2. Insert the first new o-ring into the new Port Clip.
3. Insert the second new o-ring onto U24 on the Oxygen Blender PCA.
4. Insert the Port Clip with the first new o-ring over U24.
5. Latch the Port Clip onto the Oxygen Blender PCA.

FIGURE 8-75: PORT CLIP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

6. Install the Oxygen Blender PCA/PCA Spacer. Refer to Oxygen Blender PCA/PCA Spacer
Replacement Section for more details.
7. Install the Mixing Element/Flow Element Tubes. Refer to Mixing Element/Flow Element Tubes
Replacement Section for more details.
8. Install the Oxygen Blender Housing. Refer to Oxygen Blender Housing Removal Section for more
details.
9. Install the Filter/Whisper Cap. Refer to Oxygen Blender Filter/Whisper Cap Replacement Section
for more details.

PAGE 8-76 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

8.7.6 OXYGEN BLENDER FAN REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Remove the Filter/Whisper Cap. Refer to Oxygen Blender Filter/Whisper Cap Replacement Sec-
tion for more details.
2. Remove the Oxygen Blender Housing. Refer to Oxygen Blender Housing Removal Section for
more details.
3. Disconnect the Fan wire from location P5 on the Oxygen Blender PCA.
4. Remove the Fan from the Fan Bracket.
Installation
1. Secure the Fan to the Fan Bracket.

FIGURE 8-76: FAN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

2. Connect the Fan Wire to location P5 on the Oxygen Blender PCA.

3. Install the Oxygen Blender Housing. Refer to Oxygen Blender Housing Removal Section for more
details.
4. Install the Filter/Whisper Cap. Refer to Oxygen Blender Filter/Whisper Cap Replacement Section
for more details.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-77

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
8.7.7 AIR INLET DUCT ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Remove the Filter/Whisper Cap. Refer to Oxygen Blender Filter/Whisper Cap Replacement Sec-
tion for more details.
2. Remove the Oxygen Blender Housing. Refer to Oxygen Blender Housing Removal Section for
more details.
3. Remove the Mixing Element/Flow Element Assembly. Refer to Mixing Element/Flow Element
Tubes Replacement Section for more details.
4. Remove the two screws that secure the Air Inlet Duct Assembly to the Manifold.
Installation
1. Connect the Air Inlet Duct Assembly to the Manifold by tightening the screws to 8 in-lbs.

FIGURE 8-77: AIR INLET DUCT INSTALLATION

2. Install the Mixing Element/Flow Element Assembly. Refer to Mixing Element/Flow Element Tubes
Replacement Section for more details.
3. Install the Oxygen Blender Housing. Refer to Oxygen Blender Housing Removal Section for more
details.
4. Install the Filter/Whisper Cap. Refer to Oxygen Blender Filter/Whisper Cap Replacement Section
for more details.

PAGE 8-78 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

8.7.8 LOWER MANIFOLD COVER REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Remove the screw that secures the Lower Manifold Cover to the Manifold.
Installation
1. Connect the Lower Manifold Cover to the Manifold by tightening the screw to 6 in-lbs.

FIGURE 8-78: LOWER MANIFOLD COVER INSTALLATION

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-79

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
8.7.9 MANIFOLD REPLACEMENT
Removal
1. Remove the Filter/Whisper Cap. Refer to Oxygen Blender Filter/Whisper Cap Replacement Sec-
tion for more details.
2. Remove the Oxygen Blender Housing. Refer to Oxygen Blender Housing Removal Section for
more details.
3. Remove the Mixing Element/Flow Element Assembly. Refer to Mixing Element/Flow Element
Tubes Replacement Section for more details.
4. Remove the Oxygen Blender PCA. Refer to Oxygen Blender PCA/PCA Spacer Replacement Sec-
tion for more details.
5. Remove the Air Inlet Duct Assembly. Refer to the Air Inlet Duct Assembly Replacement Section
for more details.
6. Remove the Lower Manifold Cover. Refer to the Lower Manifold Cover Replacement Section for
more details.
Installation
1. Install the Lower Manifold Cover. Refer to the Lower Manifold Cover Replacement Section for
more details.
2. Install the Air Inlet Duct Assembly. Refer to the Air Inlet Duct Assembly Replacement Section for
more details.
3. Install the Oxygen Blender PCA. Refer to Oxygen Blender PCA/PCA Spacer Replacement Sec-
tion for more details.
4. Install the Mixing Element/Flow Element Assembly. Refer to Mixing Element/Flow Element Tubes
Replacement Section for more details.
5. Install the Oxygen Blender Housing. Refer to Oxygen Blender Housing Removal Section for more
details.
6. Install the Filter/Whisper Cap. Refer to Oxygen Blender Filter/Whisper Cap Replacement Section
for more details.

PAGE 8-80 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

8.8 PACKAGING ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE
1. Form device shipper box and seal, using 3 inch tape.

2. Form & insert the Bottom Pad and place it into shipper.

3. Place device with handle down into appropriately-sized Polybag, folding excess polybag around
device.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-81

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 4. Place the bagged device into shipper.

5. Form four roll-up spacers and place them into the shipper.

6. Form the spacer pad and place it inside the shipper.

PAGE 8-82 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 7. Form the Top pad and insert into the shipper box.

8. Close the shipper box and seal with 3 inch tape.

9. Place shipping labels on the outside of the shipper box.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 8-83

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 This page intentionally left blank.

PAGE 8-84 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

CHAPTER 9: REPAIR KITS
9.0 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter illustrates the names and components for each of the repair kits for the Trilogy Ventilator. For
technical assistance or replacement part ordering information, contact Respironics Product Support.

USA and Canada

Phone: 1-800-345-6443
Fax: 1-800-866-0245
Email: service@respironics.com

International

Phone: 1-724-387-4000
Fax: 1-800-387-5012

Visit Respironics Home Page on the World Wide Web at:

www.respironics.com

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 9-1

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
9.1 REPAIR KIT REFERENCE TABLE

NOTE
For kits with multiple part number listings, refer to the individual page to ensure proper ordering.

PART NUMBER(S) REPAIR KIT NAME PAGE IDENTIFIER

1045299 AC Power Connector Cable Kit page 12
1045153 Active Exhalation Control Module Kit page 24
1045295/1061268/1061269/ Base Enclosure Kits page 18
1070258/1070256/1075608/
1075638
1045180 Battery Fan Kit page 10
1045171 Battery Fan Shield Kit page 25
1045307 Bellows Clip Kit page 33
1045309 Blower Bellows Kit page 6
1045302 Capacitor Kit page 10
1045303 Capacitor/Battery Retainer Assembly Kit page 7
1045589 DC Inlet O-ring Kit page 45
1045300 DC Power Connector Cable Kit page 11
1045166 Detachable Battery Connector Assembly Kit page 22
1045167 Detachable Battery Retainer Kit page 21
1045181 Enclosure Seal Kit page 29
1045178 Exhaust Fan Assembly Kit page 27
1067047 FAA Label Kit page 58
1045150/1070249 Flow Sensor Assembly Kits page 28
1045168 Flow Straightener Kit page 27
1045200 Front Panel/Keypad LED PCA Kit page 36
1045306 Handle Kit page 6
1045590 Handle O-ring Kit page 46
1045587 Inlet Air Path Assembly Kit page 7
1045296 Interface Board Retainer Kit page 20
1045297 Interface PCA Kit page 34
1055806/1055957 Internal Battery Pack Kits page 8
1045183 Keypad Kit page 16
1045184 LCD Kit page 39
1054951 Motor Blower Assembly Kit page 34
1045588 O2 Inlet O-ring Kit page 45
1045170 Outlet Flow Path Thermistor Kit page 26

PAGE 9-2 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 PART NUMBER(S) REPAIR KIT NAME PAGE IDENTIFIER
1045298 Oxygen Connector Kit page 11
1045163 PCA Inverter Kit page 32
1045197 PCB Module Plate “A” Kit page 16
1045198 PCB Module Plate “B” Kit page 17
1045196 PCB Support for Power Management PCA Kit page 13
1045195 PCB Support for System PCA Kit page 12
1035443/1029330 Pollen Filter Kits page 5
1045174 Porting Block Adaptor Kit page 23
1045304 Power Cord Clamp Kit page 13
1045201 Power Management PCA Kit page 37
1045151 Power Supply PCA Kit page 38
1058376 Preventive Maintenance Label Kit page 47
1045149/1070251 Rear Enclosure Kits page 31
1045403 Removable Air Path Foam Kit page 5
1029360 Rubber Feet Kit page 47
1051801 SD Card Kit page 39
1045152/1070248 Sensor Board Assembly Kits page 35
1045310 /1055430 Shipping Container Kits page 40
1045301 Speaker Hold-Down Kit page 8
1045311 Speaker Kit page 32
1045308 Stirring Fan Foam Kit page 40
1045176 Stirring Fan Kit page 23
1045177 Stirring Fan Retainer Kit page 25
1045204 System Board to Ethernet Cable Kit page 9
1045203 System Board to Interface PCA Cable Kit page 9
1045164 System Board to LCD Cable Ferrite Kit page 14
1045225 System Board to LCD Cable Kit page 15
1045202 System Board to Sensor Board Cable Kit page 15
1045199 System Board w/ Daughter Board Kit page 37
1045169 Temperature Sensor O-ring Kit page 26
1045586 Top Plate Enclosure Kit page 44
1045154 Transition Tube Kit page 24
1045165 Transition Tube Locator Kit page 21
1045172 Trilogy 100 Tubing Kit page 38
1070250 Trilogy 200/Trilogy O2/Trilogy 202 Tubing Kit page 57
1076003 Trilogy Base Seal Kit page 58
1045182/1070253/1070252/ Trilogy Front Enclosure Kits page 30
1075607

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 9-3

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 PART NUMBER(S) REPAIR KIT NAME PAGE IDENTIFIER
1045175 Trilogy Hardware Kit page 38
1054870 Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202 Oxygen Blender page 48
Flow Element
1054867 Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202 Oxygen Blender PCA page 47
1070135 Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202 Blender Plastic page 56
Threaded Cap
1054773 Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202 Oxygen Blender page 53
Filter Duct
1054872 Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202 Oxygen Blender page 50
Housing
1054772 Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202 Oxygen Blender page 54
Lower Manifold
1054774 Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202 Oxygen Blender page 56
Manifold Assembly
1054871 Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202 Oxygen Blender page 49
Mixing Element
1054875 Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202 Oxygen Blender PCA page 51
Spacer
1054868 Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202 Oxygen Blender page 55
Pressure Sensor Port Clip
1054775 Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202 Oxygen Blender page 54
Purge Fan
1054876 Trilogy 200/Trilogy O2/Trilogy 202 Tubing Kit page 57
1054869 Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202 Oxygen Blender page 48
Whisper Cap
1054874 Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202 Oxygen Blender Wire page 52
Harness
1070259 Trilogy Porting Block Adaptor Cap Kit page 57
1045173 Tubing Elbow Kit page 14
1045312/1045402/1058857/ Warning Label Kits page 41
1070257/1070255/1075609/
1075637

PAGE 9-4 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

9.2 POLLEN FILTER KITS

PART NUMBER: 1035443 (1 PACK)/1029330 (2 PACK)

Included in Kit Tools Required

Pollen Filter None

9.3 REMOVABLE AIR PATH FOAM KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045403

Included in Kit Tools Required

Removable Air Path Foam Phillips Screwdriver

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 9-5

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
9.4 HANDLE KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045306

Included in Kit Tools Required

Trilogy Handle 1/8” Hex Wrench

9.5 BLOWER BELLOWS KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045309

Included in Kit Tools Required

Blower Bellow Phillips Screwdriver

PAGE 9-6 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

9.6 INLET AIR PATH ASSEMBLY KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045587

Included in Kit Tools Required

Inlet Air Path Assembly Phillips Screwdriver

9.7 CAPACITOR/BATTERY RETAINER ASSEMBLY KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045303

Included in Kit Tools Required

Capacitor/Battery Retainer Assembly Phillips Screwdriver

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 9-7

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
9.8 INTERNAL BATTERY PACK KITS

PART NUMBER: 1055806 PART NUMBER: 1055957

Included in Kit Tools Required Included in Kit Tools Required

International/Domestic Phillips Screwdriver Japanese Internal Battery Pack Phillips Screwdriver

Internal Battery Pack

9.9 SPEAKER HOLD-DOWN KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045301

Included in Kit Tools Required

Speaker Hold-Down Phillips Screwdriver

PAGE 9-8 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

9.10 SYSTEM BOARD TO ETHERNET CABLE KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045204

Included in Kit Tools Required

System Board to Ethernet Cable Phillips Screwdriver

9.11 SYSTEM BOARD TO INTERFACE PCA CABLE KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045203

Included in Kit Tools Required

System Board to Interface PCA Cable Phillips Screwdriver

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 9-9

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
9.12 CAPACITOR KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045302

Included in Kit Tools Required

Capacitor Phillips Screwdriver

9.13 BATTERY FAN KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045180

Included in Kit Tools Required

Battery Fan Phillips Screwdriver

PAGE 9-10 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

9.14 DC POWER CONNECTOR CABLE KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045300

Included in Kit Tools Required

DC Power Connector Cable Phillips Screwdriver

3/4” Wrench

9.15 OXYGEN CONNECTOR KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045298

Included in Kit Tools Required

Oxygen Connector Phillips Screwdriver

5/8” Wrench

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 9-11

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
9.16 AC POWER CONNECTOR CABLE KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045299

Included in Kit Tools Required

AC Power Connector Cable w/ Phillips Screwdriver

Gasket (comes assembled) 1/4” Wrench

9.17 PCB SUPPORT FOR SYSTEM PCA KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045195

Included in Kit Tools Required

PCB Support for System PCA w/ Phillips Screwdriver

Ferrite (comes assembled) 1/8” Hex Wrench

PAGE 9-12 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

9.18 PCB SUPPORT FOR POWER MANAGEMENT PCA KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045196

Included in Kit Tools Required

PCB Support for Power Management PCA Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench

9.19 POWER CORD CLAMP KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045304

Included in Kit Tools Required

Power Cord Clamp Phillips Screwdriver

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 9-13

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
9.20 TUBING ELBOW KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045173

Included in Kit Tools Required

Tubing Elbow Phillips Screwdriver

9.21 SYSTEM BOARD TO LCD CABLE FERRITE KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045164

Included in Kit Tools Required

Ferrite Phillips Screwdriver

PAGE 9-14 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

9.22 SYSTEM BOARD TO LCD CABLE KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045225

Included in Kit Tools Required

System Board to LCD Cable Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench

9.23 SYSTEM BOARD TO SENSOR BOARD CABLE KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045202

Included in Kit Tools Required

System Board to Sensor Board Cable Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 9-15

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
9.24 KEYPAD KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045183

Included in Kit Tools Required

Keypad Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench

9.25 PCB MODULE PLATE “A” KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045197

Included in Kit Tools Required

PCB Module Plate “A” Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench

PAGE 9-16 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

9.26 PCB MODULE PLATE “B” KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045198

Included in Kit Tools Required

PCB Module Plate “B” Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 9-17

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
9.27 BASE ENCLOSURE KITS

PART NUMBER: 1045295

Included in Kit Tools Required

Base Enclosure Assembly Phillips Screwdriver

Clear Overlay (x2)
Trilogy 100/Trilogy 200 Warning Label - International

PART NUMBER: 1061269

Included in Kit Tools Required

Base Enclosure Assembly Phillips Screwdriver

Clear Overlay (x2)
Trilogy 100/Trilogy 200 Warning Label - Domestic

PART NUMBER: 1061268

Included in Kit Tools Required

Base Enclosure Assembly Phillips Screwdriver

Clear Overlay (x2)
Trilogy 100/Trilogy 200 Warning Label - Japanese

PART NUMBER: 1070258

Included in Kit Tools Required

Base Enclosure Assembly Phillips Screwdriver

Clear Overlay (x2)
Trilogy O2 Warning Label - Japanese

PART NUMBER: 1070256

Included in Kit Tools Required

Base Enclosure Assembly Phillips Screwdriver

Clear Overlay (x2)
Trilogy 100/Trilogy 200 Warning Label - Latin America

PART NUMBER: 1075638

Included in Kit Tools Required

Base Enclosure Assembly Phillips Screwdriver

Clear Overlay (x2)
Trilogy 202 Warning Label - International

PAGE 9-18 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 PART NUMBER: 1075608
Included in Kit Tools Required

Base Enclosure Assembly Phillips Screwdriver

Clear Overlay (x2)
Trilogy 202 Warning Label - Domestic

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 9-19

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
9.28 INTERFACE BOARD RETAINER KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045296

Included in Kit Tools Required

Interface Board Retainer Phillips Screwdriver

PAGE 9-20 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

9.29 TRANSITION TUBE LOCATOR KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045165

Included in Kit Tools Required

Transition Tube Locator Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench

9.30 DETACHABLE BATTERY RETAINER KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045167

Included in Kit Tools Required

Detachable Battery Retainer Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 9-21

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
9.31 DETACHABLE BATTERY CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045166

Included in Kit Tools Required

Detachable Battery Connector Assembly Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench

PAGE 9-22 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

9.32 STIRRING FAN KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045176

Included in Kit Tools Required

Stirring Fan Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench

9.33 PORTING BLOCK ADAPTOR KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045174

Included in Kit Tools Required

Porting Block Adaptor Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 9-23

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
9.34 TRANSITION TUBE KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045154

Included in Kit Tools Required

Transition Tube Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench

9.35 ACTIVE EXHALATION CONTROL MODULE KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045153

Included in Kit Tools Required

Active Exhalation Control Module Phillips Screwdriver

O-rings (x2) 1/8” Hex Wrench

PAGE 9-24 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

9.36 STIRRING FAN RETAINER KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045177

Included in Kit Tools Required

Stirring Fan Retainer Phillips Screwdriver

Stirring Fan Foam 1/8” Hex Wrench

9.37 BATTERY FAN SHIELD KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045171

Included in Kit Tools Required

Battery Fan Shield Phillips Screwdriver

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 9-25

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
9.38 OUTLET FLOW PATH THERMISTOR KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045170

Included in Kit Tools Required

Outlet Flow Path Thermistor Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench

9.39 TEMPERATURE SENSOR O-RING KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045169

Included in Kit Tools Required

Temperature Sensor O-ring Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench

PAGE 9-26 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

9.40 FLOW STRAIGHTENER KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045168

Included in Kit Tools Required

Flow Straightener Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench
Chamfer tool M100311

9.41 EXHAUST FAN ASSEMBLY KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045178

Included in Kit Tools Required

Exhaust Fan Assembly Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 9-27

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
9.42 FLOW SENSOR ASSEMBLY KITS

PART NUMBER: 1045150

Included in Kit Tools Required

Trilogy 100 Flow Sensor Assembly Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench

PART NUMBER: 1070249

Included in Kit Tools Required

Trilogy 200/Trilogy 202/Trilogy O2 Flow Sensor Phillips Screwdriver

Assembly 1/8” Hex Wrench

PAGE 9-28 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

9.43 ENCLOSURE SEAL KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045181

Included in Kit Tools Required

Enclosure Seal Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 9-29

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
9.44 TRILOGY FRONT ENCLOSURE KITS

PART NUMBER: 1045182

Included in Kit Tools Required

Trilogy 100 Front Enclosure Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench

PART NUMBER: 1070253

Included in Kit Tools Required

Trilogy O2 Front Enclosure Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench

PART NUMBER: 1070252

Included in Kit Tools Required

Trilogy 200 Front Enclosure Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench

PART NUMBER: 1075607

Included in Kit Tools Required

Trilogy 202 Front Enclosure Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench

PAGE 9-30 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

9.45 REAR ENCLOSURE KITS

PART NUMBER: 1045149

Included in Kit Tools Required

Trilogy 100/Trilogy 200 Rear Enclosure Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench

PART NUMBER: 1070251

Included in Kit Tools Required

Trilogy 202/Trilogy O2 Rear Enclosure Phillips Screwdriver

(contains hole for Oxygen Blending 1/8” Hex Wrench
Module connection)

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 9-31

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
9.46 PCA INVERTER KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045163

Included in Kit Tools Required

PCA Inverter Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench

9.47 SPEAKER KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045311

Included in Kit Tools Required

Speaker Phillips Screwdriver

PAGE 9-32 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

9.48 BELLOWS CLIP KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045307

Included in Kit Tools Required

Bellows Clip Phillips Screwdriver

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 9-33

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
9.49 MOTOR BLOWER ASSEMBLY KIT

PART NUMBER: 1054951

Included in Kit Tools Required

Motor Blower Assembly w/ Isolation Phillips Screwdriver

Assembly 1/8” Hex Wrench

9.50 INTERFACE PCA KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045297

Included in Kit Tools Required

Interface PCA Phillips Screwdriver

PAGE 9-34 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

9.51 SENSOR BOARD ASSEMBLY KITS

PART NUMBER: 1045152

Included in Kit Tools Required

Trilogy 100 Sensor Board Assembly Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench

PART NUMBER: 1070248

Included in Kit Tools Required

Trilogy 200/Trilogy 202/Trilogy O2 Sensor Board Phillips Screwdriver

Assembly 1/8” Hex Wrench

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 9-35

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
9.52 FRONT PANEL/KEYPAD LED PCA KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045200

Included in Kit Tools Required

Front Panel/Keypad LED PCA Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench

PAGE 9-36 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

9.53 SYSTEM BOARD W/ DAUGHTER BOARD KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045199

Included in Kit Tools Required

System Board w/ Daughter Board Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench

9.54 POWER MANAGEMENT PCA KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045201

Included in Kit Tools Required

Power Management PCA Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 9-37

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
9.55 POWER SUPPLY PCA KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045151

Included in Kit Tools Required

Power Supply PCA Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench

9.56 TRILOGY 100 TUBING KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045172

Included in Kit Tools Required

Trilogy 100 Tubing Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench

9.57 TRILOGY HARDWARE KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045175

Included in Kit Tools Required

Trilogy Hardware Kit

PAGE 9-38 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

9.58 LCD KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045184

Included in Kit Tools Required

Trilogy Color 5.7 Inch LCD Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench

9.59 SD CARD KIT

PART NUMBER: 1051801

Included in Kit Tools Required

1 GB SD Card None

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 9-39

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
9.60 SHIPPING CONTAINER KITS

PART NUMBER: 1045310 (1 PACK) / 1055430 (10 PACK)

Included in Kit Tools Required

Trilogy Shipping Container

9.61 STIRRING FAN FOAM KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045308

Included in Kit Tools Required

Stirring Fan Foam

PAGE 9-40 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

9.62 WARNING LABEL KITS

PART NUMBER: 1045312

Included in Kit Tools Required

Trilogy 100/Trilogy 200 Warning N/A

Label (International)

PART NUMBER: 1045402

Included in Kit Tools Required

Trilogy 100/Trilogy 200 Warning Label N/A

(Japanese)

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 9-41

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 PART NUMBER: 1058857
Included in Kit Tools Required

Trilogy 100/Trilogy 200 Warning Label N/A

(Domestic)

PART NUMBER: 1070257

Included in Kit Tools Required

Trilogy O2 Warning Label N/A

PAGE 9-42 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 PART NUMBER: 1070255
Included in Kit Tools Required

Trilogy 100/Trilogy 200 Warning Label N/A

(Latin America)

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 9-43

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 PART NUMBER: 1075609
Included in Kit Tools Required

Trilogy 202 Warning Label (Domestic) N/A

PART NUMBER: 1075637

Included in Kit Tools Required

Trilogy 202 Warning Label N/A

(International)

9.63 TOP PLATE ENCLOSURE KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045586

Included in Kit Tools Required

Top Plate Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench

PAGE 9-44 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

9.64 O2 INLET O-RING KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045588

Included in Kit Tools Required

O2 Inlet O-ring Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench
5/8” Wrench

9.65 DC INLET O-RING KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045589

Included in Kit Tools Required

DC Inlet O-ring Phillips Screwdriver

1/8” Hex Wrench
3/4” Wrench

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 9-45

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
9.66 HANDLE O-RING KIT

PART NUMBER: 1045590

Included in Kit Tools Required

Handle O-ring 1/8” Hex Wrench

PAGE 9-46 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

9.67 RUBBER FEET KIT

PART NUMBER: 1029360

Included in Kit Tools Required

Rubber Feet None

9.68 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE LABEL KIT

PART NUMBER: 1058376

Included in Kit Tools Required

Preventive Maintenance Label (10 pack) None

9.69 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 OXYGEN BLENDER PCA

PART NUMBER: 1054867

Included in Kit Tools Required

Oxygen Blender PCA None

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 9-47

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
9.70 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 OXYGEN BLENDER WHISPER CAP

PART NUMBER: 1054869

Included in Kit Tools Required

Oxygen Blender Whisper Cap None

9.71 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 OXYGEN BLENDER FLOW ELEMENT

PART NUMBER: 1054870

Included in Kit Tools Required

Oxygen Blender Flow Element None

PAGE 9-48 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

9.72 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 OXYGEN BLENDER MIXING ELEMENT

PART NUMBER: 1054871

Included in Kit Tools Required

Oxygen Blender Mixing Element None

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 9-49

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
9.73 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 OXYGEN BLENDER HOUSING

PART NUMBER: 1054872

Included in Kit Tools Required

Oxygen Blender Housing None

PAGE 9-50 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

9.74 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 OXYGEN BLENDER PCA SPACER

PART NUMBER: 1054875

Included in Kit Tools Required

Oxygen Blender PCA Spacer None

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 9-51

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
9.75 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 OXYGEN BLENDER WIRE HARNESS

PART NUMBER: 1054874

Included in Kit Tools Required

Oxygen Blender Wire Harness None

PAGE 9-52 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

9.76 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 OXYGEN BLENDER FILTER DUCT

PART NUMBER: 1054773

Included in Kit Tools Required

Oxygen Blender Filter Duct None

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 9-53

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
9.77 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 OXYGEN BLENDER PURGE FAN

PART NUMBER: 1054775

Included in Kit Tools Required

Oxygen Blender Purge Fan None

9.78 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 OXYGEN BLENDER LOWER MANIFOLD

PART NUMBER: 1054772

Included in Kit Tools Required

Oxygen Blender Lower Manifold None

PAGE 9-54 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

9.79 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 OXYGEN BLENDER PRESSURE SENSOR PORT
CLIP

PART NUMBER: 1054868

Included in Kit Tools Required

Oxygen Blender Pressure Sensor Port Clip None

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 9-55

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
9.80 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 OXYGEN BLENDER MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY

PART NUMBER: 1054774

Included in Kit Tools Required

Oxygen Blender Manifold Assembly None

9.81 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 BLENDER PLASTIC THREADED CAP

PART NUMBER: 1070135

Included in Kit Tools Required

Oxygen Blender Plastic Threaded Cap None

PAGE 9-56 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

9.82 TRILOGY 200/TRILOGY O2/TRILOGY 202 TUBING KIT

PART NUMBER: 1070250

Included in Kit Tools Required

Trilogy 200 / Trilogy O2 / Trilogy 202 None

Tubing

9.83 TRILOGY O2/TRILOGY 202 OXYGEN BLENDER TUBING KIT

PART NUMBER: 1054876

Included in Kit Tools Required

Oxygen Blender Tubing None

9.84 TRILOGY PORTING BLOCK ADAPTOR CAP KIT

PART NUMBER: 1070259

Included in Kit Tools Required

Porting Block Adaptor Cap None

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 9-57

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
9.85 FAA LABEL KIT

PART NUMBER: 1067047

Included in Kit Tools Required

FAA Label (Qty: 10) None

9.86 TRILOGY BASE SEAL KIT

PART NUMBER: 1076003

Included in Kit Tools Required

Base Enclosure Seals None

PAGE 9-58 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

CHAPTER 10: TRILOGY TESTING & CALIBRATION
10.0 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter provides the necessary performance, service, and safety (optional) testing procedures. The
intervals for the specific tests are listed in the testing procedure sections below.

10.1 TRILOGY 100 CHECKOUT PROCEDURE

This test procedure should be performed prior to connecting the device to a patient or in between patient
usage. Test both the active and passive circuits if you want to do a complete checkout on the device. The
tests should be performed as described in order to verify proper operation of the device.

NOTE
The actual circuit configuration to be used on the patient should be used to perform the system checkout.

10.1.1 TOOLS REQUIRED

• Active Exhalation Porting Block with PAP (RI p/n 1054670)
• Passive Exhalation Porting Block (RI p/n 1040372)
• Active Exhalation Device with PAP (RI p/n 1053716)
• Whisper Swivel II (RI p/n 332113)
• Test Lung (RI p/n 1021671)
• Small Flat Head Screwdriver

WARNING
If you notice any unexplained changes in the performance of the device, if it is making unusual sounds, if
the device or detachable battery are dropped, if water is spilled into the enclosure or if the enclosure is
cracked or broken, discontinue use and contact Respironics or an authorized service center for service.

10.1.2 VISUAL INSPECTION

1. Verify that the enclosure is not broken and that all applicable screws are in place.
2. Verify that the device handle, SD Card door, and Detachable Battery are secure and in good work-
ing order.
3. Verify that the rubber feet are on the bottom of the device.

10.1.3 INITIAL SETUP

1. Connect the power cord to the device and then to an AC outlet.
2. Attach the test lung to the patient connection end of the desired circuit (Active PAP or Passive).
3. Access the Setup Screen. Reference the System Setup section for more information.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-1

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
10.1.4 SETTING AND ALARMS TESTS
Complete the following steps to set up the settings and alarms tests.

SETUP
Settings and Alarms Menu
Modify the settings in the Setting and Alarms menu to match those shown below in Table 10-1. If necessary
refer to the System Setup Section for instructions on modifying ventilator settings.

TABLE 10-1: VENTILATOR SETTINGS IN THE SETTING AND ALARMS MENU

SETTING VALUE
Dual Prescription Off

Circuit Type Active PAP or Passive

Therapy Mode S/T

AVAPS (passive circuit only) Off

IPAP 20 pressure units

EPAP 4 pressure units

Breath Rate 12 BPM

Inspiratory Time 1.6 seconds

Trigger Type (passive circuit) Auto-Trak

Flow Trigger Sensitivity 6.0 l/min

(active PAP circuit)

Flow Cycle Sensitivity (active 20%

PAP circuit)

Rise Time 1

Ramp Length Off

All other alarms Off

PAGE 10-2 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Options Menu
Modify the settings in the Options menu to match those shown below in Table 10-2.

TABLE 10-2: VENTILATOR SETTING IN THE OPTIONS MENU

SETTING VALUE
Menu Access Full

Detailed View On

All other settings Discretionary

Turn Device Power On

Press the Start/Stop button on the front of the ventilator. The system will begin operating using the defined
ventilation settings.

VERIFY THE HIGH TIDAL VOLUME ALARM

This procedure verifies that the High Tidal Volume alarm is working properly. For passive circuits, this will
verify the High Vte alarm. For active with PAP circuits, this will verify the High Vti alarm. It assumes that you
have attached the test lung, verified the ventilator settings, and turned on ventilator power.
Change Alarm Ventilator Setting
Modify the High Tidal Volume alarm setting to match the one shown below in Table 10-3.

TABLE 10-3: HIGH TIDAL VOLUME ALARM SETTING

SETTING VALUE
High Vte/High Vti 50 ml

Verify the Alarm

NOTE
Do not use the “Reset” button to manually reset the alarm. Instead, use
the “Modify” button to change ventilator settings. This applies to all tests.

Wait up to 40 seconds and verify the following alarm signals:

• The High Priority audible indicator sounds
• A red light flashes on the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button
• The High Tidal Volume alarm condition appears on the screen, highlighted in red

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-3

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Modify Ventilator Alarm Setting
Modify the High Tidal Volume alarm setting to match the one shown below in Table 10-4.

TABLE 10-4: RESET HIGH TIDAL VOLUME ALARM SETTING

SETTING VALUE
High Vte/Vti 500 ml

Verify Reset
Wait 40 seconds and verify the following auto-reset conditions:
• The High Priority audible indicator has stopped sounding
• The red light on the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button has stopped flashing
Restore Ventilator Settings
Modify the ventilator setting and change the following value shown in Table 10-5.

TABLE 10-5: RESTORE VENTILATOR SETTINGS

SETTING VALUE
High Vte/Vti Off

VERIFY THE LOW TIDAL VOLUME ALARM

This procedure verifies that the Low Tidal Volume alarm is working properly. For passive circuits, this will verify
the Low Vte alarm. For active with PAP circuits, this will verify the Low Vti alarm. It assumes that you have
attached the test lung, verified the ventilator settings, and turned on ventilator power.
Change Alarm Ventilator Setting
Modify the Low Tidal Volume alarm setting to match the one shown below in Table 10-6.

TABLE 10-6: LOW TIDAL VOLUME ALARM SETTING

SETTING VALUE
Low Vte/Vti 500 ml

Verify the Alarm

Wait up to 40 seconds and verify the following alarm signals:
• The High Priority audible indicator sounds
• A red light flashes on the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button
• The Low Tidal Volume alarm condition appears on the screen, highlighted in red
Modify Ventilator Alarm Settings

PAGE 10-4 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Modify the Low Tidal Volume alarm setting to match the one shown below in Table 10-7.

TABLE 10-7: RESET LOW TIDAL VOLUME ALARM SETTING

SETTING VALUE
Low Vte/Vti 50 ml

Verify Reset
Wait 40 seconds and verify the following auto-reset conditions:
• The High Priority audible indicator has stopped sounding
• The red light on the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button has stopped flashing
Restore Ventilator Settings
Modify the ventilator setting and change the following value shown in Table 10-8.

TABLE 10-8: RESTORE VENTILATOR SETTINGS

SETTING VALUE
Low Vte/Vti Off

VERIFY THE CIRCUIT DISCONNECT ALARM

This procedure verifies that the Circuit Disconnect alarm is working properly. It assumes that you have
attached the test lung, verified ventilator settings, and turned on ventilator power.
Change Circuit Disconnect Ventilator Setting
Modify the Circuit Disconnect ventilator settings to match the one shown below in Table 10-9.

TABLE 10-9: VENTILATOR SETTINGS

SETTING VALUE
Circuit Disconnect 10 Seconds

Disconnect Test Lung

Disconnect the test lung from the circuit.

NOTE
The Low Inspiratory Pressure Alarm may also be detected.

Verify the Alarm

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-5

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Wait approximately 10 seconds and verify the following alarm signals:
• The High Priority audible indicator sounds
• A red light flashes on the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button
• The Circuit Disconnect alarm condition appears on the screen, highlighted in red
Reconnect Test Lung
Reconnect the test lung to the circuit.
Verify Reset
Wait at least 40 seconds and verify the following auto-reset conditions:
• The High Priority audible indicator has stopped sounding
• The red light on the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button has stopped flashing
Restore Ventilator Settings
Modify the ventilator setting and change the following value shown in Table 10-10.

TABLE 10-10: RESTORE VENTILATOR SETTINGS

SETTING VALUE
Circuit Disconnect Off

VERIFY THE HIGH INSPIRATORY PRESSURE ALARM

This procedure verifies that the High Inspiratory Pressure alarm is working properly. It assumes that you have
attached the test lung, verified ventilator settings, and turned on ventilator power.
Change Ventilator Settings
Modify the ventilator settings and change the following values shown below in Table 10-11.

TABLE 10-11: VENTILATOR SETTINGS

SETTING VALUE
Mode CV

Tidal Volume 500 ml

Breath Rate 12 BPM

Inspiratory Time 1.0 seconds

Flow Pattern Ramp

PEEP 4 pressure units

Sigh Off

Circuit Disconnect Off

PAGE 10-6 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 TABLE 10-11: VENTILATOR SETTINGS

SETTING VALUE
Low Inspiratory Pressure 6 pressure units

High Inspiratory Pressure 10 pressure unit

Apnea Off

All other alarms Off

Verify the Alarm

Wait up to 40 seconds and verify the following alarm signals:
• The Medium Priority audible indicator sounds
• A yellow light flashes on the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button
• The High Inspiratory Pressure alarm condition appears on the screen, highlighted in yellow

NOTE
If this alarm is not reset within 3 occurrences, the alarm is
elevated to High Priority, and the High Priority Indicators occur.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-7

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Modify Ventilator Alarm Settings
Modify the High Inspiratory Pressure setting to match the one shown in Table 10-12.

TABLE 10-12: RESET HIGH INSPIRATORY PRESSURE ALARM

SETTING VALUE
High Inspiratory Pressure 60 pressure units

Verify Reset
Wait 40 seconds and verify the following auto-reset conditions:
• The Medium Priority audible indicator has stopped sounding
• The yellow light on the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button has stopped flashing

VERIFY THE LOW INSPIRATORY PRESSURE ALARM

This procedure verifies that the Low Inspiratory Pressure alarm is working properly. It assumes that you have
attached the test lung, verified ventilator settings, and turned on ventilator power.
Change Ventilator Settings
Modify the ventilator settings and change the following values shown below in Table 10-13.

TABLE 10-13: VENTILATOR SETTINGS

SETTING VALUE
Mode CV

Tidal Volume 500 ml

Breath Rate 12 BPM

Inspiratory Time 1.0 seconds

Flow Pattern Ramp

PEEP 4 pressure units

Sigh Off

Circuit Disconnect Off

Low Inspiratory Pressure 40 pressure units

High Inspiratory Pressure 60 pressure units

Apnea Off

All other alarms Off

PAGE 10-8 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Verify the Alarm
Wait up to 40 seconds and verify the following alarm signals:
• The High Priority audible indicator sounds
• A red light flashes on the Alarm Indicator /Audible Pause button
• The Low Inspiratory Pressure alarm condition appears on the screen, highlighted in red
Modify Ventilator Alarm Settings
Modify the Low Inspiratory Pressure setting to match the one shown below in Table 10-14.

TABLE 10-14: RESET LOW INSPIRATORY PRESSURE ALARM SETTING

SETTING VALUE
Low Inspiratory Pressure 6 pressure units

Verify Reset
Wait 40 seconds and verify the following auto-reset conditions:
• The High Priority Indicator has stopped sounding
• The red light on the Audio Pause/Alarm Indicator button has stopped flashing

10.1.5 BATTERY FUNCTION VERIFICATION

Make sure the batteries are functioning properly and fully charged before usage.

VERIFY THE DETACHABLE AND INTERNAL (LITHIUM-ION) BATTERIES FUNCTION

1. Connect AC Power to the device and verify that the green AC LED on the front panel is lit.
2. Verify that the detachable battery is properly installed.
3. Turn the device on and verify that both the detachable and internal battery symbols appear on the
display. Verify if either battery is less than fully charged (the charge symbol will display on the
respective battery.)
4. Disconnect the AC Power source from the device.
• Verify that the AC Power Disconnected alarm message appears on the display and the green
AC LED is not lit. Press Reset.
• Verify that the detachable battery symbol shows the level of charge noted in the previous step
and that the device continues to operate.
• Verify that the detachable battery symbol has a black box around it to indicate that it is in use.
5. Disconnect the detachable battery pack from the device.
• Verify that the Detach Batt Disconnected alarm message appears on the display. Press
Reset.
• Verify that the internal battery symbol shows the same level of charge as noted above and the
device continues to operate.
• Verify that the internal battery symbol has a black box around it to indicate that it is in use.
6. Reconnect the Detachable Battery and AC Power source.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-9

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
VERIFY THE EXTERNAL BATTERY FUNCTION (OPTIONAL)
1. Connect AC Power to the device and verify that the green AC LED is lit.
2. Connect the external battery cable to the external battery and to the ventilator.
3. Verify that the external battery symbol is shown on the display and some level of charge is present.
4. Disconnect the AC Power source from the device.
• Verify that the AC Power Disconnected alarm message appears on the display and the green
AC LED is not lit. Press Reset.
• Verify that the external battery symbol shows the level of charge as noted in the previous step
and the device continues to operate.
• Verify that the external battery symbol has a black box around it to indicate that it is in use.
5. Reconnect the AC Power source.

ALARM AND EVENT LOG CLEAN-UP

1. In the Setup Menu, select Alarm Log.
2. Press Clear to clear the log file.
3. Press Yes to confirm.
4. Press Finish to complete.
5. In the Setup Menu, select Event Log.
6. Press Clear to clear the log file.
7. Press Yes to confirm.
8. Press Finish to complete.

RESULTS
All portions of this checkout procedure should be completed prior to connection to the patient. If any of the
tests fail to complete as indicated, if possible, correct the error, clear the alarm and resume testing.

PAGE 10-10 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

10.2 TRILOGY 100 CHECKOUT PROCEDURE DATA SHEET
10.2.1 VISUAL INSPECTION

YES NO
Damaged Parts?

10.2.2 SETTING & ALARM TESTS

High Tidal Volume PASS FAIL

Alarm Setting?

Low Tidal Volume PASS FAIL

Alarm Setting?

Circuit Disconnect PASS FAIL

Alarm Setting?

High Inspiratory PASS FAIL

Pressure Alarm
Setting?

Low Inspiratory PASS FAIL

Pressure Alarm
Setting?

Battery Function PASS FAIL

Verification?

Signature:__________________________________________

Date:______________________________________________

Serial Number: _____________________________________

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-11

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
10.3 TRILOGY 200 CHECKOUT PROCEDURE
This chapter details the test procedures that should be performed by the clinician prior to connecting the device
to the patient. Test the Active PAP, Active Flow, and Passive circuit types if you want to do a complete checkout
on the device. The tests should be performed as described in order to verify proper operation of the device.
Some of the procedures in this chapter require you to change settings on the device.

NOTE
The actual circuit configuration to be used on the patient should be used to perform the system checkout.

10.3.1 TOOLS REQUIRED

• Universal Porting Block
• Active PAP Exhalation Device
• Active Flow Exhalation Device with Flow Sensor
• Trilogy Universal Active PAP Tube Adapter
• Whisper Swivel II
• Test Lung
• Small Flat Head Screwdriver

10.3.2 VISUAL INSPECTION

1. Verify that the enclosure is not broken and that all applicable screws are in place.
2. Verify that the device handle, SD Card door, and detachable battery are secure and in good work-
ing order.
3. Verify that the rubber feet are on the bottom of the device.

10.3.3 INITIAL SETUP

1. Connect the power cord to the device and then to an AC outlet.
2. Attach the test lung to the patient connection end of the desired circuit (Active PAP, Active Flow, or
Passive).
3. Follow the instructions in System Setup Section to access the Setup Screen.

PAGE 10-12 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

10.3.4 SETTINGS AND ALARM TESTS
Complete the following steps to set up the settings and alarms tests.

SETUP
Settings And Alarms Menu
Modify the settings in the Settings and Alarms menu to match those shown below.

SETTING VALUE
Dual Prescription Off

Circuit Type Active PAP, Active Flow or

Passive

Therapy Mode S/T

AVAPS (passive circuit only) Off

IPAP 20 pressure units

EPAP 4 pressure units

Breath Rate 12 BPM

Inspiratory Time 1.6 seconds

Trigger Type (passive circuit) Auto-Trak

Flow Trigger Sensitivity 6.0 l/min

(active PAP circuit)

Leak Compensation (Active On

Flow circuit type

Flow Cycle Sensitivity (Active 20%

PAP or Active Flow circuit
type)

Rise Time 1

Ramp Length Off

All other alarms Off

Options Menu
Modify the settings in the Options menu to match those shown below.

SETTING VALUE
Menu Access Full

Detailed View On

All other settings Discretionary

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-13

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Turn Device Power On
Press the Start/Stop button on the front of the ventilator. The system will begin operating using the defined
ventilation settings.

VERIFY THE HIGH TIDAL VOLUME ALARM

NOTE
Do not use the “reset” button to manually reset the alarm. Instead, use the “Modify”
button to change ventilator settings. This note applies to all tests.

This procedure verifies that the High Tidal Volume alarm is working properly. For Passive and Active Flow
circuits, this will verify the High Vte alarm. For Active PAP circuits, this will verify the High Vti alarm. It assumes
that you have attached the test lung, verified the ventilator settings, and turned on ventilator power as
described in the Initial Setup section.
Change Alarm Ventilator Setting
Modify the High Tidal Volume alarm setting to match the one shown below.

SETTING VALUE
High Vte/High Vti 50 ml

Verify the Alarm

Wait up to 40 seconds and verify the following alarm signals:
• The High Priority audible indicator sounds
• A red light flashes on the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button
• The High Tidal Volume alarm condition appears on the screen, highlighted in red
Modify Ventilator Alarm Settings
Modify the High Tidal Volume alarm setting to match the one shown below.

SETTING VALUE
High Vte/High Vti 500 ml

Verify Reset
Wait 40 seconds and verify the following auto-reset conditions:
• The High Priority audible indicator has stopped sounding
• The red light on the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button has stopped flashing

PAGE 10-14 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Restore Ventilator Settings
Modify the ventilator settings and change the following value shown below.

SETTING VALUE
High Vte/High Vti Off

VERIFY THE LOW TIDAL VOLUME ALARM

This procedure verifies that the Low Tidal Volume alarm is working properly. For Passive and Active Flow
circuits, this will verify the Low Vte alarm. For Active PAP circuits, this will verify the Low Vti alarm. It assumes
that you have attached the test lung, verified the ventilator settings, and turned on ventilator power as
described in the Initial Setup section.
Change Alarm Ventilator Setting
Modify the Low Tidal Volume alarm setting to match the one shown below.

SETTING VALUE
Low Vte/Low Vti 500 ml

Verify the Alarm

Wait up to 40 seconds and verify the following alarm signals:
• The High Priority audible indicator sounds
• A red light flashes on the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button
• The Low Tidal Volume alarm condition appears on the screen, highlighted in red
Modify Ventilator Alarm Settings
Modify the Low Tidal Volume alarm setting to match the one shown below.

SETTING VALUE
Low Vte/Low Vti 50 ml

Verify Reset
Wait 40 seconds and verify the following auto-reset conditions:
• The High Priority audible indicator has stopped sounding
• The red light on the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button has stopped flashing
Restore Ventilator Settings
Modify the ventilator settings and change the following value shown below.

SETTING VALUE
Low Vte/Low Vti Off

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-15

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
VERIFY CIRCUIT DISCONNECT ALARM
This procedure verifies that the Circuit Disconnect alarm is working properly. It assumes that you have
attached the test lung, verified ventilator settings, and turned on ventilator power as described in the Initial
Setup section.

NOTE
The Low Inspiratory or Low Expiratory Pressure Alarm may also be detected.

Change Circuit Disconnect Ventilator Setting

Modify the Circuit Disconnect ventilator setting to match the value shown below.

SETTING VALUE
Circuit Disconnect 10 seconds

Disconnect Test Lung

Disconnect the test lung from the circuit.
Verify the Alarm
Wait approximately 10 seconds and verify the following alarm signals:
• The High Priority Audible Indicator sounds
• A red light flashes on the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button
• The Circuit Disconnect alarm condition appears on the screen, highlighted in red
Reconnect Test Lung
Reconnect the test lung to the circuit.
Verify Reset
Wait at least 40 seconds and verify the following auto-reset conditions:
• The High Priority audible indicator has stopped sounding
• The red light on the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button has stopped flashing
Restore Ventilator Settings
Modify the ventilator settings and change the following values shown below.

SETTING VALUE
Circuit Disconnect Off

PAGE 10-16 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

VERIFY THE HIGH INSPIRATORY PRESSURE ALARM
This procedure verifies that the High Inspiratory Pressure alarm is working properly. It assumes that you have
attached the test lung, verified ventilator settings, and turned on ventilator power as described in the Initial
Setup section.

NOTE
If this alarm is not reset within 3 occurrences, the alarm is elevated to High
Priority, and the High Priority Indicators occur.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-17

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Change Ventilator Settings
Modify the ventilator settings and change the following values shown below.

SETTING VALUE
Mode CV

Tidal Volume 500 ml

Breath Rate 12 BPM

Inspiratory Time 1.0 seconds

Flow Pattern Ramp

PEEP 4 pressure units

Sigh Off

Circuit Disconnect Off

Low Inspiratory Pressure 6 pressure units

High Inspiratory Pressure 10 pressure units

Apnea Off

All other alarms Off

Verify the Alarm

Wait up to 40 seconds and verify the following alarm signals:
• The Medium Priority audible indicator sounds
• A yellow light flashes on the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button
• The High Inspiratory Pressure alarm condition appears on the screen, highlighted in yellow
Modify Ventilator Alarm Settings
Modify the High Inspiratory Pressure setting to match the one shown below.

SETTING VALUE
High Inspiratory Pressure 60 pressure units

Verify Reset
Wait 40 seconds and verify the following auto-reset conditions:
• The Medium Priority audible indicator has stopped sounding
• The yellow light on the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button has stopped flashing

PAGE 10-18 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

VERIFY THE LOW INSPIRATORY PRESSURE ALARM
This procedure verifies that the Low Inspiratory Pressure alarm is working properly. It assumes that you have
attached the test lung, verified ventilator settings, and turned on ventilator power as described in the Initial
Setup section.
Change Ventilator Settings
Modify the ventilator settings and change the following values shown below.

SETTING VALUE
Mode CV

Tidal Volume 500 ml

Breath Rate 12 BPM

Inspiratory Time 1.0 seconds

Flow Pattern Ramp

PEEP 4 pressure units

Sigh Off

Circuit Disconnect Off

Low Inspiratory Pressure 40 pressure units

High Inspiratory Pressure 60 pressure units

Apnea Off

All other alarms Off

Verify the Alarm

Wait up to 40 seconds and verify the following alarm signals:
• The High Priority audible indicator sounds
• A red light flashes on the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button
• The Low Inspiratory Pressure alarm condition appears on the screen, highlighted in red
Modify Ventilator Alarm Settings
Modify the Low Inspiratory Pressure setting to match the one shown below.

SETTING VALUE
Low Inspiratory Pressure 6 pressure units

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-19

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Verify Reset
Wait 40 seconds and verify the following auto-reset conditions:
• The High Priority audible indicator has stopped sounding
• The red light on the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button has stopped flashing

10.3.5 BATTERY FUNCTION VERIFICATION

Make sure the batteries are functioning properly and fully charged before patient use.

VERIFY THE DETACHABLE AND INTERNAL (LITHIUM-ION) BATTERIES FUNCTION

1. Connect AC Power to the device and verify that the green AC LED on the front panel is lit.
2. Verify that the detachable battery is properly installed.
3. Turn the device on and verify that both the detachable and internal battery symbols appear on the
display. Verify that if either battery is less than fully charged, the charge symbol will display on the
respective battery.
4. Disconnect the AC Power source from the device.
• Verify that the AC Power Disconnected alarm message appears on the display and the green
AC LED is not lit. Press Reset.
• Verify that the detachable battery symbol shows the level of charge noted in the previous step
and that the device continues to operate.
• Verify that the detachable battery symbol has a black box around it to indicate that it is in use.
5. Disconnect the detachable battery pack from the device.
• Verify that the Detach Batt Disconnected alarm message appears on the display. Press Reset.
• Verify that the internal battery symbol shows the same level of charge as noted in Step C and
the device continues to operate.
• Verify that the internal battery symbol has a black box around it to indicate that it is in use.
6. Reconnect the Detachable Battery and AC Power source.

VERIFY THE EXTERNAL BATTERY FUNCTION (IF AVAILABLE)

1. Connect AC Power to the device and verify that the green AC LED is lit.
2. Connect the external battery cable to the external battery and to the ventilator.
3. Verify that the external battery symbol is shown on the display and some level of charge is present.
4. Disconnect the AC Power source from the device.
• Verify that the AC Power Disconnected alarm message appears on the display and the green
AC LED is not lit. Press Reset.
• Verify that the external battery symbol shows the level of charge as noted in the previous step
and the device continues to operate.
• Verify that the external battery symbol has a black box around it to indicate that it is in use.
5. Reconnect the AC Power source.

ALARM AND EVENT LOG CLEAN-UP

1. In the Setup Menu, select Alarm Log.
a. Press Clear to clear the log file.
b. Press Yes to confirm.

PAGE 10-20 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 c. Press Finish to complete.
2. In the Setup Menu, select Event Log.
a. A. Press Clear to clear the log file.
b. Press Yes to confirm.
c. Press Finish to complete.

RESULTS
All portions of this checkout procedure should be completed prior to connection to the patient. If any of the
tests fail to complete as indicated, if possible, correct the error, clear the alarm and resume testing. If correction
of the failed portion is not possible, return the device to Respironics or an authorized service center for service
and repair.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-21

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
10.4 TRILOGY 200 CHECKOUT PROCEDURE DATA SHEET
10.4.1 VISUAL INSPECTION

YES NO
Damaged Parts?

10.4.2 SETTING & ALARM TESTS

High Tidal Volume PASS FAIL

Alarm Setting?

Low Tidal Volume PASS FAIL

Alarm Setting?

Circuit Disconnect PASS FAIL

Alarm Setting?

High Inspiratory PASS FAIL

Pressure Alarm
Setting?

Low Inspiratory PASS FAIL

Pressure Alarm
Setting?

Battery Function PASS FAIL

Verification?

Signature:__________________________________________

Date:______________________________________________

Serial Number: _____________________________________

PAGE 10-22 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

10.5 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 CHECKOUT PROCEDURE
This chapter details the test procedures that should be performed by the clinician prior to connecting the device
to the patient. Test the Active PAP, Active Flow, and Passive circuit types if you want to do a complete checkout
on the device. The tests should be performed as described in order to verify proper operation of the device.
Some of the procedures in this chapter require you to change settings on the device.

10.5.1 TOOLS REQUIRED

• Universal Porting Block
• Active PAP Exhalation Device
• Active Flow Exhalation Device with Flow Sensor
• Trilogy Universal Active PAP Tube Adapter
• Whisper Swivel II
• Test Lung
• High Pressure O2 Hose
• Oxygen Monitor
• Small Flat Head Screwdriver

10.5.2 VISUAL INSPECTION

1. Verify that the enclosure is not broken and that all applicable screws are in place.
2. Verify that the device handle, SD Card door, and detachable battery are secure and in good work-
ing order.
3. Verify that the rubber feet are on the bottom of the device.

10.5.3 INITIAL SETUP

1. Connect the power cord to the device and then to an AC outlet.
2. Attach the test lung to the patient connection end of the desired circuit (Active PAP, Active Flow, or
Passive).
3. Connect the device to a suitable high pressure O2 source.
4. Connect and set up an external O2 monitor per the manufacturer’s instruction manual.
5. Follow the instructions in Chapter 5 to access the Setup Screen.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-23

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
10.5.4 SETTINGS AND ALARMS TESTS
Complete the following steps to set up the settings and alarms tests.

SETUP
Settings And Alarms Menu
Modify the settings in the Settings and Alarms menu to match those shown below.

SETTING VALUE
Dual Prescription Off

Circuit Type Active PAP, Active Flow, or Passive

Therapy Mode S/T

AVAPS (passive circuit only) Off

IPAP 20 pressure units

EPAP 4 pressure units

FiO2 45%

Breath Rate 12 BPM

Inspiratory Time 1.6 seconds

Trigger Type (passive circuit Auto-Trak

type)

Flow Trigger Sensitivity 6.0 l/min

(Active PAP or Active Flow
circuit type)

Leak Compensation (Active On

Flow circuit type)

Flow Cycle Sensitivity (Active 20%

PAP or Active Flow circuit
type)

Rise Time 1

Ramp Length Off

All other alarms Off

PAGE 10-24 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Options Menu
Modify the settings in the Options menu to match those shown below.

SETTING VALUE
Menu Access Full

Detailed View On

All other settings Discretionary

Turn Device Power On

Press the Start/Stop button on the front of the ventilator. The system will begin operating using the defined
ventilation settings.

VERIFY THE HIGH TIDAL VOLUME ALARM

This procedure verifies that the High Tidal Volume alarm is working properly. For Passive and Active Flow
circuits, this will verify the High Vte alarm. For Active PAP circuits, this will verify the High Vti alarm. It assumes
that you have attached the test lung, verified the ventilator settings, and turned on ventilator power as
described in the Initial Setup section.

NOTE
Do not use the “reset” button to manually reset the alarm. Instead, use the “Modify”
button to change ventilator settings. This note applies to all tests.

Change Alarm Ventilator Setting

Modify the High Tidal Volume alarm setting to match the one shown below.

SETTING VALUE
High Vte/High Vti 50 ml

Verify the Alarm

Wait up to 40 seconds and verify the following alarm signals:
• The High Priority audible indicator sounds
• A red light flashes on the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button
• The High Tidal Volume alarm condition appears on the screen, highlighted in red
Modify Ventilator Alarm Settings
Modify the High Tidal Volume alarm setting to match the one shown below.

SETTING VALUE
High Vte/High Vti 500 ml

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-25

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Verify Reset
Wait 40 seconds and verify the following auto-reset conditions:
• The High Priority audible indicator has stopped sounding
• The red light on the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button has stopped flashing
Restore Ventilator Settings
Modify the ventilator settings and change the following value shown below.

SETTING VALUE
High Vte/High Vti Off

VERIFY THE LOW TIDAL VOLUME ALARM

This procedure verifies that the Low Tidal Volume alarm is working properly. For Passive and Active Flow
circuits, this will verify the Low Vte alarm. For Active PAP circuits, this will verify the Low Vti alarm. It assumes
that you have attached the test lung, verified the ventilator settings, and turned on ventilator power as
described in the Initial Setup section.
Change Alarm Ventilator Setting
Modify the Low Tidal Volume alarm setting to match the one shown below.

SETTING VALUE
Low Vte/Low Vti 500 ml

Verify the Alarm

Wait up to 40 seconds and verify the following alarm signals:
• The High Priority audible indicator sounds
• A red light flashes on the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button
• The Low Tidal Volume alarm condition appears on the screen, highlighted in red
Modify Ventilator Alarm Settings
Modify the Low Tidal Volume alarm setting to match the one shown below.

SETTING VALUE
Low Vte/Low Vti 50 ml

Verify Reset
Wait 40 seconds and verify the following auto-reset conditions:
• The High Priority audible indicator has stopped sounding
• The red light on the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button has stopped flashing

PAGE 10-26 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Restore Ventilator Settings
Modify the ventilator settings and change the following value shown below.

SETTING VALUE
Low Vte/Low Vti Off

VERIFY CIRCUIT DISCONNECT ALARM

This procedure verifies that the Circuit Disconnect alarm is working properly. It assumes that you have
attached the test lung, verified ventilator settings, and turned on ventilator power as described in the Initial
Setup section.

NOTE
The Low Inspiratory or Low Expiratory Pressure Alarm may also be detected.

Change Circuit Disconnect Ventilator Setting

Modify the Circuit Disconnect ventilator setting to match the value shown below.

SETTING VALUE
Circuit Disconnect 10 seconds

Disconnect Test Lung

Disconnect the test lung from the circuit.
Verify the Alarm
Wait approximately 10 seconds and verify the following alarm signals:
• The High Priority Audible Indicator sounds
• A red light flashes on the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button
• The Circuit Disconnect alarm condition appears on the screen, highlighted in red
Reconnect Test Lung
Reconnect the test lung to the circuit.
Verify Reset
Wait at least 40 seconds and verify the following auto-reset conditions:
• The High Priority audible indicator has stopped sounding
• The red light on the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button has stopped flashing

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-27

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Restore Ventilator Settings
Modify the ventilator settings and change the following values shown below.

SETTING VALUE
Circuit Disconnect Off

VERIFY THE HIGH INSPIRATORY PRESSURE ALARM

This procedure verifies that the High Inspiratory Pressure alarm is working properly. It assumes that you have
attached the test lung, verified ventilator settings, and turned on ventilator power as described in the Initial
Setup section.

NOTE
If this alarm is not reset within 3 occurrences, the alarm is elevated to High
Priority, and the High Priority Indicators occur.

Change Ventilator Settings

Modify the ventilator settings and change the following values shown below.

SETTING VALUE
Mode CV

Tidal Volume 500 ml

FiO2 21%

Breath Rate 12 BPM

Inspiratory Time 1.0 seconds

Flow Pattern Ramp

PEEP 4 pressure units

Sigh Off

Circuit Disconnect Off

Low Inspiratory Pressure 6 pressure units

High Inspiratory Time 10 pressure units

Apnea Off

All other alarms Off

PAGE 10-28 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Verify the Alarm
Wait up to 40 seconds and verify the following alarm signals:
• The Medium Priority audible indicator sounds
• A yellow light flashes on the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button
• The High Inspiratory Pressure alarm condition appears on the screen, highlighted in yellow
Modify Ventilator Alarm Settings
Modify the High Inspiratory Pressure setting to match the one shown below.

SETTING VALUE
High Inspiratory Pressure 60 pressure units

Verify Reset
Wait 40 seconds and verify the following auto-reset conditions:
• The Medium Priority audible indicator has stopped sounding
• The yellow light on the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button has stopped flashing

VERIFY THE LOW INSPIRATORY PRESSURE ALARM

This procedure verifies that the Low Inspiratory Pressure alarm is working properly. It assumes that you have
attached the test lung, verified ventilator settings, and turned on ventilator power as described in the Initial
Setup section.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-29

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Change Ventilator Settings
Modify the ventilator settings and change the following values shown below.

SETTING VALUE
Mode CV

Tidal Volume 500 ml

FiO2 21%

Breath Rate 12 BPM

Inspiratory Time 1.0 seconds

Flow Pattern Ramp

PEEP 4 pressure units

Sigh Off

Circuit Disconnect Off

Low Inspiratory Pressure 40 pressure units

High Inspiratory Time 60 pressure units

Apnea Off

All other alarms Off

Verify the Alarm

Wait up to 40 seconds and verify the following alarm signals:
• The High Priority audible indicator sounds
• A red light flashes on the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button
• The Low Inspiratory Pressure alarm condition appears on the screen, highlighted in red
Modify Ventilator Alarm Settings
Modify the Low Inspiratory Pressure setting to match the one shown below.

SETTING VALUE
Low Inspiratory Pressure 6 pressure units

Verify Reset
Wait 40 seconds and verify the following auto-reset conditions:
• The High Priority audible indicator has stopped sounding
• The red light on the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button has stopped flashing

PAGE 10-30 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

VERIFY THE O2 BLENDING OPERATION
This procedure verifies that the Low Oxygen Flow alarm and the Low Oxygen Inlet Pressure alarm are working
properly. These alarms apply to all circuit types. It assumes that you have attached the test lung, verify the
ventilator settings, and turned on the ventilator power as described in the Initial Setup section.
Setup
1. Connect an external O2 Monitor (in accordance with the recommended manufacture’s guidelines)
in-line with the patient tube. Make sure the O2 monitor is properly calibrated before proceeding.
2. Connect the ventilator’s oxygen input port to a source of high pressure O2 (60 psi nominal). Turn
on O2 flow to the ventilator.
Ventilator Settings
Set the ventilator FiO2 setting to 45%.
Verify Blending
1. Turn on the ventilator.
2. Verify the set level of FiO2 is satisfied using an external O2 monitor.
Verify alarm
1. Shut off or disconnect the source of high pressure O2 to the ventilator.
2. Wait 1 minute and verify the following alarm signals:
• The Priority audible indicator sounds.
• A red light flashes on the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause Button.
• The following alarm conditions appear on the screen, highlighted in red:
• Low Oxygen Flow
• Low Oxygen Inlet Pressure

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-31

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Verify Reset
1. Reconnect or turn on the source of high pressure O2 to the ventilator.
2. Wait 1 minute and verify the following:
• The set level of FiO2 is satisfied using an external O2 monitor.
• The High Priority audible indicator has stopped sounding.
• The red light on the Alarm Indicator/Audio Pause button has stopped flashing.

10.5.5 BATTERY FUNCTION VERIFICATION

Make sure the batteries are functioning properly and fully charged before patient use.

VERIFY THE DETACHABLE AND INTERNAL (LITHIUM-ION) BATTERIES FUNCTION

1. Connect AC Power to the device and verify that the green AC LED on the front panel is lit.
2. Verify that the detachable battery is properly installed.
3. Turn the device on and verify that both the detachable and internal battery symbols appear on the
display. Verify that if either battery is less than fully charged, the charge symbol will display on the
respective battery.
4. Disconnect the AC Power source from the device.
• Verify that the AC Power Disconnected alarm message appears on the display and the green
AC LED is not lit. Press Reset.
• Verify that the detachable battery symbol shows the level of charge noted in the previous step
and that the device continues to operate.
• Verify that the detachable battery symbol has a black box around it to indicate that it is in use.
5. Disconnect the detachable battery pack from the device.
• Verify that the Detach Batt Disconnected alarm message appears on the display. Press Reset.
• Verify that the internal battery symbol shows the same level of charge as noted in Step C and
the device continues to operate.
• Verify that the internal battery symbol has a black box around it to indicate that it is in use.
6. Reconnect the Detachable Battery and AC Power source.

VERIFY THE EXTERNAL BATTERY FUNCTION (IF AVAILABLE)

1. Connect AC Power to the device and verify that the green AC LED is lit.
2. Connect the external battery cable to the external battery and to the ventilator.
3. Verify that the external battery symbol is shown on the display and some level of charge is present.
4. Disconnect the AC Power source from the device.
• Verify that the AC Power Disconnected alarm message appears on the display and the green
AC LED is not lit. Press Reset.
• Verify that the external battery symbol shows the level of charge as noted in the previous step
and the device continues to operate.
• Verify that the external battery symbol has a black ••box around it to indicate that it is in use.
5. Reconnect the AC Power source.

ALARM AND EVENT LOG CLEAN-UP

1. In the Setup Menu, select Alarm Log.

PAGE 10-32 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 a. Press Clear to clear the log file.
b. Press Yes to confirm.
c. Press Finish to complete.
2. In the Setup Menu, select Event Log.
a. A. Press Clear to clear the log file.
b. B. Press Yes to confirm.
c. Press Finish to complete.

RESULTS
All portions of this checkout procedure should be completed prior to connection to the patient. If any of the
tests fail to complete as indicated, if possible, correct the error, clear the alarm and resume testing. If correction
of the failed portion is not possible, return the device to Respironics or an authorized service center for service
and repair.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-33

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
10.6 TRILOGY O2 & TRILOGY 202 CHECKOUT PROCEDURE DATA SHEET

10.6.1 VISUAL INSPECTION

YES NO
Damaged Parts?

10.6.2 SETTING & ALARM TESTS

High Tidal Volume PASS FAIL

Alarm Setting?

Low Tidal Volume PASS FAIL

Alarm Setting?

Circuit Disconnect PASS FAIL

Alarm Setting?

High Inspiratory PASS FAIL

Pressure Alarm
Setting?

Low Inspiratory PASS FAIL

Pressure Alarm
Setting?

Verify the O2 PASS FAIL

Blending Operation?

Battery Function? PASS FAIL

Signature:__________________________________________

Date:______________________________________________

Serial Number: _____________________________________

PAGE 10-34 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

10.7 DOWNLOADING THE TRILOGY FIELD SERVICE APPLICATION, TRILOGY TOOL-
BOX SOFTWARE, AND NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS DAQMX SOFTWARE

NOTE
Respironics service software is now available at http://my.respironics.com. In the event
that you are unable to access this site, log onto http://servicesoftware.respironics.com.
to download Respironics service software.

You must be a registered user and have completed the Trilogy Certified Training Course in order to download
the Trilogy Field Service Application, Trilogy Toolbox Software, and National Instruments DAQmx Software. To
become a registered user and to download Trilogy Software and Documentation, you must successfully
complete the Trilogy Service Training class.
Once you have access to download the software, perform the following:
1. Log into http://my.respironics.com.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-35

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 2. Click on the Service Software link.

PAGE 10-36 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 3. In the menu below, select Trilogy.

4. Click on the Download button adjacent to the software you wish to download - Trilogy Toolbox,
Trilogy Field Service Application Software, or National Instruments DAQmx.

NOTE
Remember to periodically log onto http://my.respironics.com
and check for Trilogy software and firmware updates.

IMPORTANT!
The programs may be downloaded in any order, but the applications must
be installed to the computer in the order of FSA then TBA then DAQ

IMPORTANT!
Install the NI DAQmx software after the Field Service Application and the Trilogy Toolbox have
been installed on your PC. When installing the NI DAQmx software you will see a series of on-
screen prompts. Use all of the default settings associated with the on-screen prompts until you
get to the software version screen. For NI DAQmx to interface properly with the Trilogy Field
Service Application and Trilogy Toolbox, Version 7.1 MUST be selected.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-37

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 FIGURE 10-1: DOWNLOADING SOFTWARE SAMPLE SCREEN

IMPORTANT NOTE
If the Trilogy Toolbox is already installed on your PC, clicking on the download button will remove the
current version of the software from the PC. Verify that the installed version is the latest version,
otherwise, you must perform the “Download” procedure twice.

At anytime that you update any of the software applications, all applications must be completely
removed using the ADD/REMOVE PROGRAMS feature of Windows; then all applications must be
installed in the following order: FSA, TBA, and DAQ-mx.

When you click on the Download button, the “Run or Save?” window will appear.
5. Click on Save to download the software and save it to a specific location on your PC.
6. Follow the on-screen prompts to “Save” the software.
7. Once the downloads are completed, next begin the installation process for each of the applica-
tions. Remember that the applications must be installed to the computer hard drive in the proper
order (FSA, TBA, DAQ) or errors will occur when trying to run the installed applications.
8. Open the folder that the applications were downloaded to.
9. Select the “Service Release_x_x_x_x.exe” file first, where the x’s represent the current version of
FSA, by double clicking with the mouse on the application.

PAGE 10-38 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 10. Follow the prompts and select the options highlighted by the RED Circles.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-39

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
PAGE 10-40 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 11. You must restart your computer after this installation. Once the computer restarts there will be 4
new Icons on the Desktop screen of the computer.

12. Two portions of the Trilogy testing, a Pre Test which provides calibration and verification prior to
the Run-in procedure and the Post Test portion which provides verification after the Run-in proce-
dure and during the Preventative Maintenance procedure.
13. There are also two ways to perform the testing, with Manual Flow testing you must use Shop Air,
Compressed (Cylinder) Air, or Compressed (Cylinder) O2.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-41

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 14. Next from the folder, select the TBA for installation by double clicking with the mouse the “Trilogy-
ToolBox.exe” file.

15. Follow the prompts and select the options highlighted by the RED Circles.

PAGE 10-42 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-43
TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 16. At this screen, the installation will ask for the folder to install the LogDogg Application into. The
Default folder needs to be modified by inserting the additional folder in the install path.

PAGE 10-44 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 17. Follow the Red circle examples below.

18. Change from the default listed above to the new path listed below.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-45

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 19. You do not need to restart your computer after the installation of the TBA.

PAGE 10-46 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 20. After the TBA is installed you will have to enter the C:\Program Files\Trilogy Toolbox folder of your
computer, right click with the mouse the “Trilogy Toolbox.exe” file, select “Send To” and then Select
“Desktop (As a Shortcut)” to place the TBA Icon on your desktop.

21. Next from thefolder, select the DAQ for installation by double clicking with the mouse the
“DAQMX.exe” file.
22. Follow the prompts and select the options highlighted by the RED Circles.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-47

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
PAGE 10-48 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-49
TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
PAGE 10-50 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-51
TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 23. You must restart your computer after the DAQ has been installed.
24. After the restart of your computer has completed, the Trilogy test applications will be ready for use.

PAGE 10-52 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

10.8 PERFORMING FIRMWARE UPGRADES
1. Connect the SD Card Reader (Respironics Part Number: 1047300) to the PC.
2. Insert the Trilogy SD Card into the SD Card Reader.
3. Log onto http://my.respironics.com.

4. If you have an account with my.respironics.com, enter your User ID and Password. If you do not,
then you must create an account. You will need your company account information in order to
establish the account.
5. Click the Login button if you have an account, otherwise click the Sign Up Now button.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-53

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 6. Once you have entered your account information and signed in, you can access the Service Soft-
ware and Documentation page. Select the appropriate option from above.
7. In the Choose a Category drop down box, select Trilogy.

8. Click the Download button to download the software update to the SD Card.

9. Select the Yes button to download the new software.

PAGE 10-54 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 10. Select the Save prompt.

11. Save to the drive that has the SD Card.

12. Select the Close prompt.

13. Open the file that the software was saved to.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-55

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 14. You will see a .exe file. Double click on this and then unzip it.

PAGE 10-56 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 15. Save it to the SD card again. In addition to the .exe file, there will now also be a .s file. This is the
file that the Trilogy needs to upgrade to the new software.

16. Remove the SD Card from the SD Card Reader and insert it into the Trilogy Device while in ther-
apy off mode.

WARNING
Upgrading the Trilogy firmware will reset the device prescription and alarm settings to factory defaults.
If you are upgrading this device for use on the same patient, ensure you record all prescription and
alarm settings prior to upgrading the Trilogy device. Refer to the Trilogy Clinical Manual for details.

17. A prompt will then appear on your Trilogy User Interface asking you if you would like to upgrade
the Operating Software.
18. Select the YES button and follow the on-screen prompts to complete the Firmware installation.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-57

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 19. The firmware upgrade will reset your Ventilator with the factory default settings.

WARNING
Prior to placing the Ventilator with a patient, you must set
the device with the proper prescription and alarm settings.

PAGE 10-58 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

10.9 USING THE TRILOGY TOOLBOX
This section describes how to access the Trilogy Toolbox after it is installed on your PC along with detailing the
Menus and Options that the Trilogy Toolbox offers.
1. To access the Trilogy Toolbox, either select the icon from the desktop if you have created one, or
select “START --> ALL PROGRAMS -->TRILOGY TOOLBOX -->TRILOGY TOOLBOX”.

Desktop Icon

Start Menu
Option

2. You will then be prompted to enter your operator ID.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-59

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 3. The initial screen of the Trilogy Toolbox will now appear. The RASP communications will occur
automatically upon launching the program.

4. If RASP communication is not successful, or if you disconnect the UUT (Unit Under Test) and con-
nect a new device, select the “Init>Init RASP” from the Menu bar, and then select the “Execute
Tool” button.

PAGE 10-60 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

10.9.1 TOOLBOX MENU OPTIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS
LOG MENU
The Log Menu allows you to select what you would like to do with the information displayed on the Trilogy
Toolbox screen. Once the Trilogy Toolbox is exited, the information displayed on the screen is erased.

a. Clear – Clear the information currently displayed on the Toolbox Screen.

b. Print – Print the information currently displayed on the Toolbox Screen.
c. Save – Save the information currently displayed on the Toolbox Screen to a “.txt” file in a
folder of your choice for archiving and/or viewing at a later time.
d. Print As Report – Print the information currently displayed on the Toolbox Screen in a more
formal format which can include comments and Date – Time information.

SETUP MENU
The Setup Menu provides tools for manipulating the conditions of the Unit Under Test (UUT). These tools can
aid in the troubleshooting of the Trilogy Device by turning on/off certain components as well as changing
certain settings.

a. TV Cal Mode On/Off – In certain situations the UUT can become stuck in the on or off condi-
tion and the need arises to change that condition. This option will allow that change; from an
on to an off state and vice versa.
b. Real Time Clock – Sets the Real Time Clock (RTC) of the UUT to the time of the PC perform-
ing the testing.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-61

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 c. Detach. Batt FETs On/Off – In certain instances it may be necessary to change the status of
the FET’s controlling the Detachable Battery status. You may need to turn on or off the FET’s
to update or clear the current status. These two options allow you this ability.
d. Intern. Batt FET’s On/Off – In certain instances it may be necessary to change the status of
the FET’s controlling the Internal Battery status. You may need to turn on or off the FET’s to
update or clear the current status. These two options allow you this ability.
e. Ship Mode – This setting puts the UUT in a condition normally used after testing and prior to
shipment. It disables the Internal Battery power. For Service, this mode allows the unit to be
opened, repaired and put back together without the need of first disconnecting and lastly
reconnecting the Internal Battery. Once placed into Ship Mode, AC Power must be reapplied
in order to return to normal operation.
f. TV Blower On/Off – Turns the UUT Blower on or off. Can be used for troubleshooting UUT
blower functions.
g. OT Cal Mode On/Off – Not Used at this time.

READ MENU
The Read Menu allows the reading of various forms of information necessary in the servicing of the UUT.
There is no manipulation of the data in these selections, the information will be read from the UUT and
displayed on the screen.

a. Blower Hours – Reads and displays the UUT blower hours.

b. Therapy Hours – Reads and displays the UUT therapy hours.
c. MAC Address – Media Access Control, is a unique identifier number assigned to the UUT.
d. Real Time Clock – Reads the Time stored in the RTC of the UUT.
e. Charger Limit – Reads the Charger limit table and displays data, normally set to 65 for test-
ing.
f. Detach Batt Info – Provides information concerning the detachable battery, such as capacity
levels, voltage, current, Temperature, SH, Cycle Count, SF, Max error, Serial Number and Ship
Mode Status.
g. Intern. Batt Info – Provides information concerning the internal battery, such as capacity lev-
els, voltage, current, Temperature, SH, Cycle Count, SF, Max error, Serial Number and Ship
Mode Status.
h. Device Info – Provides Serial Number, Model Number and UUT Name.

PAGE 10-62 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 i. Device HW-SW Info – Provides info on the Hardware revision, Software revision, CPLD and
Boot revision of the UUT.
j. Device Cal Info – Provides the date of the last calibration along with several table statuses.

WRITE MENU
The Write Menu provides the ability to write data to the UUT using the Trilogy Toolbox. When selecting one of
the options, the information to be written to the UUT will be entered in the “Enter” block on the screen, and the
task will be completed by selecting the “Execute Tool” button.

a. Blower Hours – Enter blower hours for a UUT which has had the main PCA replaced and a
recording of the pre-existing blower hours is in place. This will allow accurate tracking of total
blower hours on each UUT.
b. Therapy Hours – Enter therapy hours for a UUT which has had the main PCA replaced and a
recording of the pre-existing therapy hours is in place. This will allow accurate tracking of total
therapy hours on each UUT.
c. MAC Address – Enter a new MAC Address for the UUT if required for operation on user net-
work.
d. Charger Limit – Enter new limit for Charger Table. Settings used will either be 45%, 65% or
100% depending on calibration action required.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-63

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
ERASE MENU
This Menu option has no functionality at this time. The functions of this menu are performed by the test
software at the beginning of every test. .

CLEANUP MENU
After some options have been performed it may be necessary to turn off and restart the UUT before performing
additional tasks. The Cleanup section of the Toolbox provides this functionality.

a. Reboot – Will reboot (shut down and restart) the UUT.

b. Close RASP – This will close the communications lines and stop all RASP communications.
This can be used when stopping testing on one UUT and starting testing on another UUT.

BROWSEUUTLOGS MENU
This Menu function allows you to view the saved Encrypted Significant Event Log files from the UUT’s. This is
the only way to view the “.BIN” files that are copied to the SD Card when select Write Event Log To SD Card

PAGE 10-64 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

from the UUT Setup Menu. Specific instructions for downloading and viewing the Event Log ".BIN" files is
located in chapter 6.

EXIT MENU
The Exit Menu exits the Trilogy Toolbox program. You will be prompted to ensure you wish to exit the program
and informed that the Toolbox Log Data will be lost once you exit. If you wish to save the log in soft copy or
hard copy, please return to the Log Menu and select Save or either of the Print options.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-65

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
10.10 TRILOGY FIELD SERVICE APPLICATION

NOTE
Prior to performing any of the testing sections, please allow equipment a warm-up period of no less than
10 minutes for stabilization. Perform self-cal on the RI Manometer and Druck DPI-150 if necessary.

This application must be performed after repair of a Trilogy Ventilator or during routine maintenance as
specified in the Maintenance Section of this Service Manual.

10.10.1EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
1. PC System with 1 Serial Port and at least 6 USB Ports with Windows XP installed
2. Differential Pressure Indicator (Required only for Trilogy 200, Trilogy O2, & Trilogy 202)
3. Digital Manometer (0-70 PSI Pressure Meter for Trilogy 100 & Trilogy 200 / 0-100 PSI Pressure
Meter for Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202)
4. External Power Supply Capable of providing 15 VDC and 24 Amps or Deep Cycle Marine Battery
12V
5. TSI Model 4040 Flow Meter
6. Flow Control Valve
7. Precision Pressure Regulator (Fairchild 10212)(Required only for manual testing of Trilogy 200,
Trilogy O2, & Trilogy 202)
8. USB to Serial Converter
9. Temperature and RH Meter
10. Trilogy to PC Data Cable
11. Serial RS-232 Cables (Quantity 3)
12. Merriam Pressure Pump w/ Vernier (Required only for Trilogy 200, Trilogy O2, & Trilogy 202)
13. Air Filtration and Regulation Assembly
14. Digital Multimeter capable of providing True RMS Measurements
15. Ethernet CAT 5 or 6 Cable
16. Linksys Network Switch Minimum 2 port
17. Test Orifice, .25” ID
18. Trilogy Nurse Call Adapter Cable
19. Outlet Port Cap (Quantity 2)
20. Smoothbore Tubing, 18” (Quantity 2)
21. SD Card
22. Exhalation Porting Block, Universal
23. Exhalation Porting Block, Passive
24. Trilogy Test Hardware Kit
25. O2 Vent Ports (Quantity 4)
26. Smoothbore Tubing, 6 ft.
27. Brass Barb Fitting Male for 1” hose ID and 3/4” Pipe
28. Reducing Hex Coupler 3/4” to 1/2” Female to Female
29. Reducing Hex Nipple 1/2” to 1/4” Male to Male

PAGE 10-66 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 30. Quick Connect Female 1/4” (Quantity 2)
31. Quick Connect Male 1/4” (Quantity 2)
32. Quick Connect Coupler 1/4” (Quantity 2)
33. TL930 Banana Plug Patch Cords (Quantity 2)
34. Prestolok Plus™ Push-to-Connect Fitting 1/4”
35. Silicone Port Clamp (Quantity 2)
36. Tubing 1/8 ID to 3/32 ID Reducer (Quantity 2)
37. Male NPT Hose Barb (Required only for Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202)
38. 3-Way Tee (Required only for Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202)
39. Male Nipple 1/8” (Required only for Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202)
40. Wing Nut, Oxygen Green (Required only for Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202)
41. Green Hose 96” (Required only for Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202)
42. CAPlugs O2 Inlet Air Cap (Required only for Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202)

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-67

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 15 14

11
18
7

10
42
20
16

24
2
17 3

6
23

12

13 21
8

19
25
22

PAGE 10-68 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

10.10.2EQUIPMENT SETUP
1. Connect the 9-pin connector of Trilogy to PC Data Cable to the Serial Port of the PC. Connect the
other end of the Trilogy to PC Data Cable to the back of the Trilogy Device serial port.
2. Connect one end of the USB to any open USB port of the PC. Connect the other end of the USB
to the USB to Serial Converter. The “New Hardware Wizard” will start and an indicator will pop-up
on the desktop screen.

3. Insert the CD, that came with the USB to Serial Converter, into the Computer’s CD or DVD drive
and follow the on screen prompts.
4. Select the “No, Not this time” choice, then click “Next”.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-69

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 5. Select the “Install the software automatically (Recommended) choice, then click “Next”.

6. Click the “Finish” button.

PAGE 10-70 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 7. The next installation will be for the USB Serial Port. Select the “Install the software automatically
(Recommended)” choice then click “Next”.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-71

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 8. The wizard will search for the USB Serial Ports. Once the wizard locates the ports the wizard is
complete. Click the “Finish”.

PAGE 10-72 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 9. Click the “Start” button on the computer’s desktop and then select the “Control Panel” option.

10. Click the “Performance and Maintenance” option.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-73

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 11. Click the “System” option.

12. Click the “Hardware” tab.

PAGE 10-74 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 13. Click the “Device Manager” button.

14. Double-click the very first Port (Usually COM3).

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-75

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 15. Click the “Port Settings” tab.

16. Click the “Advanced” button.

PAGE 10-76 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 17. Click the down arrow in the “COM Port Number” field.

18. Select the “COM11” option and then select the “OK” button.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-77

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 19. Select the “Scan for hardware changes” button in the menu bar. The first COM port should change
from the original value to COM11.

20. Following the steps above, change the next three COM port values to COM16, COM3, and COM6.

PAGE 10-78 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 21. Once the last COM port has been changed, you can close out of the program. Your USB to Serial
Converter is now setup and ready for use with the Trilogy test hardware. The TSI device will con-
nect to the COM11 port, the Second Trilogy will connect to COM16 port, and the Druck 150 will
connect to the COM6 port.

Connect TSI Here Connect Second Trilogy Here Connect Druck 150 Here

22. Connect one end of the Ethernet CAT 5 or 6 Cable to the RJ-45 connection of the PC. Connect
the other end of one of the Ethernet CAT 5 or 6 Cable to open RJ-45 connection of the Network
Switch.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-79

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 23. Connect one end of another Ethernet CAT 5 or 6 Cable to an open RJ-45 connection of Network
Switch. Connect the other end to the RJ-45 connection on the Trilogy device.

24. Connect the Keyboard, Mouse, Monitor, and Power connections to the PC.
25. Connect one end of Serial RS-232 Cable to connector set as COM 6 on the USB to Serial Con-
verter. Connect the other end of Serial RS-232 Cable to the serial connection on the back of the
Differential Pressure Indicator.

PAGE 10-80 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 26. Connect the 9-pin serial connection of the TSI Model 4040 to COM 11 on the USB to Serial Con-
verter. Connect the DIN connector of the TSI Model 4040 Flow Meter to the opening on the TSI
Model 4040 Flow Meter.

27. Connect the Stereo Jack end of Trilogy Nurse Call Adapter Cable to the back of the Trilogy device.
28. Connect four Test Orifices together and attach to the Trilogy outlet. Mark the Test Orifices with
cmH2O, Pprox, Vent 1, and Vent 2, in order from the Trilogy.

cmH20 Pprox Vent 1 Vent 2

29. Connect the tubing from the Digital Manometer to the port of cmH2O Test Orifice.

cmH20

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-81

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 30. Connect one end of Smoothbore Tubing 18” to the end of the Vent 2 Test Orifice. Connect the
other end of the tubing to the Flow Control Valve.

Vent 2

31. Connect one end of Smoothbore Tubing 18” to the other end of the Flow Control Valve. Connect
the other end of the tubing to the inlet of TSI Model 4040 Flow Meter.

32. Connect the Modified DC to Trilogy power cable between the External Power Supply or Deep
Cycle Marine Battery 12V and DC connector on the back of the Trilogy device.

PAGE 10-82 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 33. Connect two long pieces of tubing to the back ports of the Differential Pressure Indicator, one each
on the Low and High connectors. These will be the Reference and High tubing from the Differen-
tial Pressure Indicator. Connect the other end of “T” tubing to outlet port of the Merriam Pressure
Pump w/ Vernier.

34. If using shop air for negative flow, connect the Air Filtration and Regulation Assembly to the Shop
Air Supply. Assemble the Air Filtration and Regulation assembly by performing the following:
a. Using the mounting hardware provided with the filters, follow the instructions for connecting
the Particulate and Coalescing filter together. Starting from the left, place the F18-02-SL00
first, then the M18-02-CL00, then the M18-02-DL00, and finally the R18-02-F0G0.
b. Attach a Quick Connect 1/4” (male connector) to the open end on the left of the Filtration Sys-
tem.
c. Attach the Quick Connect Coupler 1/4” to the R18-02-F0G0.
d. Attach a Quick Connect 1/4” (male connector) to the 384-02C Watts Regulator then attach the
R18-02-F0G0 to the 384-02C Watts Regulator.
e. Connect the Quick Connect Coupler to the open end of the Watts Regulator.
f. The Watts Regulator control handle should be facing up and gauge should be facing front-
ward.
g. Connect the Quick Connect 1/4” (female connector) to the Prestolok Plus fitting and attach
tubing 532255 (22”) from the Trilogy Test Hardware Kit.
h. Connect the Brass Barb fitting (male) to the Reducing Coupler, then to the Reducing Nipple
and finally to the Quick Connect 1/4” (female connector). This will then connect as an assem-
bly to the Smoothbore Tubing.

NOTE
The use of Teflon tape for all fitting connections is recommended.

35. Connect all AC power cords for the devices to an AC outlet.

36. Prepare the Trilogy Nurse Call Adapter Cable(1045290) by finding the open end of the cable, with
three exposed wires, colored red, black, and brown.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-83

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 37. Mark the Red wire with reference to Tip.
38. Mark the Black wire with reference to Ring.
39. Mark the Brown wire with reference to Sleeve.
40. Zero the Differential Pressure Indicator by pressing the “ZERO” button and following the directions
on the screen.

10.10.3TRILOGY PRE-TEST PROCEDURE

CAUTION
When testing a Trilogy O2 or Trilogy 202 device, during the Oxygen Blending Module (OBM)
condition check (Step 11) it checks for OBM leaks. The software prompts to read from the
Respironics digital manometer (which leak setting is 25 +/- 0.5 cmH2O). It should not be confused
with the pressure indicator used for the OBM intake. Effects of this could be to damage the sensor
board.

1. Once you have installed the software, open the Auto Flow or Manual Flow Pre-Test software from
the shortcut on you desktop, double click the icon to open.

PAGE 10-84 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 2. Enter your operator ID and click the button next to Production. Then, click the enter button.

NOTE
There are 3 modes the FSA can be operated in:
1. Production Mode – This will complete all steps of the test software, whether in Pre Test or Post
Test, in continuous run mode. It will not ask for the individual steps to be selected, or stop in
between Groups or Tests. Must be used for final testing of unit before return to customer.
2. Group Level – This will allow the technician to complete Group level testing. In Pre Test you can
select any of the groups from 0010 to 0040 or 0060. In Post Test you can select any of the groups,
0010, 0030, 0040 or 0060. Should only be used for troubleshooting errors.
3. Test Level – This will allow the technician to complete the Test level testing. In Pre or Post Test
individual steps will provide a lower level of troubleshooting by allowing the operation in single
steps. Should only be used for troubleshooting errors.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-85

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 3. Follow the steps on the screen shot below.

PAGE 10-86 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 4. Enter the Serial Number and Model Number of the Device.

NOTE
Indicative of typical Trilogy Serial and Model Numbers.
TV1 = Trilogy 100
TV2 = Trilogy 200
TV0 = Trilogy O2
After TV1, TV2 or TV0 next 6 numbers indicate date of unit build (YYMMDD),
example would be – 100526 to indicate the unit was built 2010, May 26. Final 3
digits of Serial number indicate the unit build number for the day it was built,
example would be 025, indicating the 25th unit built on the given date.

5. Follow the rest of the on-screen prompts to continue with the test.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-87

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 6. When the on-screen prompt below appears, press the relief on the hand pump to release existing
pressure after connecting the hand pump tubing, then proceed with on-screen action (For Trilogy
200, Trilogy O2, & Trilogy 202 Only).

PAGE 10-88 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 7. Press the relief on the hand pump to release the existing pressure before generating pressure.
Continue with the on-screen prompts (For Trilogy 200, Trilogy O2, & Trilogy 202 Only).

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-89

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 8. When the on-screen prompt below appears, press the relief on the hand pump to release existing
pressure after connecting the hand pump tubing, then proceed with on-screen action (For Trilogy
200, Trilogy O2, & Trilogy 202 Only).

PAGE 10-90 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 9. Press the relief on the hand pump to release the existing pressure before generating pressure.
Continue with the on-screen prompts (For Trilogy 200, Trilogy O2, & Trilogy 202 Only).

10. When the on-screen prompt below appears, press the relief on the hand pump to release existing
pressure after connecting the hand pump tubing, then proceed with on-screen action ((For Trilogy
200, Trilogy O2, & Trilogy 202 Only).

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-91

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 11. Press the relief on the hand pump to release the existing pressure before generating pressure.
Continue with the on-screen prompts (For Trilogy 200, Trilogy O2, & Trilogy 202 Only).

12. When the on-screen prompt below appears, press the relief on the hand pump to release existing
pressure after connecting the hand pump tubing, then proceed with on-screen action (For Trilogy
200, Trilogy O2, & Trilogy 202 Only).

PAGE 10-92 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 13. Press the relief on the hand pump to release the existing pressure before generating pressure
(For Trilogy 200, Trilogy O2, & Trilogy 202 Only). 

14. Continue following the on-screen prompts to complete the test. Once the test is complete and the
device has passed, the following window will appear.

NOTE
If the device does not pass, perform repairs as necessary and retest the device.

15. Print the test report and keep for the records.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-93

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 16. Disconnect the device per the on screen instructions and proceed to device Run-in.

10.10.4 TRILOGY RUN-IN

The Trilogy device should be plugged into AC and be run-in a minimum of two (2) hours after Pre-test has been
performed. The Trilogy device should be connected to the ActivePAP configuration for run-in.

PAGE 10-94 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

10.10.5TRILOGY POST-TEST PROCEDURE

CAUTION
When testing a Trilogy O2 device, during the Oxygen Blending Module (OBM) condition check
(Step 11) it checks for OBM leaks. The software prompts to read from the Respironics digital
manometer (which leak setting is 25 +/- 0.5 cmH2O). It should not be confused with the pressure
indicator used for the OBM intake. Effects of this could be to damage the sensor board.

1. Once you have installed the software, open the Auto Flow or Manual Flow Post-Test software from
the shortcut on you desktop, double click the icon to open. You may run the Post-Test indepen-
dently of the Pre-Test for Preventative Maintenance testing.
2. Enter your operator ID, click the Production radio button and click “ENTER”.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-95

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 3. Follow the on-screen steps shown below.

PAGE 10-96 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 4. Enter the Serial Number and model number of the Device.

5. Follow the rest of the on-screen prompts to continue with the test.
6. When the on-screen prompt below appears, press the relief on the hand pump to release existing
pressure after connecting the hand pump tubing, then proceed with on-screen action (For Trilogy
200, Trilogy O2, & Trilogy 202 Only).

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-97

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 7. Press the relief on the hand pump to release the existing pressure before generating pressure.
Continue with the on-screen prompts (For Trilogy 200, Trilogy O2, & Trilogy 202 Only).

8. When the on-screen prompt below appears, press the relief on the hand pump to release existing
pressure after connecting the hand pump tubing, then proceed with on-screen action (For Trilogy
200, Trilogy O2, & Trilogy 202 Only).

PAGE 10-98 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 9. Press the relief on the hand pump to release the existing pressure before generating pressure.
Continue with the on-screen prompts (For Trilogy 200, Trilogy O2, & Trilogy 202 Only).

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-99

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 10. Follow the on-screen prompts.

PAGE 10-100 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 IMPORTANT NOTE
In the next steps, you will be asked to remove the 240 VAC and connect a meter into the
DC cable to measure the DC Current. Please follow the steps below carefully otherwise
an E280 error will be logged in the Error Log and will result in the test failing.

11. Remove 240 VAC, observe the AC Disconnected info message on the Trilogy Display.
12. After the AC Disconnected message is received, press the reset button on Trilogy Device.
Observe the Lead Acid icon is green and a black box is around the green Lead Acid icon.
13. Break the connection in the DC cable, and WAIT for the info message of Lead Acid Disconnected
on the Trilogy Display.
14. Connect the Meter in series with the DC Cable. Press reset on the Trilogy Device and observe that
the Lead Acid icon is green, and a black box is around the green Lead Acid icon.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-101

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 15. Measure the Lead Acid current as prompted.

16. Continue following the on-screen prompts to complete the test. Once the test is complete and the
device has passed, the following window will appear.

NOTE
If the device does not pass, perform repairs as necessary and retest the device.

17. Print the test report (non-production mode only). The test report will print automatically when in
production mode.

PAGE 10-102 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 18. Disconnect the device per the screen shot below.

19. Using ink, sign and date the printed test report and keep for the records.

NOTE
When setting up the device for the first time or after a calibration, apply AC power to the ventilator
before turning on the blower. Attempting to use the ventilator without first applying AC power, such
as installing a detachable battery pack and starting the blower, will cause the internal battery to be
displayed in red as an empty battery. When in this state, the internal battery will not be usable until
AC power is applied.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-103

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
10.11 SAFETY TEST (OPTIONAL)
This test is an optional test to be performed at intervals approved by the repair facility.
1. Plug the Trilogy device into a calibrate Safety Analyzer.
2. Measure and record the Normal Pole, No Earth, L2 enclosure leakage current. The value must be
less than 100 microamps to pass.
3. Measure and record the Reverse Pole, No Earth, L2 enclosure leakage current. The value must be
less than 100 microamps to pass.
4. Measure and record the Reverse Pole, No Earth, No L2 enclosure leakage current. The value
must be less than 300 microamps to pass.
5. Measure and record the Normal Pole, No Earth, No L2 enclosure leakage current. The value must
be less than 300 microcamps amps.

PAGE 10-104 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

10.11.1SAFETY TEST DATA SHEET

REVERSE
NORMAL REVERSE NORMAL
POLE, NO
POLE, NO POLE, NO POLE, NO
EARTH, L2
SERIAL MODEL EARTH, EARTH, NO EARTH, NO
<100 PASS/FAIL
NUMBER NUMBER L2 <100 L2 <300 L2 <300
MICROAMP
MICROAMP MICROAMPS MICROAMPS
S
S

Testing is in accordance to UL 60601-1 Safety Standards for medical devices.

TESTED BY:
TESTED BY: (PRINT) DATE:
(SIGNATURE)

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 10-105

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 This page intentionally left blank.

PAGE 10-106 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

CHAPTER 11: TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
11.0 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter details the necessary hand tools and supplies for troubleshooting, testing, and repairing the
Trilogy Ventilator.

11.1 COMMON HAND TOOLS

• Antistatic, Electro-Static Discharge (ESD)-protected work station - minimum requirement is a
grounded mat and wrist strap
• #1 Phillips Head Screwdriver
• #2 Phillips Head Screwdriver
• Straight Slot Screwdriver
• Torque Drivers
• 4 in-lbs.
• 6 in-lbs.
• 8 in-lbs.
• 10 in-lbs.
• 12 in-lbs.
• Hex Wrench - 1/8”
• 3/4”, 5/8”, & 1/4” open end wrenches
• Needle Nose pliers
• Side Cutters
• Wire tie gun

11.2 EQUIPMENT
• PC System with 1 Serial Port and at least 6 USB Ports available with Windows XP installed on the
computer (Respironics Part Number: 1071683)
• Monitor Capable of displaying 1280 x 1024 (Respironics Part Number: 1075945)
• Printer - USB/Ethernet (Dell 2130cn) (Respironics Part Number:1071684)
• Differential Pressure Indicator (Refer to Acceptable Test Equipment) (Trilogy 200, Trilogy O2, &
Trilogy 202 Only) ((Respironics Part Number: 1071613)
• Respironics Digital Manometer 0-70 cmH2O (Trilogy 100 & Trilogy 200 Only) (Respironics Part
Number: 302227)
• Digital Manometer 0-100 PSI (Refer to Acceptable Test Equipment) (Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202
Only) ((Respironics Part Number: 1071620)
• DC Power Supply (Refer to Acceptable Test Equipment) or Deep Cycle Marine Battery 12/24 V
(Respironics Part Number: 1071678)
• TSI Model 4040 Flow Meter (Respironics Part Number: 1071679)
• Flow Control Valve (Respironics Part Number: 1037985)

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 11-1

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 • 10212 Precision Pressure Regulator (Fairchild 10212) (Respironics Part Number: 1076027)
• USB to Serial Converter (Cables to Go Port Authority Model# 26479, or equivalent, must be exter-
nally powered) (Respironics Part Number: 1071680)
• Temperature and RH Meter (Refer to Acceptable Test Equipment) ((Respironics Part Number:
1071682)
• Trilogy Device to PC Data Cable (Respironics Part Number: 1046972) (Quantity 2)
• Trilogy to DC Power Supply Cable (Respironics Part Number: 1047295)
• RP - Current Draw Test Cable (Respironics Part Number: 1042993) (Quantity 2)
• Serial RS-232 Cables (Quantity of 2 minimum) (Respironics Part Number: 1071687)
• Merriam Pressure Pump w/ Vernier (Respironics Part Number: F98589) (Trilogy 200 & O2 Only)
• Air Regulator 0-100 PSI (Wilkerson R18-02-F0G0) (Respironics Part Number: 1071690)
• Air Regulator 0-125 PSI; Max 300 PSIG Inlet (Watts Fluid Air; Model R384-02C) (Respironics Part
Number: 1071689)
• Digital Multimeter (Refer to Acceptable Test Equipment) (Quantity 2) (Respironics Part Number:
1071681)
• Particulate Filter (Wilkerson F18-02-SL00 or equivalent) (Respironics Part Number: 1071691)
• Coalescing Filter (Wilkerson M18-02-CL00 or equivalent) (Respironics Part Number: 1071692)
• Coalescing Filter (Wilkerson M18-02-DL00 or equivalent) (Respironics Part Number: 1071693)
• Joiner Kit for Filters/regulator (Wilkerson GPA-96-603, MSC 94575529 or equivalent) (Quantity 3)
(Respironics Part Number: 1071694)
• Brass Hose Barb Fitting; 1/8” HB x 1/8” NPT Male (MSC 01045277 or equivalent) (Quantity 3)
(Respironics Part Number: 1071695)
• Ethernet CAT 5 or 6 Cable (Quantity 2) (Respironics Part Number: 1071685)
• Network Switch minimum 2-port (Respironics Part Number: 1071686)
• Test Orifice, .25” ID (Respironics Part Number: 332353)
• Outlet Port (Respironics Part Number: 312710) (Quantity 4)
• Trilogy Nurse Call Adapter Cable (Respironics Part Number: 1045290)
• Smoothbore Tubing, 18” (Respironics Part Number: 1008198) (Quantity 2)
• Smoothbore Tubing, 6 ft. (Respironics Part Number: 622038)
• SD Card for loading Trilogy software (Respironics Part Number: 1051801)
• SD Card Reader (Respironics Part Number: 1047300)
• Exhalation Porting Block, Universal (Respironics Part Number: 1040370)
• Exhalation Porting Block, Passive (Respironics Part Number: 1040372)
• Whisper Swivel II (Respironics Part Number: 332113)
• Test Lung (Respironics Part Number: 1021671)
• Trilogy Test Hardware Kit (Respironics Part Number: 1060747)
• Brass Barb Fitting Male for 1” hose ID and 3/4” Pipe (MSC - 5346K69 or equivalent) (Respironics
Part Number: 1071696)

PAGE 11-2 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

 • Reducing Hex Coupler 3/4” to 1/2” Female to Female (MSC - 50785K187 or equivalent)
(Respironics Part Number: 1071697)
• Reducing Hex Nipple 1/2” to 1/4” Male to Male (MSC - 5485K36 or equivalent) (Respironics Part
Number: 1071698)
• Quick Connect Female 1/4” (MSC - 84930064 or equivalent) (Quantity 2) (Respironics Part Num-
ber: 1071699)
• Quick Connect Male 1/4” (MSC - 84930189 or equivalent) (Quantity 2) (Respironics Part Number:
1071700)
• Quick Connect Coupler 1/4” (MSC - 84930890 or equivalent) (Quantity 2) (Respironics Part Num-
ber: 1071701)
• TL930 Banana Plug Patch Cords (MSC - 65244121 or equivalent) (Quantity 2) (Respironics Part
Number: 1071688)
• Prestolok Plus™ Push-to-Connect Fitting 1/4”; Thread Size: 1/4”; Thread Type: NPTF; Connection
Type: Male NPT (MSC - 84426139 or equivalent) (Quantity 2) (Respironics Part Number:
1071702)
• Cap Plug (www.caplugs.com EC-14 or equivalent) (Respironics Part Number: 1070135)
• Male NPT Hose Barb 1/8” (Bay Corp Part Number: MPT-22 or equivalent) (Quantity 2) (Trilogy O2
& Trilogy 202 Only) (Respironics Part Number: 1071703)
• 3-Way Tee 1/8” (Bay Corp Part Number T-2 or equivalent) (Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202 Only)
(Respironics Part Number: 1071704)
• Male Nipple 1/8” with a length of 1 “ (Bay Corp Part Number 1243-1 or equivalent) (Trilogy O2 &
Trilogy 202 Only) (Respironics Part Number: 1071705)
• Wing Nut, Oxygen Green (Bay Corp Part Number 1244MN or equivalent) (Trilogy O2 & Trilogy
202 Only) (Respironics Part Number: 1071706)
• Green Hose 3’ (Respironics Part Number: 1071707) (Trilogy O2 & Trilogy 202 Only)
• Port Cap, Silicone, .125 (Respironics Part Number: 1070259)
• Tubing 1/8 ID to 3/32 Reducer (Respironics Part Number: 35203)
• O2 Inlet Test Cap (Respironics Part Number: 1075946)
• Trilogy 100 device for negative flow (Respironics Part Number: 1054260)
• Trilogy 200 device for negative flow (Respironics Part Number: 1040005)

11.3 SUPPLIES
• Cleaning Cloth

• Mild Detergent

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 11-3

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
11.4 ACCEPTABLE TEST EQUIPMENT
DIGITAL MULTIMETER
Specifications
• 3 1/2” digital readout
• Must be able to measure AC/DC Current, True RMS
Acceptable Options
• Fluke 87-5 or better model
• Any commercially available digital multimeter that meets the above specifications.

DC POWER SUPPLY
Specifications
• 0-15 V,
• 0-25 A Regulated Power Supply
• 100-240V input
Acceptable Options
• ExTech Instruments 382290
• Any commercially available External Power Supply that meets the above specifications.

DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE INDICATOR

Specifications
• Pressure Range: 10 in H2O
• Precision: + 0.03% of reading F.S. combined non-linearity, hysteresis, repeatability and tempera-
ture effects over 18° to 28° C
• Engineering Pressure Units: 24 plus Altitude in feet or meters
• Pressure Connection: 1/8 in NPT Female
• Communication: RS-232 Standard
• AC/DC Power Adaptor 90 to 264 VAC input options
Acceptable Options
• Druck DPI 150
• Any commercially available Differential Pressure Indicator that meets the above specifications.

TEMPERATURE AND RH METER

Specifications
• Humidity + 3%; Temperature + 2° F (+ 1° C)
Acceptable Options
• B&K Precision Model 720

• Any commercially available Temperature and RH Meter that meets the above specifications.

PAGE 11-4 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

CHAPTER 12: SCHEMATICS
12.0 SCHEMATICS STATEMENT
Schematics are supplied with this manual in direct support of the sale and purchase of this product.
The schematics are proprietary and confidential. Do not copy the schematics or disclose them to third
parties beyond the purpose for which they are intended. Patents are pending.
The schematics are intended to satisfy administrative requirements only. They are not intended to be used for
component level testing and repair. Any changes of components could effect the reliability of the device,
prohibit lot tracking of electronic components, and void warranties. Repairs and testing are supported only at
the complete board level.
The schematics are of the revision level in effect at the time this manual was last revised. New revisions may
or may not be distributed in the future.

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 12-1

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 PAGE 12-2
+3.3V_IN +3.3V_IN +3.3V F LASH/E THER NE TC ONTR OLLER
P OWER IN VOLTAGE

J 1:A +3.3V_DIG +1.8V

1 50VDC
F L1

2 J 1:B

C 15
.1uF

D1
C 90
C 91
C 14

.1uF
.1uF
.1uF
DGND

600W
J 1:C
3

C 20
C 21
C 22
C 23
C 24
C 25
C 28
C 31
C 26
C 29
C 27
C 30

.01uF
.01uF
.01uF
.01uF
.01uF
.01uF
.01uF
.01uF
.01uF
.01uF
.01uF
.01uF
J 1:D
4 DGND
DGND DGND DGND DGND

DGND
+3.3V_DIG +3.3V
P ROCES S OR I/O/S DR AM
VOLTAGE DGND DGND
5 J 1:E
P LACE UNDER B GA 0402 package
+3.3V
F L3 50VDC
C 37
6 J 1:F P OR +3.3V
R 57
68.1K

+3.3V_DIG

C 16
.1uF
+3.3V_DIG +1.8V .1uF
DGND DGND
U9
1 8
G ND VCC

R 23
DGND

10.0K
33K
R 58

+ C 55 + C 54 2 7
22uF 22uF DGND TRIG DSC H

C 74
C 70
C 88
C 87
C 58
C 59
C 61
C 60
C 63
C 62
C 65
C 64

.1uF
.1uF
.1uF
.1uF
.1uF
.1uF
10V 10V

.01uF
.01uF
.01uF
.01uF
.01uF
.01uF
3 6
WAK EUP OUT T SHLD
4 5
S TANDBY _C PLD RS C RT L
+3.3V U5 LMC555CM
C 36
.1uF

T PS79418DC Q DGND DGND

1000pF DGND
2 5 P 1:Z
IN B Y PFB
/ 26
C 93 +1.8V P ROCES S OR C OR E
250ma DGND VOLTAGE DGND
10.0K

C 17
.1uF
1 +1.8V_INT
EN OUT 4
R 43 50VDC
+ C 18 F L2
G ND G ND +3.3V_DIG
2.2uF U1:A
3 6 10V

C 19
.1uF
DGND DGND E 10 J9 WAK EUP C IR CUIT
VDD VSS
E 11 J 10
VDD VSS
DGND H10 J 11
VDD VSS
DGND DGND H11 J 12
DGND VDD VSS
K5 K9
VDD VSS
K8 K 10
VDD VSS
K 13 K 11
VDD VSS
K 16 K 12
VDD I/O VSS
L5 L9
VDD P OWER /G ROUND VSS
L8 L10 P LACE S OC IN
VDD VSS S TANDBY MODE
L13 L11
RESE
T/3.3V_DIG & 1.8V S UP ER VISION VDD VSS (SOFT R E S E
T)
L16 L12
VDD VSS
N10 M9 USE R R E S E
T
VDD VSS TO MAIN S WITC H ON
N11 M10
VDD VSS B OARD MAIN B OARD
T 10 M11
VDD VSS
T 11 M12
VDD VSS
U18 T 18
VDD VSS USE R_RE S E T 104
+3.3V_DIG P 1:CZ
+1.8V .1uf
+3.3V_DIG .1uF DGND
+1.8V
C 95 E7 E6
VDDC VS S C
U10 E9 E 15
DGND VDDC VS S C
1 8 E 14 F5
S ENSE 1 VDD VDDC VS S C
R 15 G5 F 16
2 7 VDDC VS S C
S ENSE 2 WDI G 16 J 16
ZER O VDDC C OR E VS S C
3 6 P5 M5
P FI P FO VDDC P OWER /G ROUND VS S C
DGND P 16 R5
4 5 VDDC VS S C
G ND RESE T P OR

C 72
C 89
T7 R 16

.1uF
.1uF
VDDC VS S C
T PS3306-18DG K T 12 T6
VDDC VS S C
T 14 T 15
DGND VDDC VS S C

DGND DGND +1.8V

DGND
R 22 K eep trace as short as possible. APW R Y 17 V16
VDDA ANALOG P LL VS S A
100 W17 U15 APWR_GND
VDDA P OWER /G ROUND VS S A
+3.3V_DIG
+ C 52
22uF

C 56
.1uF
10V R 21 ADP WR W16 V13 ADP WR _G ND
VDDAD ANALOG A/D VS S AD
10.0
ZER O P OWER /G ROUND
+ C 53
R 28 22uF LH7A404

C 57
.1uF
10V
DGND
R 25

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

ZER O
K eep trace as short as possible.
DGND

K eep trace as short as possible.

T he LH7A404 has separate power and ground pins

for different internal circuitry sections. T he VDD and
VS S pins supply power to I/O buffers, while VDDC and
VS S Csupply power to the core logic, and VDDA/VS S A
supply analog power to the PLLs.

1002735, VER. 04
 1002735, VER. 04
+5V_ISO
C5

.1uF

1
ISOGND

C6
C7
1uF

C R3
.1uF
C4

S D05C
2
.1uF
U2
ISOGND
+3.3V +5V_ISO 1 10
G ND VCC

2
G ND
C1 C2
2 9
U1 C 1- C 1+

C R1
ISOGND

S D05C
.1uF 1 8 .1uF
VDD1 VDD2

1
C3
G ND ISOGND 3 8
E1 1000 OHMS @ 100 MHZ 2 7 V- SD
UAR T1_TX VOA VIA
.1uF
E2 1000 OHMS @ 100 MHZ 3 6 4 7 E3 1000 OHMS @ 100 MHZ
UAR T1_R X VIB VOB TIN T OUT R S232_R X_OUTP UT
4 5

1
G ND1 G ND2 5 6 E4 1000 OHMS @ 100 MHZ
R OUT R IN R S232_T X_INPUT
ADUM1201AR

C R2
S D05C
G ND ISOGND ADM101EARM

2
G ND

T O MOLEX
52316-2019 T O DB9
20 P IN P LUG +5V +5V_ISO C ONNEC TOR
+3.3V
+3.3V U3
1 VI+ VO+ 7 J 2:A
J 1:A R S232_T X_INPUT CONN M 3 PIN .079
1 P IN 2 R EC EIVE DAT A
P IN 20 1 CONN M 6 PIN .079

1
C8
C9

J 1:B 2.2uF J 2:B

2.2uF

P IN 19 2 CONN M 6 PIN .079

G ND R S232_R X_OUTP UT CONN M 3 PIN .079
2 P IN 3 TRANS MIT DATA

C R4
S D05C
2 5
VI- VO-

2
J 1:C UAR T1_TX
P IN 8 3 CONN M 6 PIN .079 J 2:C
DCH01050 CONN M 3 PIN .079
3 P IN 5 S IG NAL G ROUND
J 1:D UAR T1_R X DGND ISOGND
P IN 4 4 CONN M 6 PIN .079 G ND

5 J 1:E +5V ISOGND

P IN 11 CONN M 6 PIN .079

6 J 1:F DGND +5V

P IN 10 CONN M 6 PIN .079

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

1
C R5
S D05C
2
DGND

PAGE 12-3
 C PU DAUGHTE R C AR D
F RONT P ANEL B OARD

PAGE 12-4
S LIMS TACK
+3.3V
8-bit OUTPUT P OR T +3.3V_P LD

J 8:DB C P U_D0
D0 106 30 S PE AK ER _S EL +3.3V_P LD
J13:AD .1uF

.1uF
C191
C 90
S PK R2_S HUTDN 29 S PE AK ER 2 S HUTDOWN
J13:AC
DGND

100K

R146
R147
R148

10.0K
10.0K
S PK R1_S HUTDN
2
28 S PE AK ER 1 S HUTDOWN I C B US U21 DGND
J13:AB
3 U35
J 8:BE P C2 VCC
57 2 2 4
1 S QW/INT B C LK _OUT
S CL 14
J 8:DJ C P U_D4 16 VB K UP S N74LVC1G14DB V
D4 114 J13:Z 26 R ED ALARM LED S DA (3=DG ND,5=+3.3V_P LD)
J 8:BC P C3 4
55 10 NC
J 8:DM C P U_D5 NC 5
D5 117 25 Y ELLOW ALARM LED 11 NC +
J13:Y NC 6
12 NC

B1
J 8:DL C P U_D6 NC 7
D6 116 24 13 NC
J13:X NC 8

B R2032-1HE
NC
15 9
J13:W 23 U45:B +3.3V_P LD G ND NC
ZER O 3 4 DS1339C
R189 DGND R TC DGND DGND
NET00999_NC S N74LVC 2G 17DB V
NC 22
J13:V 2=DGND,5=+3.3V_P LD)
DGND

.1uF
+3.3V

C199
+3.3V_P LD S L IMS TAC K
+3.3V_P LD
GR OUNDS
J13:U 21 U45:A DGND F RONT P ANEL
1 6

100K
R156
P OR J 8:G
P A1 7
B0540WS S N74LVC2G17DB V
J 8:BY P A1 2=DGND,5=+3.3V_P LD) J 8:H
P A1 77 J13:T 20 S TART/S TOP K EY 8
U30 AC_PR E S E
NT 27

.1uF
.1uF

C106
C107
C108
C109

.01uF
.01uF
C R22 J13:AA J 8:AA
P A2 2 9 27
I/O_1 VCC
J 8:BW P A2 3 17 AC P OWER LED J 8:AB
P A2 75 19 ALARM S IL ENCE K EY T P13 I/O_1 VCC 28
J13:S 5 29
S PK R1_S HUTDN I/O_1 VCC J 8:AF
P A3 6 41 32
S PK R2_S HUTDN I/O_1 VCC DGND
J 8:BU P A3 8 J 8:AP
P A3 73 18 S PARE K EY ALARM_1_S TATUS I/O_1 WAK EUP_CP U P F#1 10 42
J13:R 10 18 WAK EUP_CP U J13:J
ALARM_2_S TATUS I/O_1 I/O_2 J 8:AS
P A4 11 19 AC_PR E S E
NT 45
P A6 I/O_1 I/O_2
J 8:BS P A4 100K 12 20 P F#2 J 8:BH
P A4 71 17 DOWN K EY VSLE E P P A1 I/O_1 I/O_2 9 60
J13:Q R228 13 21 B UZZER J13:I
SD_DETEC T I/O_1 I/O_2 J 8:BK
P A5 14 22 63
+3.3V P A3 I/O_1 I/O_2 DSP _WAK EUP
J 8:BQ P A5 +3.3V 15 23 SD_PWR_FAIL J 8:BZ
P A5 69 16 UP K EY I/O_1 I/O_2 78
J13:P 42 25 P F_LE D
I/O_1 I/O_2 J13:G 7 J 8:CC
+3.3V J 9:A 43 27 81
1 CONN M 6 PIN 100
P F#1 I/O_1 I/O_2 T P14
100K 44 28 J 8:CP
I/O_1 I/O_2 94
30 WAK EUP
R155 +3.3V_P LD I/O_2 J 8:CS
31 C PU DAUGHTE R C AR D 97
P A6 I/O_2 DSP _B UZZER

.1uF
C110
B0540WS 33 DE E P_SLE E P
DE E P_SLE E P
S LIMS TACK 10.0K J 8:DK
J 8:BO P A6 I/O_2 115
P A6 67 J13:O 15 R IG HT K EY 34 S LE E P_ENAB LE
J 9:B I/O_2 R205
C R15 2 CONN M 6 PIN 100 35 R EQUE ST _S LE E P J 8:AG
P A7 I/O_2 33 P H5 DGND
DGND
J 8:BM P A7

R169
R170
R172
R173
P A7 65 J13:N 14 LEF T K EY DGND J 8:CJ
88 P F3
J 9:C 26
3 CONN M 6 PIN 100
* * * * I/O_2/T CK
J 8:Z

R204
10.0K
J 8:BG S OF T_ALAR M J 9:D 32 26
P C1 59 J13:M 13 S OF T_ALAR M 4 CONN M 6 PIN 100
I/O_2/T DO
J 9:E 1 J 8:AX
5 CONN M 6 PIN 100
I/O_1/T DI 50 P G4
J 8:CO S PE AK ER _IN DGND
P WM3 93 J13:L 12 S PE AK ER IN J 9:F 7 4
6 CONN M 6 PIN 100
I/O_1/TMS P OR T_EN J 8:AC 29 P H7
ALARM_1_S TATUS
J 8:CE ALARM_1_S TATUS 37 S L IMS TAC K
P H0 83 J13:K 11 ALARM 1 S TATUS IN3/C LK 3 J 8:CX 102 P E5
38 16
ICT 15 IN2/C LK 2 G ND NO C ONNE C TS
ALARM_2_S TATUS 39 24
ICT 18 IN1/C LK 1 G ND
J 8:AZ ALARM_2_S TATUS 40 36
P G3 52 8 ALARM 2 S TATUS C LK _OUT IN0/C LK 0 G ND J 8:X
J13:H 24
R197
R158
R168

10.0K
10.0K
10.0K

+12V XCR3032XL-10VQ44C J 8:AL

38
DGND
66 J 8:BN
+3.3V 6
J13:F DGND DGND DGND
J 8:BP
68
5 +3.3V J 8:BR
J13:E 70
J 8:CI
J13:D 4 87
J 8:CK
89
J13:C 3
J 8:CR
R194
10.0K

96
DGND J 8:CT
98
WD_DIS AB LE 25 P H3
J 8:Y J 8:DD
V PWRF AIL 2 108
J13:B
+3.3V J 8:DF
+12V 104 USE R R E S E
T 110
J 8:CZ

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

NET00997_NC
R195

NC 1 +12V J 8:DN
J13:A CONN M R A4 PIN 2mm 118
1
J20:A J 8:DP
120
C 98 X5R

R202
10.0K
2.2uF 10V

DGND

.1uF
C153
J 8:AE B AC KLIG HT _OFF
31

.1uF
P H6

C152
CONN M R A4 PIN 2mm
2 DGND
C C FL J20:B
P LACE AROUND B OARD
INVER TE R
10.0K 5 DGND DGND
J 8:CM B RITE 3
P WM2 91 TP5 TP6 TP2
R199 1 INVER TE R_CONTROL CONN M R A4 PIN 2mm
U20 3
4 J20:C
TLV2370ID BV
CONN M R A4 PIN 2mm DGND DGND DGND
(2=DG ND,6=+12V) 4
J20:D

R201
23.7K
V_DCDC V _P WR

TP8 TP3

R200
10.0K
TP7 TP4

DGND P GND
DGND

1002735, VER. 04
1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 12-5
TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
PAGE 12-6 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 12-7
TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
PAGE 12-8 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

1002735, VER. 04 PAGE 12-9
TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION
PAGE 12-10 1002735, VER. 04

TRILOGY SERVICE & TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Reorder: 1002735, Ver. 04
BRM 6/11/2010